Toshiba Strata CT business telephone system Installation & Maintenance Manual
The Strata CT is a digital business telephone system that offers a wide range of features to meet the needs of small and medium-sized businesses. The system is easy to install and maintain, and it offers a variety of features to help you improve productivity and efficiency.
PDF
Download
Document
Advertisement
Advertisement
TOSHIBA H C Telecommunications Division Digital Business Telephone Solutions Installation & Maintenance Manual Release 1 October 2000 H C Publication Information Toshiba Information Systems (UK) Ltd. reserves the right to change any of this information including, but not limited to, product characteristics and operating specifications, without prior notice. It is intended that the information contained within this manual is correct at the time of going to print, however all liability for errors or omissions is excluded. Version 1, October 2000 © Copyright 2000 Toshiba Information Systems (UK) Ltd. Telecommunications Division All rights reserved. No part of this manual, covered by the copyrights hereon, may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying, or information retrieval systems—without express written permission of the publisher of this material. Stratagy and Strata are registered trademarks of Toshiba Information Systems (UK) Ltd. Trademarks, registered trademarks, and service marks are the property of their respective owners. Contents Introduction Organisation ........................................................................................................ ix Conventions ......................................................................................................... xi Related Documents/Media ................................................................................. xii Chapter 1 - Strata CT Configuration H C System Overview ............................................................................................... 1-1 Architecture ....................................................................................................... 1-2 Processor PCBs ................................................................................................. 1-2 Processor PCB Subassemblies ..................................................................... 1-3 Cabinet Slots ...................................................................................................... 1-3 Base Cabinet ................................................................................................ 1-3 Expansion Cabinets ...................................................................................... 1-4 Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) ..................................................................... 1-4 Maximum Station/Line Capacities .................................................................... 1-4 ISDN BRI Circuit Capacity Guidelines ............................................................ 1-5 Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit ..................................................................... 1-11 Strata CT Hardware Compatibility .................................................................. 1-12 Functional Block Diagrams ............................................................................. 1-13 Strata CT Cabinet Slot Configuration ............................................................. 1-16 PCB Placement Guidelines ........................................................................ 1-16 Power Considerations ................................................................................ 1-19 Reserve Power ........................................................................................... 1-20 Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware ..................................................... 1-20 Chapter 2 - Strata CT Installation Inspection .......................................................................................................... 2-1 Packaging and Storage ...................................................................................... 2-1 Site Requirements .............................................................................................. 2-2 Input Power .................................................................................................. 2-2 Clearance and Location ............................................................................... 2-2 Power Considerations ........................................................................................ 2-4 Reserve Power ............................................................................................. 2-4 Cabinet Installation Considerations ................................................................... 2-5 Recommended Installation Sequence ......................................................... 2-5 Strata CT I&M October 2000 i Install Power Supply .......................................................................................... 2-6 Testing the System’s Power Supply ............................................................ 2-6 Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure .................................................................. 2-7 Power Supply (BPSU672F) Removal .......................................................... 2-8 Power Supply Replacement ......................................................................... 2-8 Mount Cabinets................................................................................................... 2-9 Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet ....................................................... 2-9 Wall Mounting Expansion Cabinets ..........................................................2-10 Earth the System ...............................................................................................2-17 Install AC Power Components .........................................................................2-18 AC Power Requirements ............................................................................2-18 AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview .......................................2-19 Install Reserve Power .......................................................................................2-22 Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables ...........................................2-23 Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) ...........................2-23 Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) .......................2-24 Cabinet Floor Mounting .............................................................................2-26 Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) ...2-35 Install Universal and Processor PCBs ..............................................................2-35 PCB Installation Considerations ................................................................2-36 PCB Option Considerations .......................................................................2-36 BCU Processor PCBs ......................................................................................2-37 PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations ........................................2-37 Maximum Capacities .................................................................................2-37 Internal Hardware Options .........................................................................2-38 BCU Installation ........................................................................................2-40 BCU Programming ....................................................................................2-41 Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit .....................................................................2-49 Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions ...................................................2-50 Status Indicators .........................................................................................2-55 Monitor Port Communication Parameters .................................................2-56 Monitor Port Pin Assignments ...................................................................2-56 H C Chapter 3 - Universal Slot PCBs PCB Compatibility ............................................................................................ 3-1 PCB Chapter Layout .......................................................................................... 3-2 BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit (Future Release) ...................... 3-3 BVPU Configuration ................................................................................... 3-3 BVPU Installation ........................................................................................ 3-3 BVPU Programming .................................................................................... 3-4 PDKU – Digital Telephone Interface Unit ........................................................ 3-7 PDKU Hardware Options ............................................................................ 3-7 PDKU Installation ........................................................................................ 3-7 PDKU Programming .................................................................................... 3-7 PEKU – Electronic Telephone Interface Unit ................................................... 3-9 ii Strata CT I&M October 2000 H C Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation onto the PEKU (Internal Option) ..................................................................................... 3-9 External Options ........................................................................................ 3-10 PEKU Configuration to Support an HDSS Console Option ...................... 3-10 PEKU Installation ...................................................................................... 3-10 PEKU Programming .................................................................................. 3-10 PIOU, PIOUS – Option Interface Units .......................................................... 3-12 IMDU2 Installation onto a PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (Internal Option) ............. 3-12 PIOU, PIOUS Installation .......................................................................... 3-13 PIOU, PIOUS Programming ...................................................................... 3-13 PEPU2 – External Page Interface Unit ............................................................ 3-17 PEPU2 Installation ..................................................................................... 3-17 PEPU2 Programming ................................................................................. 3-18 PCOU - Exchange Line Interface Unit ........................................................... 3-19 RATU - Attendant Console Interface Unit ...................................................... 3-22 RATU Installation ...................................................................................... 3-22 RATU Programming .................................................................................. 3-22 PEMU - DC5 Tie Line Unit ............................................................................ 3-23 PACU - AC15 Tie Line Unit ........................................................................... 3-26 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS – RS-232/Modem Interface Unit ................................... 3-29 RSIS, RMDS Piggy-Back Installation ....................................................... 3-30 RSIU Installation ....................................................................................... 3-30 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS Programming ............................................................ 3-33 PSTU & RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit ..................................... 3-35 R48S -48 Volt Supply Installation (Internal Option) ................................. 3-35 External Options ........................................................................................ 3-36 RSTU2/RSTU3 Installation ....................................................................... 3-36 PSTU/RSTU Programming ....................................................................... 3-38 Chapter 4 - Universal Slot PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................... 4-2 Digital Station Wiring .................................................................................. 4-2 Electronic Station Wiring Diagrams ............................................................ 4-5 Attendant Console Wiring Diagrams ........................................................... 4-9 Analogue Devices Wiring .......................................................................... 4-11 Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs ..................................... 4-13 Exchange Line Wiring Diagrams .................................................................... 4-15 Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams ......................................................... 4-19 Chapter 5 - Station Apparatus Types of Telephones .......................................................................................... 5-1 Electronic Telephones .................................................................................. 5-2 Standard Telephones .................................................................................... 5-3 Strata CT I&M October 2000 iii Telephone Installation ....................................................................................... 5-3 Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) ................ 5-4 System Connection ......................................................................................5-4 Telephone Wall Mounting ........................................................................... 5-5 Telephone Upgrades .......................................................................................... 5-7 Digital Telephone Upgrades ........................................................................ 5-8 DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone ......................................................... 5-9 Installation ..................................................................................................5-10 Programming ..............................................................................................5-10 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) ..........................................5-11 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps .................................................................5-14 Beep Strap ..................................................................................................5-14 Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) .......5-15 Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/Headset Option ..5-15 External Power Straps ................................................................................5-16 DKT2000 ADM Installation ......................................................................5-16 Electronic Telephone Upgrades .......................................................................5-16 Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) ..................5-16 Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) ..........................................5-18 Carbon Headset/Handset Straps .................................................................5-20 Beep Strap ..................................................................................................5-20 Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only) .............................5-21 Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap (Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only) .....................................................................................................5-21 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection ..........................5-21 DDSS Console Connections ......................................................................5-21 DDSS Programming ..................................................................................5-22 HDSS Console ...........................................................................................5-22 Door Phone (MDFB) .......................................................................................5-23 Lock Control Unit and Door Phone .................................................................5-23 DDCB/HDCB and MDFB Cabling ...........................................................5-23 DDCB/HDCB Wall Mounting ...................................................................5-24 MDFB Wall Mounting ...............................................................................5-25 Door Phone/Lock Programming ................................................................5-25 Digital Add-on Module Installation ................................................................5-26 ADM Programming ...................................................................................5-28 Windows Operator’s Console (WOC) .............................................................5-28 Hardware Installation .................................................................................5-28 Windows Operator’s Console (WOC) Programming ................................5-30 Windows Operator’s Console (WOC) Software Installation .....................5-32 Conventional Attendant Console .....................................................................5-32 Installation ..................................................................................................5-32 Conventional Attendant Console Programming ........................................5-32 H C iv Strata CT I&M October 2000 Chapter 6 - Peripheral Installation H C Power Failure Options ....................................................................................... 6-1 Reserve Power ............................................................................................. 6-1 Strata CT Power Failure Transfer Unit ........................................................ 6-1 Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation ............................. 6-2 Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options .......................... 6-3 MOH Option ................................................................................................ 6-3 BGM Options ............................................................................................... 6-6 Alternate BGM Source Installation ............................................................. 6-9 External BGM Installation ......................................................................... 6-10 Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control .............................................. 6-10 External Page/Door Lock Relay Options (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) ........ 6-10 Night Transfer/Night Relay Options with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU ......... 6-15 External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options .......................................................... 6-17 Loud Speaker Amplification Option .......................................................... 6-17 Amplified Speaker Option ......................................................................... 6-22 Talkback Amplified Speaker Option ......................................................... 6-23 HESB Wall Mounting ................................................................................ 6-26 T001B Relay Unit Options .............................................................................. 6-26 System Hardware Requirements ................................................................ 6-26 T001B Installation ..................................................................................... 6-27 T001B Relay Unit Test .............................................................................. 6-27 External Page Options ..................................................................................... 6-28 External Page Option Installation .............................................................. 6-28 SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options ............................................ 6-34 SMDR Printout Examples ......................................................................... 6-37 SMDR Programming ................................................................................. 6-39 SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation ................................. 6-39 System Database Printout Using SMDR Port ................................................. 6-40 Program 97 ................................................................................................. 6-40 Voice Mail Options ......................................................................................... 6-41 Toshiba Stratagy & Stratagy DK Voice Messaging Systems .................... 6-41 Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems ................................. 6-43 General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming ................. 6-43 Voice Mail Program Checklist .................................................................. 6-44 Voice Mail System Installation .................................................................. 6-45 Auto Attendant ................................................................................................ 6-46 Strata CT Built-In Auto Attendant (AA) ................................................... 6-46 Non-built-in Auto Attendant ...................................................................... 6-52 Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, Installation ............................................................... 6-53 Chapter 7 - ACD Installation Installation ......................................................................................................... 7-2 Multiple Serial Port Installation ................................................................... 7-2 Strata CT I&M October 2000 v Wiring .......................................................................................................... 7-3 ACD Installation Guidelines ............................................................................. 7-4 Initialise the System ...........................................................................................7-4 Install the Feature Key........................................................................................ 7-4 Install Related PCBs ...........................................................................................7-4 Connect COM Port Wires................................................................................... 7-5 Install ACD/MIS Interface ................................................................................. 7-5 Set the MIS Channel...........................................................................................7-5 Connect Announcement Devices........................................................................ 7-5 Connect Music Sources ......................................................................................7-6 Install ACD to Strata CT Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Integration ................. 7-6 Assign ACD to Toshiba Stratagy or Customer Supplied Voice Mail AA Integration..................................................................................................... 7-6 ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations .........................................7-7 ACD Programming ......................................................................................7-7 Direct Incoming Assignments to ACD Groups ........................................... 7-7 DDI/Tie Incoming Line Calls ...................................................................... 7-7 Transfer From Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) to ACD Group ..................... 7-8 Transfer From External AA to an ACD Group ........................................... 7-8 Overflow From an ACD Group Queue ........................................................ 7-8 ACD Group Status ....................................................................................... 7-9 Agent Ring No Answer Call Treatment .....................................................7-10 ACD SMDR Printout Examples ................................................................7-11 Insight DK .......................................................................................................7-15 Strata CT Requirements .............................................................................7-15 Reference Information ...............................................................................7-15 Wall boards ................................................................................................7-15 H C Chapter 8 - Fault Finding Fault Classification ............................................................................................ 8-1 Fault Clearing Procedures ................................................................................. 8-1 Parts Return .......................................................................................................8-2 Processor PCB Fault Isolation ........................................................................... 8-3 Fault Isolation Procedure ............................................................................. 8-3 Station Cable Continuity Check ........................................................................ 8-4 Voltmeter Test ............................................................................................. 8-4 Ohmmeter Test ............................................................................................. 8-5 Cable Installation Test ................................................................................. 8-6 Fault Isolation Flowcharts ................................................................................. 8-7 Chapter 9 - Computer Telephony Integration Installing Computer Telephony Integration ...................................................... 9-1 About Strata CT and TAPI ................................................................................9-1 vi Strata CT I&M October 2000 H C Requirements ..................................................................................................... 9-2 StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 & NT ........................ 9-2 Install TSPI and/or StrataLink Packages ........................................................... 9-4 TSPI Description ............................................................................................... 9-8 Purpose .............................................................................................................. 9-8 Introduction ....................................................................................................... 9-8 Levels of Service ............................................................................................... 9-9 Strata CT's TSPI Model ..................................................................................... 9-9 The DKT TSPI Call State Flow ....................................................................... 9-10 System Messages ............................................................................................. 9-10 Start-up and Shutdown of TAPI ...................................................................... 9-11 Receiving Information ..................................................................................... 9-12 Basic Call Control ........................................................................................... 9-20 Holding Calls ................................................................................................... 9-21 Transferring Calls ............................................................................................ 9-21 Conferencing ................................................................................................... 9-22 Call Parking ..................................................................................................... 9-23 Call Forwarding ............................................................................................... 9-23 Call Pickup ...................................................................................................... 9-23 Miscellaneous Functions ................................................................................. 9-23 Extended Services ........................................................................................... 9-24 Using StrataLink for CTI Connections ............................................................ 9-27 StrataLink Functions ....................................................................................... 9-28 Software Application Initiated Events ............................................................. 9-28 Telephone System Events ................................................................................ 9-30 Tokens ............................................................................................................. 9-33 TeleMagic Link ............................................................................................... 9-35 Debugging ....................................................................................................... 9-36 Using Goldmine ‘95 with StrataLink .............................................................. 9-37 Goldmine '95 Installation Guidelines .............................................................. 9-38 Beneficial Options Available in Goldmine 95 ................................................ 9-41 Using ACT! 3.0 with StrataLink ..................................................................... 9-43 Linking ACT! 3.0 with StrataLink .................................................................. 9-43 Installing ACT! 3.0 .......................................................................................... 9-44 Using StrataLink with Access ‘97 ................................................................... 9-47 Handling Outgoing Calls ................................................................................. 9-48 Handling Incoming Calls ................................................................................. 9-48 Using StratLink with Outlook 97/98/2000 ...................................................... 9-50 Handling Outgoing Calls ................................................................................. 9-50 Chapter 10 - ISDN Interfaces PRI Overview .................................................................................................. 10-1 BRI S/T Overview ........................................................................................... 10-1 Strata CT I&M October 2000 vii System Capacity of ISDN Circuits ............................................................10-2 RPTU Interface Unit ........................................................................................10-3 RPTU Overview .........................................................................................10-3 Strata CT Slot Assignments .......................................................................10-3 Strata CT Slot Assignments .......................................................................10-4 RPTU Installation ............................................................................................10-4 Cabling .......................................................................................................10-7 RBSU/RBSS Interface Units ...........................................................................10-8 Overview ....................................................................................................10-9 Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information .................................................... 10-10 PS-1 Line Power Option .......................................................................... 10-10 RBSU/RBSS Installation ......................................................................... 10-12 Run Related Programs ................................................................................... 10-12 Set Option Switches/Jumpers ......................................................................... 10-12 Install the RBSS.............................................................................................. 10-14 Install the R40S1A.......................................................................................... 10-14 Install RBSU/RBSS PCBs into Cabinet ......................................................... 10-14 Modular Jack Pin Configurations ............................................................ 10-15 RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines ................................................10-16 Connecting RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode) .....................................10-18 Connecting RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode) ........................... 10-19 Timing and Synchronisation .......................................................................... 10-22 RPTU Performance Monitoring ............................................................... 10-24 PRI/BRI Call Monitoring .............................................................................. 10-26 BRI Call Monitor ..................................................................................... 10-29 SMDR Output for ISDN ................................................................................ 10-31 ISDN Disconnect Cause Code ....................................................................... 10-31 Explanation of the LCD Information ....................................................... 10-31 Q931 ETSI (BTNR 191) Clearing Cause Codes .....................................10-34 H C Notes to Users Safety Approval ............................................................................................... A-1 EMC Compliance .............................................................................................. A-3 Type Approval................................................................................................... A-3 Network Planning Information .......................................................................... A-4 Glossary Index viii Strata CT I&M October 2000 Introduction This manual provides detailed step-by-step instructions for installing and maintaining the Strata CT digital business telephone systems. It is intended for qualified service technicians and system programmers. Use this manual in conjunction with the Strata CT Programming Manual which covers the programs related to the Strata CT systems discussed in this book. Organisation This manual is organised into these sections/chapters for your convenience: H ◆ ◆ Chapter 1 – Strata CT Configuration explains how to configure a Strata CT system. C ◆ Chapter 3 – Universal Slot PCBs provides procedures for Strata CT system Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) for installation into universal slots. It includes installation instructions, optional configuration information, and wiring and programming considerations for each PCB. ◆ Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies to the Strata CT systems. Chapter 2 – Strata CT Installation covers site requirements and cabinet installation. Defines the site requirements necessary to ensure a proper operating environment for the Strata CT. Also included are input power requirements, cable lengths/network requirements, and earthing requirements. Explains how to install the Base and the Expansion Cabinets. Instructions are also provided on how to remove and replace cabinets on installed systems. Note Wiring diagrams for PCBs that cannot be installed into universal slots can be found in the installation chapter for the system (e.g., Chapter 2 – Strata CT Installation). ◆ Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata CT systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles, PC and conventional attendant consoles, and door phones also appear. ◆ Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation provides connection procedures for optional peripheral equipment to Strata CT systems. The instructions for each option include hardware requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and programming considerations. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ix Introduction ◆ Chapter 7 – ACD Installation includes installation instructions for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Management Information System (MIS) for the Strata CT. ◆ ◆ Chapter 8 – Fault Finding for troubleshooting and fixing problems. Chapter 9 – Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) contains CTI, TAPI, and System Open Architecture Interface information. CTI application notes can be inserted here. ◆ Chapter 10 – ISDN Interfaces contains an overview of the ISDN hardware with specific information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). It includes instructions for installation, hardware requirements, wiring requirements, and some programming considerations. ◆ ◆ Notes to Users contains an overview of Safety Approval and EMC Compliance details. Glossary/Index H C x Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Introduction Conventions H C Conventions Description Note Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some tables, general notes apply to the entire table and numbered notes apply to specific items. Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information. CAUTION! Advises you that hardware, software applications, or data could be damaged if the instructions are not followed closely. WARNING! Alerts you when the given task could cause personal injury or death. [DN] Represents any Directory Number button, also known as an extension or intercom number. [PDN] Represents any Primary Directory Number button (the extension number for the telephone). An extra appearance of the PDN on the same phone is not considered as a SDN. [SDN] Represents any Secondary appearance of a PDN. A PDN which appears on another telephone is considered an SDN. [PhDN] Represents any Phantom Directory Number button (an additional DN). Arial Bold Courier Represents telephone buttons. Shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display. “Type” Indicates entry of a string of text. “Press” Indicates entry of a single key. For example: Type prog then press Enter. Plus (+) Shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example: Esc+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential entry. Example: # + 5. Tilde (~) Means “through.” Example: 200 ~ 220 station range. BCU Represents all of the Strata CT processors. The Strata CT processors are: B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, B5CAU/B5CBU. B2CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B2CBU. B3CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B3CAU/B3CBU. B5CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B5CAU/B5CBU. ➤ Denotes the step in a one-step procedure. ➤ Denotes a procedure. 03 ● ● ● See Figure 10 Used in a programming sequence to denote a variable LED button. A number on the black button represents a specific LED button. Indicates continuation of a series of numbers entered. Grey words within the printed text denote cross-references. In the electronic version of this document (Strata Library CD-ROM), cross-references appear in blue hypertext. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 xi Introduction Related Documents/Media Note H C xii Some documents listed here may appear in different versions on the CD-ROM, or in print. To find the most current version, check the version/date in the Publication Information on the back of the document’s title page. ◆ Strata CT General Description provides a system overview including hardware and feature information. ◆ Strata CT System Administrator Guide gives instructions for the System Administrator to manage the system. Contains instructions for Station Relocation, System Speed Dial, and other features only activated by the System Administrator. ◆ Strata CT Digital Telephone User Guide provides all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-proprietary digital telephones, including Single Line Digital Telephone Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) features. It also includes instructions for using the add-on module/DSS console. ◆ Strata CT Digital Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-used digital telephone features. ◆ Strata CT Electronic Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate Toshiba-proprietary electronic telephones, including all LCD features. It also includes instructions for using the electronic DSS console. ◆ Strata CT Electronic Telephone Quick Reference Guide provides a quick reference for frequently-used electronic telephone features. ◆ Strata CT Standard Telephone User Guide explains all the procedures necessary to operate rotary dial and push-button standard telephones. ◆ Strata CT ACD Agent Guide describes the ACD agent feature operation along with step-by-step procedures for using features. ◆ Strata CT ACD Supervisor Guide provides instruction on how to use the ACD supervisor features. ◆ Strata CT Programming Manual provides programming information for the Strata CT system. ◆ Strata CT Technical Library CD-ROM enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications for Strata DK40 and Strata CT digital business telephone systems. It also includes Strata CT ACD Documentation, including the ACD Agent Guide and ACD Supervisor’s Guide. ACD Installation and Programming instructions are included in the Strata CT Installation and Maintenance Manual and Programming Manual. ◆ Stratagy Voice Processing Technical Library CD-ROM provides voice processing information for the Strata CT system. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration 1 Strata CT Configuration This chapter contains information to help configure the Strata CT systems. A system overview of CT components and the maximum station and line capacities available with each system processor is provided. System Overview H C Strata Strata CT easily connects to outside public telephone lines (Exchange lines). All of the telephones (stations) tied to the system can have direct access to each other as well as to the public network. A modular design and a choice of four processors, also called common control units, enables the system to fit a variety of customer needs and capacities. The Strata CT can be configured as a single cabinet system that provides capacity of up to 64 Exchange lines and stations combined, and can grow to a five cabinet system that provides capacity for up to 432 Exchange lines and stations combined. (See Table 1-4 for details.) The system line and station capacity can be increased by adding additional cabinets (see Figure 1-1 and Table 1-1) which have universal slots capable of interfacing with most line, station, and option interface PCBs available with the system. 5036 Figure 1-1 Base/Expansion Cabinets Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-1 Strata CT Configuration Architecture The Base Cabinet and optional Expansion Cabinets are the building blocks of the system. Each system has a Base Cabinet, and can have from one to four Expansion Cabinets. All lines, stations, and options are tied together through the cabinets. Table 1-1 Cabinet Specifications Cabinet Weight Height Width Depth Base Cabinet (CHSUB672) 31 lbs. 11.65 in. 26.5 in. 10.6 in. Expansion Cabinet (CHSUE672) 29 lbs. 10.0 in. 26.5 in. 10.6 in. Processor PCBs The system operates with one of four processors (B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, or B5CAU/B5CBU). These processors can only be installed in dedicated slots in the Base Cabinet (slots B101 and B102). H ◆ B1CU – a single processor PCB that supports only the Strata CT Base Cabinet with up to eight universal slots. ◆ B2CAU/B2CBU – two PCBs that support up to two cabinets, with up to 18 universal slots. ◆ B3CAU/B3CBU – two PCBs that support up to three cabinets, with up to 28 universal slots. ◆ B5CAU/B5CBU – two PCBs that supports up to five cabinets, with up to 48 universal slots. Each processor provides a MOH/BGM source interface, and connectors to mount optional DTMF receiver PCBs required for some Exchange line types and peripherals, as described below. Each processor provides an interface for connecting an optional feature key (RKYS) as described below. B3CAU/B3CBU and B5CAU/B5CBU require a remote maintenance PCB, usually installed in slot S101; the remote maintenance PCB is optional for the B1CU and B2CAU/B2CBU. Table 1-2 lists the clock speed and available chips and memory for each processor. C Table 1-2 Strata CT Processors and Memory Cabinets B1CU B2CAU/B2CBU B3CAU/B3CBU B5CAU/B5CBU Main CPU 68000 (8.192 MHz) 68000 (16.384 MHz) 68000 (16.384 MHz) 68EC020 (16.0 MHz) Sub-CPU TMP90C802-4011 x 1 (10MHz) TMP90C802-4011 x 2 (10MHz) TMP90C802-4011 x 3 (10MHz) TMP90C802-4011 x 5 (10MHz) Program Memory 2MB (4MB x 4) EPROM 2MB (4MB x 4) EPROM 2MB (4MB x 4) EPROM 2 MB (4MB x 4) Flash Memory RAM 1MB (4MB x 2) 2MB (4MB x 4) 2MB (4Mb x 4) 2.5MB (4MB x 4 + 1MB x 4) 1-2 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Processor PCB Subassemblies Subassemblies required for some features can be added to the processor PCBs. These are described in the following paragraphs. DTMF Receiver Subassembly (BRCS) The BRCS is required to translate DTMF tones needed for DISA, Tie, voice mail, AA announcement devices, DTMF standard telephones, and other devices. The BRCS attaches to the processor PCB and is available with either 4, 8, or 12 (BRCS-4, -8 or -12) shared receiver circuits. See Table 1-5 on Page 1-6 for more information. RKYS Feature Key Upgrades The system can be upgraded for built-in AA, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Software Management Information System (SMIS) and Insight DK with the following feature keys that attach to the processor. See Table 1-3 for features provided by RKYS2~4. Table 1-3 RKYS Features Features Provided to all Strata CT Processors H RKYS11 RKYS2 RKYS3 RKYS4* X X X X Built-in Auto Attendant ACD X ACD with MIS data information X X X X * Enhanced ACD with MIS data information. 1 Built into all Processors as standard. C Cabinet Slots Base Cabinet The Base Cabinet has two slots reserved for the system processor PCBs and eight universal slots, labeled “S101~S108,” that can accommodate station, line or option PCBs (see Figure 1-2). It also houses a power supply described later in this chapter. B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 DC OUT -24V1 -24V2 BATT + - -24V3 -24V4 POW +5V AC IN -5V P.F. RESET POWER ON EXP BASE FG B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 OFF S108 5002 5037 CT I&M Figure 1-2 Strata CT Base Cabinet Interior Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-3 Strata CT Configuration Expansion Cabinets Expansion cabinets can be added to increase station and Exchange line capacity of systems that allow multiple cabinets. Figure 1-3 shows an example of the interior of an expansion cabinet. Refer to the following section for station/line capacities. Table 1-4 shows the number of stations and lines available when additional cabinets and PCBs are used. DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 7 -27V1 -27V1 S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 S_05 S_06 S_07 S_08 S_09 S_10 OFF OFF 5002 5002 5003 CT I&M 00 Figure 1-3 Strata CT Expansion Cabinet Interior H Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) PCBs are installed in the cabinets to provide interface for stations, lines, and peripherals. Each PCB measures 7.5 x 5.5 inches (190 x 140 mm) and mounts in the slot with a 44-pin backplane connector. PCB external connections to station equipment are made to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) using industry-standard connectors. C Maximum Station/Line Capacities Attaining maximum system capacities depends on power consumption of a particular configuration. Configurations for a fully expanded system can range from 200 lines or 336 stations. One universal slot is required for Remote Maintenance PCB with B3CAU/B3CBU and B5CAU/B5CBU, but is optional for B1CU and B2CAU/B2CBU. A summary of the maximum number of lines and stations by processor is shown in Table 1-4. Table 1-4 Strata CT Maximum Capacities B1CU B2CAU/ B2CBU B3CAU/ B3CBU B5CAU/ B5CBU Maximum Exchange Lines 32 120 120 200 Maximum Stations 56 144 192 336 System Ports (total) 64 172 266 432 Cabinets * Configuration numbers marked with a * do not include a slot for the Remote Maintnenace PCB. All other configurations (without an *) assume that a slot is provided for the Remote Maintenance PCB. 1-4 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration ISDN BRI Circuit Capacity Guidelines This section shows the capacity guidelines for ISDN BRI circuits using the RBSU/RBSS PCBs. 1. Each BRI circuit can be configured to support either one BRI (TE or TA) ISDN station; or two ISDN line channels. 2. A maximum of two BRI circuits per RBSU/RBSS PCB may be used as BRI line circuits to connect to the ISDN Exchange line. Each circuit provides two Exchange line channels to the Strata CT. 3. Each BRI circuit provides two B channels plus one D channel and reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two Exchange lines, regardless of how it is configured (line or station). Each (N/T) BRI station circuit allows up to two TE-1 and TA devices to share the BRI B channels (two simultaneous calls maximum per BRI circuit). 4. RBSS can only be used for BRI stations. All other BRI PCBs can be configured as line or station BRI circuits. H C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-5 Strata CT Configuration Maximum capacities for system features, lines, stations and peripherals and telephone subassemblies are shown in Tables 1-5~1-8. Table 1-5 System Feature Capacities Strata CT Capacities Features C B3CAU/ B3CBU B5CAU/ B5CBU 12 24 24 24 Caller ID Abandoned Call Numbers (Missed Calls): stored per station 10~100 10~100 10~100 10~100 2000 200 400 1000 Exchange Line Groups 8 16 16 16 Distributed Hunt (DH) Calls in Queue per Groups 10 10 10 10 DH Groups 16 16 16 16 DH stations per Group 32 32 32 32 DDI Network Routing Numbers 200 300 300 300 DDI Numbers 350 500 500 700 DTMF receivers 12 24 24 24 External Page Zones 4 4 4 8 Call Park Orbits - general 20 20 20 20 Call Park Orbits - individual 80 240 240 336 Personal LCD Messages per DKT1 10 10 10 10 Personal Message DKTs 32 96 96 96 [PhDNs] per System 80 240 240 336 [PDNs] per System 56 144 192 336 Ring Tones 3 3 3 3 Simultaneous Party Conferencing (4-party) 7 7 7 14 Simultaneous Two-Exchange Line conferencing (3-party) 10 10 10 20 Stations 56 144 192 336 Station Speed Dial 40 40 40 40 System LCD Messages 40 40 40 40 System Speed Dial 800 800 800 800 Telephone Page Groups 5 9 9 9 Telephone Group Page – simultaneous stations paged 80 120 120 120 Telephone Pickup Groups 20 20 20 20 Tenants 4 4 4 4 Toll Restriction (AC/OC) Table 8 16 16 16 Toll Restriction Classes 4 8 8 8 Verified Account Codes 300 300 300 500 Voice Mail SMDI Yes Yes Yes Yes 1. 1-6 B2CAU/ B2CBU Auto Attendant (built-in) simultaneous calls in queue stored per system H B1CU Personal Messages includes: timed reminder memo and station speed dial memo. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Table 1-6 Line Capacities and Universal Printed Circuit Board Slots Strata CT Capacities Lines3 and PCB Slots B1CU B2CAU/ B2CBU B3CAU/ B3CBU B5CAU/ B5CBU Universal slots 8 18 28 48 Exchange lines 32 120 120 200 Table 1-7 Station and Peripherals Capacities Strata CT Capacities B1CU B2CAU/ B2CBU B3CAU/ B3CBU B5CAU/ B5CBU Add-on modules (DADM) 40 120 120 200 Attendant consoles 2 4 4 4 Stations H C Door locks 5 5 5 5 Door phones 12 12 12 12 DSS consoles 4 8 8 8 Handset;OCA stations 56 144 192 336 Off-premises stations 48 136 184 328 PCIU used for TAPI only: per system 1 56 144 192 336 Speaker OCA stations 1 56 112 160 256 Standard stations 48 136 184 328 Telephones – DKT 56 144 192 336 Telephones – EKT 56 144 192 336 1 Speaker OCA, PDIU and RPCI capacity is determined by 2B channel slot availability and power supply limits. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-7 Strata CT Configuration Table 1-8 Subassemblies for Toshiba Telephones Subassembly 1. Host Telephone Capacity per Telephone Function DVSU1 2000 & 2500-series Digital Telephones Provides interface for digital telephone to receive Speaker OCA. Not required for Handset/Headset OCA. PCIU1 2000 & 2500-series Digital Telephones Provides two modes of operation: TAPI PC application interface and Data Calling interface. HVSU2 6500-series Electronic Telephone Provides interface for electronic telephone to receive OCA. HHEU 2000-series Digital Telephones. Provides interface for headset and Loud 6500-series Electronic Ringing Bell to telephone. Can be installed Telephones with DVSU, PCIU, or DADM. DADM1 2000 & 2500-series Digital Telephones 1 Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two DADMs) additional feature buttons for DSS, System or Station Speed Dial, or Exchange line appearances. 1 or 2 Only one of the following subassembly types is allowed per telephone: DVSU, PCIU or DADM. H Table 1-9 provides a summary of the universal slot PCBs and available subassemblies. Table 1-9 PCB C PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors Subassembly RPTU RBSU attaches to RBSU 1-8 Circuits Interface Options 1 circuit/ISDN PRI Strata CT: 30 B channels/ ISDN 30 Network side 2 D channels RBSS Connector RJ45 2 ISDN BRI S/T point circuits (NT or TE). Each circuit is 2B+1D. (Host for the RBSS) Network and/or station side 2 ISDN BRI, S point circuits (2B+D each) Station side only 1 RBSS subassembly per RJ45 RBSU RJ45 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Table 1-9 PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (Continued) PCB Subassembly PEMU H C RSTU2/3 RATU PDKU2 Interface Options Connector E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I signalling Type II signalling Immediate start Wink start REMU (screw type) ACD/SMIS SMDI for Voice Mail SMDR printer or call accounting machine PC or maintenance terminal (local or remote) 25-pair amphenol (PIOU or PEPU) Spring clip terminal (PIOUS) Two 3-pair modular (TTY/ SMDR/SMDI/ SMIS) (All PCB amphenol connectors are female) Provides remote maintenance 300 bps or 1200 bps full-duplex modem for DK Admin. 1 per PIOU/PIOUS. None 8 standard telephone circuits Standard telephones Voice mail ports Off-premises stations Other similar devices Alternate BGM source Auto Attendant digital announcer Message Waiting lamp (RSTU2/3 only) Fax machines ACD Announcer Strata Airlink wireless telephones 25-pair amphenol (All PCB amphenol connectors are female) 4 PC Attendant PC Console circuits PC Attendant Console Conventional Attendant Console 25-pair amphenol 4 Tie line circuits PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU, RSSU attaches to PIOU and PIOUS Circuits A PIOU or PIOUS can use an IMDU IMDU Digital telephones (with or without RPCI-DI, DVSU, DADMs, or digital cordless telephone) 8 digital telephone circuits Stand-alone digital 25-pair amphenol cordless telephone DDSS console PDIU-DS DDCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-9 Strata CT Configuration Table 1-9 PCB Circuits, Interface Options and Connectors (Continued) PCB Subassembly Stratagy DK Interface Options Connector None 8 electronic telephone circuits Electronic telephones HDSS console Alternate BGM source EOCU PCB for OCA External conference amplifier HDCB Provides Speaker OCA path for 8 circuits on PEKU or 4 circuits on PESU. (Handset OCA is not available on EKTs.) 1 for PEKU or PESU that supports Speaker OCA Up to 4 interface ports when installed with the optional RSIS or RMDS piggy-back PCBs. ACD/SMIS SMDI for voice mail SMDR printer or call accounting machine PC or maintenance terminal (local or remote) One 3-pair modular (TTY/ SMDR/SMDI/ SMIS) Provides up to four interface ports (RS-232 and modem) for system interface with: RMDS (1200 or 2400 bps) Voice Mail SMDI ACD/SMIS SMDR Local or Remote Maintenance for DK Admin or DK Backup PC. One 3-pair modular per RSIS (RS-232), RMDS (Modem/RS-232) BVPU 4 Virtual Tie line circuits, 1 10baseT port, 1 RS-232 maintenance port H.323 standard for Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) One 3-pair modular plug for serial port. One 10baseT RJ45 for LAN connection. RRCU Supports 2 remote cabinets. 62.5 mµ, multi-mode fiber. SC connector PACU 4 Tie Line circuits. AC15. SC connector PEKU attaches to PEKU or PESU H C Circuits 2, 4, 6, or 8 VM ports All of the above Stratagy DK systems use 8 station None ports in the Strata CT software EOCU RSIU RSIS, RS-232 interface attaches to RSIU 1-10 RMDS (Modem/ RS-232) Up to 3 RSISs ...or 1 RMDS and 2 RSISs per RSIU 25-pair amphenol (All PCB amphenol connectors are Female) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Option interface cards for the Strata CT are shown in Table 1-10. Table 1-10 Strata CT Interface PCB Options Interface Options PEPU RSIU/ RSIS1 Zone page interface (unamplified, 4 zones) X Unamplified page output (single zone, 600 ohms, duplex) X Amplified page output (single zone, 3 watts, 8 ohms) X Night transfer or Music-on-hold control relay X X X Door lock or external amplifier control relay X X X Alarm Sensor X X X (IMDU) X (IMDU) X (RMDS) X X X SMDR output (RS-232/6-wire modular connector) MIS for ACD (requires TTY output port)2, 4 X3 X3 X X X X Voice Mail SMDI (requires TTY output port)2 DK Admin PC (requires TTY output port)2 X X X X X X Remote maintenance modem subassembly (IMDU or RMDS) (disables TTY output when they are piggy-backed onto the PIOU/PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS cards)2 Remote Maintenance using customer-provided external modem (requires TTY output port)2 H PIOU1 PIOUS1 X X X 1 PIOU, PIOUS, and RSSU each provide one TTY port which can be flexibly programmed for the features marked with X. RSIU/RSIS can provide up to four flexible TTY/SMDR ports. 2 Maintenance modem, ACD/SMIS, Insight DK, Voice Mail, SMDI and DK Admin PC Interface each require C a separate TTY output. PIOU, PIOUS, and RSIU/RSIS provide one TTY output each. RSIU with RSIS PCBs provides up to four TTY outputs. 3 SMDR output will function simultaneously on the same PIOU or PIOUS with one of the following: DK Admin, remote modem, SMIS for ACD, Insight DK, or SMDI features. 4 Insight DK, Call Centre Viewer and SMIS for ACD requires that the system processor must be equipped with an RKYS3 or higher feature key. Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit The RRCU PCB enables a Strata CT Expansion Cabinet to be located up to three kilometers from its Base Cabinet. One RRCU connects to up to two ribbon-type Data Cables and applies the inter-cabinet signal to a fiber-optic pair. One fiber pair can support one or two expansion cabinets in one remote location using one RRCU in the Base Cabinet and another in the Remote Expansion Cabinet. A Strata CT Base Cabinet will support up to four RRCU PCBs. A Strata CT will support up to four Remote Expansion Cabinets. Remote cabinets support all line and trunk interfaces. Network clock signals can only be derived from digital trunks installed in the Base Cabinet (Master) location. BDCL1A-MS1 and BDCL1A-M2 are required for RRCU (master) and BDCL1A-MS1 and BDCL1A-S2 are required for RRCU (slave), except for the daisy chain configuration. A B50MT Cable Shield Kit is required for each Remote Cabinet pair. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-11 Strata CT Configuration Strata CT Hardware Compatibility The following tables shows the PCB compatibility for the Strata CT systems. Category Processor Card DTMF Receiver Unit Optional Interface Unit Terminal H Base Cabinet Expansion Cabinet C Power Supply Unit Battery Distribution Box Power Strip Battery Cable Unit Name Strata CT B_C_U cards for Strata CT X BRCS-4/8/12 X RSIU X PIOU X RSSU X PIOUS X DKT2000 X DKT2500 X EKT6500 X HDSS X Existing Proprietary Attendant Console X Strata CT PC Attendant (WOC) X RPCI (RS-232C) - TAPI X DKSUB424F NC CHSUB672F X DKSUE 424F NC CHSUE672F X BPSU672F (240VAC power supply) X RBDB1A (new Battery Distribution Box X DK MAINS CON-4 NC 7925/P (new 240VAC power strip) X PBTC-3M X BBTC1A-2M X X = Compatible NC = Not Compatible 1-12 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Functional Block Diagrams The Functional Block Diagrams show the PCBs and interface connectors used for connecting the stations and peripherals (see Figures 1-4~1-6). DKi Admin PC1 Programmable Serial Port Modular Jacks or Remote Modem RSIU Serial Interface PCB (1 Port) RSIS/RMDS Serial/Modem (2400 bps) Interface PCBs ( 1~3 Ports) SMDI Voice Mail SMDR 1 Call Accounting Device or Printer 1 Amplified Page Output (3 Watts) IMDU 1200 bps Modem 1 25-pair or Terminal Strip Music Source: External Zone Page 1 Background Music H Door Lock or BGM Mute Control Relay 1 Night Bell or MOH (Control Relay) 1 Processor PCB MOH/BGM Volume Control External Page Amplifier (600Ω Output) 1 (68000 or 68020) Twisted Pair RAM PCM Switch RKYS Option Key AA/ACD/MIS System Tones Switch Conf Switch BPSU672F Cabinet Power Supply 1 Flash or ROM MicroProcessor MOH/BGM RCA Jack Alarm Relay Sensor 1 Music Source: Background Music and/or Music-on-hold B_C_U Twisted Pair External Zone Page Relays (4 Zones) 1 C PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU Battery Charger Data and Speech Highway Insight DK, ACD/MIS PC BRCS (Optional) DTMF Receiver (4~24 ckts.) 12V Battery 12V Battery (2 or 4 Batteries) 1. Customer-supplied equipment. Main Distribution Frame (MDF) 5210 Figure 1-4 KSU Processor and Optional Interface PCBs Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-13 Strata CT Configuration Expansion Cabinets Optical Fiber Cable 3 km/(1.86 mi.) RRCU Remote Cabinet Interface Card Remote Location(s) ISDN or IP Network MCK Extender Router 10BaseT BVPU Voice Over IP Unit (4 Circuits) MCK Gateway PDKU Remote Location(s) Digital Telephone Network Demarcation Point PEMU 4 E&M Tie Lines (Analogue) PACU • • • • Exchange Lines PBX Common Carrier Other Telephone System Channel Service Unit (CSU) NT1 per circuit H U RPTU ISDN PRI (30B+2D Channels) Digital Voice/Data RBSU ISDN BRI (S/T) 2 Circuits (TE) Voice/Data (2B+D) Data and Speech Highway 4 AC15 Tie Lines 8-wire Modular Jacks 8-wire Modular Jacks T PCOU (Analogue Exchange lines) 4272 CT I&M C Figure 1-5 Exchange Line Side Functional Block Diagram 1-14 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Cordless DKT Digital Telephone (DKT) and Add-on Module PDKU 8 Digital Telephone Circuits Digital Telephone with PCIU 1 Pair Modular Cord Digital Single Line Telephone (DKT) 1 TAPI PC RS-232 Cable DDCB MDFB Door Phones and Lock Controls Digital Telephone with DSS Console H Data and Speech Highway RSTU 8 Standard Telephone Circuits M/W PEKU 8 Electronic Telephone Circuits PC Voice Mail R48S (Option PCB, RSTU Only) -48 Volt Loop Supply 1 RS-232 Cables Modem FAX 1 1-pair Modular Cords EOCU (Option PCB to Receive Speaker OCA) DPFT Power Failure Transfer Unit Power Failure 1 Standard Telephone (8 max.) Digital Annuncer for ACD and Auto Attendant Secondary Protector Standard Telephone C 2 1 HESB Loud Ringing Bell Off-premises Station Electronic Telephone (EKT) EKT with HDSS Console (PEKU Only) RATU 4 Attendant Console Circuits Door Phones and Lock Controls 25-pair Amphenol Connectors and Cables (except RBSU/RBSS) RBSU 2B+1D/Circuit (2-NT Circuits) PC Attendant Console RBSS 2B+1D/Circuit (2-LT Circuits) 3 HDCB MDFB PC 3 S COM Port R TA 3 S ISDN Telephone (TE-1, S-Type) 4250 Modular Jacks 1. Customer-Supplied equipment Main Distribution Frame (MDF) 2. RSTU3 is required for standard telephone message waiting lamp. 3. U, S, T, R are ISDN reference model termination points. Figure 1-6 Station Side Functional Block Diagram Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-15 Strata CT Configuration Strata CT Cabinet Slot Configuration The cabinet diagram below enables you to write in the PCBs installed in each cabinet slot. Use the PCB placement guideline below to place PCBs in the correct slots. Fill in the PCBs that go into each slot. Main Location _______________ Remote Location 1___ 2___ 3___ 4____ Strata CT Cabinet Slots Base B1011 B1021 S1011 S102 S1032 S104 S1052 S106 S1072 S108 S2013 S202 S2032 S204 S2052 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 S3012 S302 S3032 S304 S3052 S306 S307 S308 S309 S310 S4012 S402 S4032 S404 S4052 S406 S407 S408 S409 S410 S5012 S502 S5032 S504 S5052 S506 S507 S508 S509 S510 PCB Type Cab 2 PCB Type Cab 3 H PCB Type Cab 4 PCB Type Cab 5 C PCB Type 1. B101/B102 – processor slots: S101 - RSIU, PDKU, or PEKU slot. RPTU allowed slots. The adjacent slot must be vacant to reach maximum capacity. 3. 4.Speaker OCA Slots: All slots in Base Cabinet and S_01~S_06 in all Expansions Cabinets. 12 5.For details, see the guidelines below. 2. PCB Placement Guidelines Station, line and option PCBs can be mixed in cabinets in any pattern. Do not skip slots except for vacant slots that provide RPTU capacity as shown in Table 1-13. Toshiba recommends placing RSIU, RRCU and RPTU PCBs, as needed, first because they have special placement rules. After all PCBs are placed in cabinets, the processor PCB that meets the requirements of the configuration can be selected. Use the numbered step sequence as a guide, beginning with “1. Programming Telephone Interface”. 1-16 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Processor PCBs ◆ B1CU (Slot B102), provides slots S101 through S108 for Line, Station and Option PCBs. Allows up to 2 RPTU PCBs to be installed. ◆ B2CAU (Slot B101)/ B2CBU (slot B102), provides slots S101 through S206 for Line, Station and Option PCBs. Allows up to 6 RPTU PCBs to be installed. ◆ B3CAU (Slot B101)/ B3CBU (slot B102), provides slots S101 through S310 for Line, Station and Option PCBs. Allows up to 6 RPTU PCBs to be installed. ◆ B5CAU (Slot B101)/ B5CBU (slot B102), provides slots S101 through S510 for Line, Station and Option PCBs. Allows up to eight RPTU PCBs to be installed. ◆ Configure BRCS DTMF receivers and RKYS key on the processors as needed. 1. Programming Telephone Interface ◆ If RSIU is not needed, install a PDKU or PEKU in Slot S101 to accommodate the programming telephone. ◆ H If RSIU is needed, see Options PCBs in the next item below. 2. Option PCBs for Paging/Remote Maintenance/ACD/SMIS/SMDR/ RS-232 Interface ◆ RSIU with/without RSIS or RMDS. This PCB must be installed, if needed, in Slot S101 only. If RSIU is installed in S101 then a PDKU or PEKU must be installed in S102 to accommodate the programming telephone. C ◆ PIOUS, PIOU, PEPU each requires one slot. These PCBs should be installed after all other PCBs are installed. They cannot occupy any slot that is left vacant to provide RPTU capacity as shown in Table 1-13. However, the PIOUS, PIOU, PEPU PCBs can occupy any other slot that is vacant. 3. Remote Cabinet PCBs ◆ RRCU PCBs installed in the main location must be placed in Base Cabinet slots S102~S107 in any order. Before installing other PCBs make sure there is a Base Cabinet slot available for each RRCU PCB needed. An RRCU may occupy a vacant slot adjacent to RPTU. An RRCU PCB in a remote location can support one or two remote cabinets and can be installed in any slot but the last of either cabinet. The number of RRCU PCBs required in the Base and Remote Cabinet locations is shown in Table 1-11: Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-17 Strata CT Configuration RRCU PCB/ Remote Cabinet Configuration Table 1-11 RRCU PCBs Needed in Base Cabinet 1 1 or 2 Remote Cabinets in one location 1 2 2 to 4 Remote Cabinets in two locations or 3 to 4 Remote cabinets in one location. 2 3 3 cabinets if cabinets are in separate remote locations. 3 4 4 cabinets if cabinets are in separate remote locations. 4 ◆ Cables are provided according to the connectors on the RRCU card to which they are attached. See Table 1-12 for connector information. Remote Cabinet Data Cables and Connectors Table 1-12 RRCU Connectors Data Cables BDCL1A-MS1 H RRCU PCBs Needed at Remote Location (s) Remote Cabinet Configuration M1 S1 X X BDCL1A-M2 M2 S2 X BDCL1A-S2 X X=applies to connector 4. ISDN PRI Digital Line PCBs C RPTU must be placed in designated slots as shown in Table 1-13. The RPTU PCB can provide 30 ISDN PRI lines. The RPTU slot provides 30 PRI lines. Table 1-13 RPTU PCB Cabinet Slot Configuration PRI Lines Needed Slots Needed 1~30 2 1 S103-RPTU 31~60 4 2 S105-RPTU 61~90 6 3 S107-RPTU RPTU PCBs Needed1 RPTU cabinet slot placement1 Base Cabinet Second through fifth cabinets 1~30 2 1 S_01-RPTU 31~60 4 2 S_03-RPTU 61~90 6 3 S_05-RPTU 1. RPTU PCBs do not have to be installed in the order shown in this table. Example: If only one RPTU is needed, it can be installed in any RPTU slot shown in the table so long as the slot is supported by the installed processor. 2 The slot occupied by RPTU supports 30 channels; the slot adjacent to RPTU must be vacant. 1-18 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration 5. Digital and Standard Telephone Station PCBs ◆ PDKU, RSTU and PEKU: Each PCB or PCB combination requires one slot. These PCBs can not occupy a slot that is left vacant to provide capacity for RPTU as shown in Table 1-13. Each PCB provides up to eight circuits for the type of stations it supports. 6. ISDN BRI Digital Station PCBs ◆ RBSU with RBSS: Each PCB or PCB combination requires one slot. These PCBs can not occupy a slot that is left vacant to provide capacity for RPTU as shown in Table 1-13. Each single PCB provides two BRI circuits and combination PCBs provide four BRI circuits, for the type of BRI stations it supports. Each ISDN BRI station requires one BRI circuit. 7. Analogue, Tie Lines and VoIP Line PCBs ◆ PCOU, PEMU, PACU and BVPU: Each PCB or PCB combination requires one slot. These PCBs can not occupy a slot that is left vacant to provide capacity for RPTU, as shown in Table 1-13. Each PCB provides up to four circuits for the type of lines it supports. H 8. ISDN BRI Digital Line PCBs ◆ RBSU with RBSS: Each PCB RBSU/RBSS PCB requires one slot. These PCBs can not C Power Considerations occupy a slot that is left vacant to provide capacity for RPTU as shown in Table 1-13. Only the RBSU PCB provides 2 BRI circuits (four lines). Each ISDN BRI circuit provides two lines for the CT system. Each Strata CT Base and Expansion Cabinet houses a power supply that furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the peripherals that interface with the cabinet (see Table 1-14). Table 1-14 Strata CT Electrical Characteristics Strata CT Primary AC Power Voltage Input Voltage AC Frequency Watts per cabinet (continuous) Watts for five cabinet system 115VAC±10V or 208VAC±20V or 240VAC±20V 50/60 Hz, Single-phase 180 900 Strata CT Primary Power Current Consumption (Rating in Amperes) 240VAC 1 cabinet 2 cabinets 3 cabinets 4 cabinets 5 cabinets 2.0 amps. 4.0 amps. 6.0 amps. 8.0 amps. 10.0 amps. Power Supply Unit (BPSU672) DC voltage output specification Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 -24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC, 6.0 DC amps. ) +5VDC (+4.5~5.5VDC, 4.0 DC amps.) -5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC, 0.8 DC amps.) 1-19 Strata CT Configuration Reserve Power Two or four customer-supplied 12VDC reserve batteries can be connected to the system to maintain normal operation during a power failure (see Tables 1-16 and 1-17). The batteries are kept in a highly-charged state by the standard power supply and must be connected when the system is operating normally. Fully charged batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available, batteries cannot be connected after/during an actual power failure. Table 1-15 Reserve Power Characteristics Battery Charger Characteristics Maximum Battery Consumption: Charger: current limiting Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell Charge current: 0.7 amps. maximum Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC H C Table 1-16 -24VDC 1 cabinet 2 cabinets 3 cabinets 4 cabinets 5 cabinets 6.0 amps. 12.0 amps. 18.0 amps. 24.0 amps. 30.0 amps. Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates (in hours) Number of Cabinets 2 3 4 5 12.0 hr. 6.0 hr. 4.0 hr. 3.0 hr. 2.5 hr. Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration 24.0 hr. 12.0 hr. 8.0 hr. 6.0 hr. 5.0 hr. DC Current Drain (-24VDC) 4.6 amps. 8.7 amps. 12.8 amps. 16.9 amps. 21.0 amps. Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration 1 Primary/Reserve Power Cabinet Hardware The lightweight and compact design enables easy wall or floor mounting. The BFIF hardware kit is needed for floor mounting. If floor mounting three or more cabinets, AC and reserve power must be connected to the BCCB conduit connection box option by a licensed electrician. If more than two cabinets require reserve power batteries, the BBDB must be installed. Wall mounting the system does not require special hardware. Local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting commercial AC and reserve power to the Strata CT system. Table 1-17 describes which assemblies may be required to meet local electrical code standards. Important! 1-20 See “EMC Compliance” in final chapter “Notes to Users”. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Configuration Table 1-17 H Power Cabinet Hardware Option Description BPSU672 Strata CT cabinet power supply. This power supply can operate with 240VAC connected as the system’s primary AC power source. The power supply is included with each cabinet ordered but must be installed in the field. Standard 2 METRE. AC power cords with 240VAC plugs are provided with Strata CT Base or Expansion cabinets. PBTC-3M A three-meter long battery cable is used to connect reserve power batteries to the system power supply when the system has less than three cabinets. One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet in a one or two cabinet system (wall or floor mount). The cable connects the Strata CT cabinet power supply directly to the battery terminals (a BBDB is not required). BBDB Strata CT reserve power battery distribution box is required when connecting reserve power batteries to three or more cabinets (wall or floor mount). The box is field installed into one of the Strata CT cabinet side panels. The BBDB provides five BBTC2A-2.0M, battery distribution cables to connect reserve power from the BDDB box to each individual cabinet power supply. Also supplied are two BBTC1A-2.0M cables to connect to the BBDB. BFIF Floor mount fixture kit is required when floor mounting Strata CT cabinets. Provides two metal stands for mounting any number of Strata CT cabinets on the floor. Three pairs or wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with BFIF to use when mounting three or more Strata CT cabinets on floor. The wall brackets are needed to secure floormounted systems to the wall for safety purposes. C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 1-21 Strata CT Configuration H C 1-22 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Strata CT Installation 2 This chapter explains how to install the Strata CT system. It includes information on site requirements and provides installation instructions for various cabinet configurations. It also explains how to install earth wiring, AC power cabling, reserve power (Battery Backup) cabling, and Printed Circuit Board (PCB) cabling. Inspection H C When the system is received, examine all packages carefully and note any visible damage. If any damage is found, do not open the packages. Contact the delivery carrier immediately and make the proper claims. After unpacking (and before installing), check the system against the packing list and inspect all equipment for damage. If equipment is missing or damaged, contact your supplier immediately. Be sure to retain original packaging materials for re-use when storing or transporting system hardware. Packaging and Storage CAUTION! When handling (installing, removing, examining) PCBs, do not touch the back (soldered) side or edge connector. Always hold the PCB by its edges and wear anti-static wrist bands. When packaging and storing the system, remove PCBs from the system cabinet (the power supply may remain installed in the cabinet for storage and shipment). PCBs should be packaged in their original antistatic bags for protection against electrostatic discharge. Be sure to package equipment in its original shipping containers. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-1 Strata CT Installation Site Requirements Input Power The Strata CT requires an input power source of 240±20VAC, 50/60 Hz, single phase. The system requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and earthed. Each Remote Expansion Cabinet requires 3.2 amps. maximum. The remote cabinet installation requires one or two AC outlets that must be dedicated to system use, fused, and grounded. See Cabinet Installation Considerations for complete AC power cabling, ground wiring and battery installation instructions for local and remote cabinets. CAUTION! To avoid accidental power turn-off, it is recommended that an On/Off wall switch not be used on AC circuits dedicated for the use of Strata CT. A reserve power source (two or four customer-supplied 12VDC batteries) may be connected to the Strata CT to serve as a backup in case of power failure. Separate reserve power may be required for remote expansion cabinets. H Clearance and Location The Base and optional Expansion Cabinets may be either floor or wall mounted. Figure 2-1 shows the minimum clearance requirements for up to five cabinets. C Notes ● Floor mounting requires the following additional hardware: ● BFIF – floor mounting stands and brackets. ● BCCB – electrical conduit box, if three or more cabinets are installed. ● Wall mounting requires a plywood (3/4 inch thick) backboard. When selecting a location for the cabinets, the location must be: ◆ Dry and clean ◆ Well-ventilated ◆ Well-illuminated ◆ Easily accessible The location must not be: ◆ Subject to extreme heat or cold ◆ Subject to corrosive fumes, dust, or other airborne contaminants ◆ Subject to excessive vibration ◆ Next to television, radio, office automation, or high frequency equipment Optional customer-supplied reserve batteries require a well-ventilated location close (within nine feet) to the Strata CT cabinets. 2-2 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Front View Top View 26.5" 24" Wall 14.5" 26.5" Cabinets Base Cabinet 10.65 " 24" Expansion Cabinet Wall 58" 36" Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 58" is minimum height requirements for Wall Mounting 5 cabinets, 78" is required for future growth of up to 7 cabinets. Expansion Cabinet 6" Floor H Front View Top View Wall 26.5" 24" C Base Cabinet 26.5" 13.5" 24" 2" Brackets (RWBF) Cabinets 12.65 " Expansion Cabinet Wall 55" Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet Expansion Cabinet 36" 3" Floor Mount Stands (BFIF) 3" Floor 55" is minimum height requirements for Floor Mounting 5 cabinets, 75" is required to allow for future growth of up to 7 cabinets. 5005 Figure 2-1 Strata CT Minimum Clearance Requirements Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-3 Strata CT Installation Power Considerations Each Strata CT Base and Expansion Cabinet houses a power supply that furnishes power to all of the stations and some of the peripherals that interface with the cabinet (see Table 2-1). Table 2-1 Strata CT Electrical Characteristics Strata CT Primary AC Power Voltage Input AC AC Frequency Watts per cabinet (continuous) Watts for five cabinet system 240±20VAC 50/60 Hz, Single-phase 180 900 Strata CT Primary Power Current Consumption (Rating in Amperes) 240VAC 2.0 amps 4.0 amps 6.0 amps 8.0 amps 10.0 amps 1 cabinet 2 cabinets 3 cabinets 4 cabinets 5 cabinets Power Supply Unit (BPSU672) DC voltage output specification H Reserve Power C -24VDC (-26.3~-27.8VDC, 6.0 DC amps ) +5VDC (+4.5~5.5VDC, 4.0 DC amps) -5VDC (-4.5~-5.5VDC, 0.8 DC amps) Two or four customer-supplied 12VDC reserve batteries can be connected to the system to maintain normal operation during a power failure (see Tables 2-2 and 2-3). The batteries are kept in a highly-charged state by the standard power supply and must be connected when the system is operating normally. Fully charged batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available, batteries cannot be connected after/during an actual power failure. Table 2-2 Reserve Power Characteristics Battery Charger Characteristics Maximum Battery Charger Charger: current limiting Nominal float voltage: 2.275 volts/cell Charge current: 0.7 amps maximum Battery discharge cut-off voltage: 20.5 ±0.5VDC Table 2-3 1 cabinet 2 cabinets 3 cabinets 4 cabinets 5 cabinets -240VDC 6.0 amps 12.0 amps 18.0 amps 24.0 amps 30.0 amps Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimates (in hours) Number of Cabinets Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration 1 12.0hr 2 6.0hr 3 4.0hr 4 3.0hr 5 2.5hr Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration 24.0hr 12.0hr 8.0hr 6.0hr 5.0hr Typical battery Current Drain (-24VDC) 4.6amps 8.7amps 12.8amps 16.9amps 21.0amps Local electrical codes require certain standards for connecting commercial AC and reserve power to the Strata CT system. Important! 2-4 See “EMC Compliance” in final chapter “Notes to Users”. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Cabinet Installation Considerations The Base (CHSUB672) and Expansion (CHSUE672) Cabinets can be wall or floor mounted. To make it easier to add cabinets (after the initial installation) when a customer needs to expand, install the Base Cabinet on top for wall-mount installations and on the bottom for floor-mount installations. The dimensions of the Base and Expansion Cabinets are: Height: Base Cabinet: 11 3/4 inches Height: Expansion Cabinet/Remote Expansion Cabinet: 10 inches Width: 26 1/2 inches Depth: 10 5/8 inches Weight: Note approx. 30.5 lbs. (14 kg.) The weight approximates a cabinet completely filled with PCBs. Weight may vary slightly, depending on PCBs. Recommended Installation Sequence H C Step Reference Information 1. Install power supplies in cabinets. “Install Power Supply” on Page 2-6. 2. Mount cabinets on wall or floor. “Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet” on Page 2-9. “Cabinet Floor Mounting” on Page 2-26. 3. Install earth wiring. “Earth the System” on Page 2-17. 4. Install AC power cabling to cabinets. “Install AC Power Components” on Page 2-18. 5. Install reserve power cabling. “Install Reserve Power” on Page 2-22. 6. Install PCBs and PCB cabling. Figures 2-24~2-30, 2-35 and the section titled “Install Universal and Processor PCBs” on Page 2-35. Note Each cabinet requires four wood screws (#12X 1.25 inch size) for wall mount installation. Wood screws are not provided with the system. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-5 Strata CT Installation Step 1: Install Power Supply The Strata CT cabinets use the BPSU672 power supply but the Base and Expansion Cabinets are factory-shipped without the power supply installed. ➤ To install power supplies in cabinets of new or installed systems 1. Remove the power supply from its box. The power supply AC power cord for 240VAC and the power supply mounting screws are provided with the KSU cabinet. 2. Make sure that the front and right side covers are removed from the cabinet (see Figure 2-4). 3. Slide the power supply into the right side of the cabinet so that its four mounting holes align with the four cabinet mounting holes (see Figure 2-4). (Make sure that the two backplane FG wires are positioned between the FG wire holder and the power supply.) Note H The backplane FG wires are not safety grounds: they are required for proper system Exchange line operation. 4. Plug the Back Plane DC OUT cable plug into the DC OUT connector on the power supply. (The plug has a guide key on it to ensure that it is plugged in correctly.) 5. Secure the FG wire spade lug to the power supply with the FG screw. 6. Secure the power supply to the cabinet with the four provided screws. 7. If the cabinet is the Base Unit, a standalone Remote Expansion Cabinet, or the first in a stack of Remote Expansion Cabinets. Set the Exp/Base switch to the “Base” position (see Figure 2-2). 8. If the cabinet is an Expansion Unit, set the Exp/Base switch to the “Exp” position. Important! C 9. The power supply set as “Base” is the master and has On/Off control over all other power supplies, which are designated as slaves. If the master power supply is turned Off or On, all other power supplies will automatically turn Off or On. (Individual slave power supplies must be turned On.) See Figure 2-2 to ensure that the power supply is properly installed. 10. Install power supplies in all cabinets, using Steps 1~9 of this procedure. 11. Install the Base and optional Expansion Cabinets, ground wiring, and cabinet bonding plates, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 2-5. Note Power Supply testing procedures are provided in the Fault Finding chapter, which should be referred to if it is suspected that the power supply does not work properly. Testing the System’s Power Supply If the “AC” or “DC” LEDs fail to light in Steps 1 or 3, see the Circuit Breaker Reset Proceedure on Page 2-7 - “Case 1”. 2-6 1. Plug the AC power cable into an outlet. The “AC” LED on the power supply lights green. 2. Turn On the DC power switch for the power supply. The “DC” LED on the power supply lights green. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation 3. Using a voltmeter or other device which checks voltage, measure the voltages referenced to frame ground (FG) at the P16 connector pins (test points) located on the motherboard. The voltages should fall within the ranges below. ◆ Yellow-green, black, and green wires: 0V ◆ Two yellow wires: -27V ◆ Range: -25.94V ~ 28.66X If the volages do not fall within the ranges, unplug the DC power pins from the P16 connector and measure again at the same location; if the ranges remain unacceptable, see the Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure below -“Case 2”. Circuit Breaker Reset Procedure Case 1 If the AC and DC LEDs on the power supply in the Strata CT Base Cabinet do not light, even though the AC power plug is inserted into the wall outlet and the DC power switch is turned on, the AC overvoltage circuit breaker may have opened. H ➤ To reset the AC overvoltage circuit breaker 1. Remove the AC power plug from the wall outlet, turn the DC power switch Off, and wait six minutes. 2. After six minutes, insert the AC plug back into the wall outlet and turn the DC power switch On. The AC and DC LEDs should turn on and the system should operate. If the system fails to operate, either the wall outlet is not providing AC power or the system’s power supply is defective. C 3. If the AC power checks good, replace the power supply. Case 2 If the power supply AC and DC LEDs light, but the system does not operate, the DC output overcurrent circuit breaker may have opened because of a DC short circuit. ➤ To reset the DC output overcurrent circuit breaker 1. Turn the DC power switch Off for 15 seconds and then turn it back on. The system will go back to normal operation if the overcurrent breaker resets. 2. If the system continues to fail, press in the two -24VDC circuit breakers located on the power supply unit. If, then, the system does not return to normal operation, the power supply may be defective or an optional PCB may be shorting out the power supply. 3. Remove all optional PCBs and the Expansion cabinet to locate the short, then repeat Steps 1 and 2 and perform the power supply test. 4. If the power supply fails the test, replace the power supply. If the power supply passes the test, the Strata CT Base cabinet is probably defective. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-7 Strata CT Installation Power Supply (BPSU672F) Removal 1. Remove the front and right side covers (Figure 2-4) from the cabinet. Remove the right side covers of other cabinets as needed to disconnect wiring. 2. Turn the power supply Off, and disconnect the AC power cord, all ground wiring and reserve power cabling that is connected to the power supply. 3. Disconnect the back plane DC OUT cable plug from the DC OUT connector. 4. Loosen the four mounting screws securing the power supply to the cabinet and remove the power supply. Power Supply Replacement ➤ Install the replacement power supply per “Install Power Supply” on Page 2-6. Back Plane DC Voltage Connector Back Plane DC Voltage Cable/Plug Cabinet Support Post DC OUT -27V1 -27V2 BATT + - -27V3 H -27V4 POW +5V AC IN -5V P.F. RESET POWER ON EXP BASE FG B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 OFF S108 5039 Wire Clamp Green/Green yellow wire fastened with FG Screw Mounting Holes C 24V Circuit Breaker Assignments: DC Voltage Connector Jack EXP. Cabinet Base Cabinet 24V-1 S101, S102 24V-1 S_01, S_02 24V-2 S103, S104 24V-2 S_03, S_04 24V-3 S105, S106 24V-3 S_05, S_06, S_07 24V-4 S107, S108 24V-4 S_08, S_09, S_10 DC OUT Battery Cable Connector -24V1 -24V2 BATT -24V3 + - -24V4 Power Factor (PF) alarm LED indicates the cabinet PF was exceeded. Correct the problem and press the RESET button to clear the alarm. POW +5V AC IN AC Power Cord Jack -5V P.F. RESET POWER ON DC Voltage Specification EXP BATT (Volts) +5V (+4.5 ~ +5.5), 4.0 amps BASE OFF -5V (–4.5 ~ –5.5), 0.8 amps Expansion Cabinet only -24V (–26.3 ~ –27.8), 6.0 amps FG + – 0 –26.3 ~ –27.8 1. Back Plane DC Voltage Plug must be plugged into Power Supply when checking voltages. 2 Expansion/ Base Switch FG Frame Ground Screws 2. On BPSU672, the BATT output is 0 volts unless connected to good batteries. DC Voltage Connector Plug Pin Wires Figure 2-2 2-8 Yellow Blue White Green Green Green -24 -5 +5 0 0 0 Red +5 Yellow Yellow Yellow Green Green Green Red -24 -24 -24 0 0 0 +5 Power Supply Installation Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Step 2: Mount Cabinets There are two methods of mounting cabinets: wall or floor mounting. Wall mounting the most common and economical method is described below. The floor mounting description begins on Page 2-26. Note Toshiba recommends installing cabinets (see Figures 2-3~2-9) from the top down, Base Cabinet on top, first Expansion Cabinet below it, second cabinet below that, etc. This applies to 5 Cabinet Systems only. Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet Follow these instructions to wall mount the Base Cabinet or the first Remote Expansion Cabinet. A wooden backboard between the cabinet and the wall is necessary (see Figure 2-3). 1. Obtain a board, such as plywood, that is at least 3/4 of an inch thick. The board should be at least 6-1/2 feet high (completely expanded systems with seven cabinets require this much height) and 26 inches wide (minimum). Secure the board to the wall with wood screws with the bottom edge of the board is six inches above the floor. (If there are wall studs, make sure the screws align with the studs.) H 2. C 3. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet (see Figure 2-4). Note The two screws on the front cover and the two screws on each side cover should be loosened just enough to slide the covers off. The front cover slides left and the side covers swing out and down for removal. Hold the Base Cabinet back cover against the wall or backboard so that its two top mounting holes are approximately 6-1/2 feet (78 inches) above the floor. This allows up to five cabinets to be installed (top-down) with a six-inch clearance between the floor and bottom cabinet (see Figures 2-5 and 2-6). 4. Use a level to make sure that the back cover is held level. 5. Trace the upper arch of the top mounting holes with a pencil. 6. Remove the back cover from the wall. Draw a line between the top two marking hole marks. 7. Drill holes on the line in the middle of the arch tracing. 8. Screw #12 X 1.25 inch size wood screws into the two drilled holes, leaving about 1/8 of an inch clearance between the screw heads and the wall. 9. Hang the Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet back cover from the top two screws and secure the screws into the wall. 10. Drill holes at the bottom two mounting holes of the back cover, and secure #12 X 1.25 inch wood screws into the two holes. 11. If installing a Base Cabinet or first Remote Expansion Cabinet back cover to the wall: Position the cabinet on the back cover cabinet hangers, slide the cabinet right to the proper mounting position, and secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws on the right side of the cabinet. If installing Expansion Cabinets, skip to “Wall Mounting Expansion Cabinets”. 12. Install earth wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 2-5. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-9 Strata CT Installation 13. Fill out the slot identification label on the cabinet (see Figure 2-7). 14. Reinstall the front cover, top cover, and side covers onto the cabinet. Wall Mounting Expansion Cabinets 1. Remove the front, back, and side covers from the Expansion Cabinets. Note H C The two screws on the front cover and the two screws on each side cover should be loosened just enough to slide the covers off. The front cover slides left and the side covers swing out and down for removal. 2. Hold an Expansion Cabinet back cover against the wall so that its top locating parts align with the bottom locating parts of the Base Cabinet back cover (see Figure 2-3 on Page 2-11). To secure the Expansion Cabinet back cover to the back board, repeat Steps 5~11 from “Wall Mounting the Base (Top) Cabinet” on Page 2-9. 3. To install additional Expansion Cabinet back covers, repeat Step 2 above. 4. Starting with the top Expansion Cabinet back cover (which is fastened to the wall), position an Expansion Cabinet on the back cover cabinet hangers. Slide the cabinet to the right to the proper mounting position, and secure the cabinet to the back cover with two screws to the right side of the back cover. Repeat for all other Expansion Cabinets. 5. Loosen the bonding connection plates fastened on both sides of the first Expansion Cabinet (see Figure 2-8) then fasten the plates between the Base Cabinet and the first Expansion Cabinet. Repeat to connect the first Expansion Cabinet to the second Expansion Cabinet, etc. 6. Base Cabinet: Loosen data cable door locking screws and open data cable doors; then connect the first Expansion Cabinet data cable to the “CAB 2” (top) data cable connector on the Base Cabinet. Install data cables in appropriate connectors for all other Expansion Cabinets. (See Figures 2-8 and 2-11. 7. After all data cables are installed, close data cable doors and secure with the locking screw. Important! Data cable door screws must be firmly tightened for proper system operation. Data cables for DK280 cabinets are not compatible with Strata CT cabinets. 8. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 2-5. 9. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet. 10. Reinstall covers onto cabinets. 2-10 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Locating Parts Plaster Board Wall 3/4" Plywood Backboard #12 X 1.25" Wood Screws (As many as necessary to secure plywood backboard) Dealer Supplied #12 X 1.25" Wood Screws (4 Screws Per Cabinet) H Back Cover 5.0 ft. minimum for 5 cabinets or 6.5 ft. for 7 cabinets C 6 inches between bottom cabinet and floor 5040 Floor Figure 2-3 Cabinet Mounting Surface Diagram Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-11 Strata CT Installation R ig h t F ro n t Top Cover (Base Cabinet Only) Back Cover Right Side Cover Remove four screws to remove back cover Loosen two screws to remove the side cover (right and left covers) 5041 H Top Cover (Base Cabinet Only) C Loosen four screws to remove the top cover. Note: Do not remove the top cover if the Base Cabinet is the top cabinet. Front Cover 5038 Right Side Cover F t ig n R ro h t Loosen two screws to remove front cover Figure 2-4 2-12 Loosen two screws to remove the side covers (right and left side covers) Cabinet Cover Removal and Installation Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Marking Hole 18 .8 IN. Trace Upper Arch 9.9 Back Cover 1459 H Figure 2-5 IN . Strata CT Back Cover Mounting Holes Hang cabinet on back cover then slide to right. C Hanger Back Cover Hanger Hole Back Cover Mounting Strip Important! After mounting cabinet to back cover use two screws to fasten cabinet to back cover. 1460 Figure 2-6 Strata CT Mounting Cabinet on Back Cover Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-13 Strata CT Installation B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 B101 B102 B101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 DC OUT -24V1 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 -24V2 BATT + - -24V3 -24V4 POW +5V AC IN -5V P.F. POWER ON RESET EXP BASE OFF FG B101 B102 S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 5002 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 CABINET NO. 3 4 5 6 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 2 3 4 5 6 7 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP S_01 S_02 S_03 S_04 BASE BASE S_05 FG FG S201 S_06 S_07 H S_08 S_09 S 02 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 OFF OFF 5002 5002 S_10 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 C S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 OFF OFF 5002 5002 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 DC OUT DC OUT CABINET NO. 2 3 4 5 6 OFF OFF 5002 5002 7 -27V1 -27V1 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 -27V2 -27V2 -27V3 -27V3 -27V4 -27V4 AC IN BATT ++ -- POW POW +5V +5V AC IN AC IN -5V -5V P.F. P.F. RESET RESET POWER POWER ON ON EXP EXP BASE BASE FG FG S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 OFF OFF 5002 5002 5043 CT I&M Figure 2-7 2-14 Front View of Strata CT Cabinet Interior Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation After mounting the Strata CT cabinets, install the data cables. Then, install the bonding plate per Figure 2-8. Cab 2 Cable Left Side CA B 2 CA B 3 CA B 4 CA B 5 CA B 6 CA B 7 Cable Guard Screw Cable Guard PCB Cable Data Cables H C Expansion Cabinet Front Data Cable Door (shown open) 5342 Bonding Connection Plate (required for all wall mount expansion cabinets) To MDF Remote Cabinet Cable feed through hole Figure 2-8 Data Cables Shown in Cabinet Interior—Side View Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-15 Strata CT Installation Wrap the cables in with the mesh tie. The purpose of the wrap is to shield the cables from EMI/RFI effects. See Figure 2-9. Front Cable Shield (B50MT) Part No. B50MT comes with the Base Cabinet. It must be ordered separately for each Remote Cabinet pair. 1. Attach lead to grounding screw. 2. Wrap mesh around communication cables. 3. Secure with velcro strap. CAUTION! Mesh strap should not touch cabinet metal surfaces. H 25-Pair Amphenol Cables Knock Out Plastic C Top To MDF 5045 To MDF Figure 2-9 2-16 25-Pair Amphenol Cables Cabinet Amphenol Cables Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Step 3: Earth the System The system requires a solid earth ground for proper operation and safety. The AC power cord(s) already contains a conductor for the “third wire ground” provided by the commercial power outlet (see Figure 2-10, for grounding points “A” and “B”). An insulated conductor must connect the frame ground terminal on the Base Cabinet to the Main Building Earth Point (MBEP). Before connecting the system to the AC power source, measure the impedance of the building ground reference. If the ground path connected to the system has an impedance of 1 ohm or more, a better ground must be installed. In Figure 2-10, the the grounding path between point “A” and the single point ground “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. The “third wire ground” coming from the primary AC power outlet must be dedicated and must be routed through the same conduit as the phase conductors serving the system. The conductor connected to the frame ground (FG screw) on the system power supply must be insulated and comply with the general rules for grounding contained in ie Regs, 16th Edition, but must not depend on the cord and plug of the system. If the Strata CT system consists of more than one cabinet, you must install the bonding connection plates that come attached to each expansion cabinet. Refer to Figure 2-8. Connect the mother board ground wires and the intercabinet ground wires per Figure 2-10. Wrap the cable mesh shield (part No. B50MT) around the 25-pair communication cables that carry stations over tip and ring, per Figure 2-9. H WARNING! Failure to provide a proper ground may be a safety hazard to service personnel or lead to confusing trouble symptoms. In extreme cases, system failure may result because the system is not properly protected from lighting or power transients. C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-17 Strata CT Installation The Single Point Ground must always be connected to the Base Cabinet Power Supply FG Screw FG (Frame Ground) Screws Power Supply “B” Point “B” is always on the Base Cabinet. BMEP Base Cabinet Cabinet Motherboard Insulated Ground Wire “B” Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. AWG #6 Wire (minimum) Length: 60 Feet (maximum) Cabinet Motherboard Cabinet Motherboard Expansion Cabinets 42mm Green/Yellow Earth Wire. Max Impedance = Ω Cabinet Motherboard H Cabinet Motherboard Green/Green Yellow ground wires from Motherboard Earth Ground: FG Screws Inter-cabinet green wires supplied with each cabinet Per General Rules IE REGS 16th Edition 5044 CT I&M C The cabinets must be located no more than 9 feet from the AC outlet. Third Wire AC Ground Note: The ground must be routed through the same conduit as the phase conductors serving the system. Figure 2-10 208 or 240VAC System Primary Power , 240VAC “A” Building Main Power Panel Electrical Ground 240VAC ± 20VAC (50/60 Hz) Dedicated 20 Amp Branch Circuit. Note: The impedance of the link between point “A” and “B” must be less than 0.25 ohms. Cabinet Earthing Step 4: Install AC Power Components AC Power Requirements The Strata CT requires a single-phase, 50/60 cycles power source of 240VAC, on a dedicated 20 ampere circuit breaker. It is recommended that a dedicated AC service panel be used for the Strata CT. AC outlets, must be dedicated to Strata CT use, fused, and grounded. Equipment unrelated to the Strata CT must not be connected to the circuit or service panel dedicated to the Strata CT. Note 2-18 It may not always be possible to power a complete Strata CT from a single circuit breaker panel. For example, in the case where a cabinet is remotely located. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation To avoid accidental turn off, do not configure the outlet serving the Strata CT with an On/Off switch. AC outlets serving the cabinets must be close enough so that the power cord from the cabinet power supply or power strip can reach the outlet (these power cords are nine ft.) AC wall outlets for the Strata CT must be on dedicated 20amp breakers. AC outlets must meet ie Regs. AC power cabling requirements vary, depending on: The method of cabinet installation (floor or wall mount), AC power source voltage (240VAC) and the number of cabinets. Requirements for distribution of AC power within the cabinets of the Strata CT are as described in cabinet AC power distribution below. AC/Reserve Power and Data Cabling Overview Figure 2-11 shows an overview of the AC power and data cabling for the Strata CT. Detailed illustrations of AC power strips and cords are on the following pages. 5 BBTC2A-2M battery cables supplied with BBDB Power Supply Motherboard H CHSUB672A Cabinet 1 (base) 2 3 4 5 6 7 Power supply cord for: • 240VAC - supplied BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 2 (expansion) C BPSU672A BATT AC IN 7925-P BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 3 (expansion) BATT AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 4 (expansion) BATT Battery Distribution Box • BBDB AC IN BPSU672A CHSUE672A Cabinet 5 (expansion) BATT AC IN Power Strip Cables to Primary AC Power outlets (9 ft.) BBTC1A-2M Cables supplied with BBDB to Reserve Power Batteries (2 m.) 5046 Data Cable (supplied with expansion cabinet) Figure 2-11 Intercabinet Power/Data Cables Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-19 Strata CT Installation Cabinet Right-Side-Panel Power Strip (BPSB240) BPSB240 BPSB240 Screws provided with Power Strip 5219 To AC Outlet Cabinet Bonding Plate FIVE CABINET INSTALLATIONS Mains Input FOUR CABINET INSTALLATIONS H E CAB 4 DK Mains CON-4 CAB 5 L N 1 CAB 4 2 C 3 4 CAB 3 CAB 3 DK Mains CON-4 CAB 2 CAB 2 DK Mains CON-4 CAB 1 (BASE) To AC mains DK Mains CON-4 CAB 1 (BASE) To AC mains WARNING! To prevent serious injury, always mount power strips with provided screws before inserting plug into AC power. AC Cabling CT I&M Figure 2-12 2-20 AC Power Strip Installation and Power Cords in Cabinets Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Right Side H AC Power Cables Front C Bonding Connection Plates (Required for all wall mounted expansion cabinets on both right and left sides) 7925-P 240 VAC power supply cord is shipped with each cabinet. 5233 All Power Strip cords are 9 feet long. To AC Outlet Figure 2-13 AC Power Strips in Cabinet Interior Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-21 Strata CT Installation Step 5: Install Reserve Power Two or four customer-supplied, 12VDC batteries (80 amp hours maximum) can be connected to the system as a power failure backup. In the event of a power failure, the system automatically switches over to battery power without any interruption to existing calls or other normal system functions. Important! Batteries must be connected when normal AC power is available; they cannot be connected during an AC power failure situation. The length of time reserve power operates depends on the system, size and number of batteries provided, and the system load. Typical reserve power duration estimates and battery specifications are estimated with the following considerations (see Table 2-4): ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ H Table 2-4 Batteries have full charge at start of operation. Two or four batteries connected per Figure 2-14. Batteries are 12VDC, rated at 80 amp/hours each. System is operating at full load traffic with LCD phones. Batteries used for this test are gel-cell and maintenance-free. Reserve duration will vary depending upon battery type, age, and manufacturer. These figures should only be used as an estimate. Typical Reserve Power Duration Estimate Number of Cabinets C Estimated operation time Two-battery configuration Estimated operation time Four-battery configuration WARNING! 1 2 3 4 5 12 hrs. 6 hrs. 4 hrs. 3 hrs. 2.5 hrs. 24 hrs. 12.0 hrs 8 hrs 6 hrs. 5 hrs. Some batteries can generate explosive gases. Therefore... Ensure that batteries are located in a well-ventilated area. Do not smoke near batteries. Avoid creating any electrical sparks near batteries. Use commercially available battery enclosures to reduce risk to nearby people and equipment. The procedure for installing reserve power varies, depending on the number of cabinets in the system and the mounting method employed in installing the cabinets. The following text details reserve power battery installation requirements. 2-22 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables The part names and descriptions of the reserve battery cabinet components and cables are shown in Table 2-5. Table 2-5 Reserve Battery Cabinet Components/Cables Option Description PBTC-3M A three-meter battery cable used to connect reserve power batteries to the system power supply when the system has less than three cabinets. One reserve power cable is required for each cabinet in a one or two cabinet system (wall or floor mount). The cable connects the Strata CT cabinet power supply directly to the battery terminals (a BBDB is not required). Strata CT reserve power battery distribution box is required when connecting reserve power batteries to three or more cabinets (wall or floor mount). The box is field installed into one of the Strata CT cabinet side panels. BBDB The BBDB provides five BBTC2A-2.0M, battery distribution cables to connect reserve power from the BDDB box to each individual cabinet power supply. H Two BBTC1A-2.0M are also supplied when ordering the BBDB battery distribution box. BBTC1A-2.0M C A two-meter battery cable used to connect reserve power batteries to the BBDB battery distribution box. One reserve power cable is required in a three or four cabinet system and two cables are required for five cabinet systems (wall or floor mount). The cable connects Strata CT BBDB box directly to the battery terminals. Reserve Power for One or Two Cabinets (Wall Mount) 1. Connect the black jumper wire (supplied with the PBTC-3M cable) from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery (Figure 2-14). 2. Ensure that a serviceable 10-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the PBTC3M cable. 3. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable white lead to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. Important! The cabinet(s) must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switch set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supply via the BATT+/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 4. Connect the PBTC-3M battery cable two-prong male plug to the Base Cabinet power supply BATT +/- receptacle. 5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to connect a PBTC-3M to the Expansion Cabinet. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-23 Strata CT Installation 6. To test reserve power operation, disconnect system AC power plugs with power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagram in Figure 2-14. Reserve Power for Three or More Cabinets (Wall Mount) H 1. Install the Battery Distribution Box (BBDB) to the bottom cabinet (see Figure 2-11 and 2-20). The BBCB is not required for wall mount systems. 2. Connect two Cable “C” jumper wires from the positive terminal of one 12VDC battery to the negative terminal of the second 12VDC batter, per Figure 2-14 (Cable “C” is supplied with the BBTC1A-2.0M cable). 3. Ensure that a serviceable 15-amp fuse is installed in the in-line fuse holder of the BBTC1A-2.0M battery cable. 4. Connect the white lead of the BBTC1A-2.0M battery cable to the open positive terminal of the 12VDC battery. Connect the black lead to the open negative terminal of the second 12VDC battery. 5. Connect a second BBTC1A-2.0M in parallel to the first BBTC1A-2.0M cable per Steps 2, 3 and 4 instructions. 6. Plug the two BBTC1A-2.0M battery cables into the Battery Distribution Box. Important! C 7. Connect the BBTC2A-2.0M cables from the Battery Distribution Box to the BATT +/receptacle of individual power supplies per Figure 2-11 (BBTC2A-2.0M cables are supplied with an BBDB distribution box). 8. To test reserve power operation, disconnect the system AC power plugs with the power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. Note 2-24 The cabinets must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switches set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supplies via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. If connecting four batteries, follow the wiring diagrams in Figure 2-14. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation 2-Batteries/1~5 Cabinets (with BBDB) BBTC1A-2M Cables (6 ft.) A Cabinet 1~4 (only) White Wire 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each 15A Fuse (2 each) B B Cabinet 5~7 (only) A “C” Cable, supplied Black Wire with BBTC1A-2M Cable +– +– A B BATT A To BPSU672 “BATT” Connectors (7 max.) B BBDB BBTC2A-2M Cables (7 max.) supplied with BBDB 2-Batteries/1-Cabinet (without BBDB) Base Cabinet 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each + BPSU672 BATT – Cconnnector PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) BBDB Rating: 27.3VDC, 42A max. 10A Fuse 4-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without BBDB) Base Cabinet + BPSU672 BATT – connnector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR Each 4-Batteries/1~5 Cabinets (with BBDB) Expansion Cabinet + BPSU672 BATT – connnector “C” Cables, supplied with BBTC1A-2M Cable H 15A Fuse (2 each) 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR each 2nd cable required for 5 or more cabinets only A To BPSU672 “BATT” Connectors (7 max.) C BBTC1A-2M Cables (6 ft.) BBTC2A-2M Cables (7 max.) supplied with BBDB 10A Fuse PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) 2-Batteries/2-Cabinets (without BBDB) B Base Cabinet + Fuses (12 AMP) BBDB (cover removed) BPSU672 BATT – connnector 12 Volt Batteries 80 AMP/ HR each + Expansion Cabinet BPSU672 BATT – connnector 10A Fuse PBTC-3M Cables (9 ft.) Figure 2-14 5221 Battery Wiring Diagram (Two or Four Batteries) Wall Mount Only Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-25 Strata CT Installation Cabinet Floor Mounting The part numbers and descriptions of the floor mounting hardware are shown in Table 2-6. Table 2-6 Floor Mount Hardware Option Description Floor mount fixture kit is required when floor mounting two or more Strata CT cabinets. Provides two metal stands for mounting any number of Strata CT cabinets on floor. Three pairs or wall brackets (RWBF) are supplied with BFIF to use when mounting three or more Strata CT cabinets on floor. The wall brackets are needed to secure floor-mounted systems to the wall for safety purposes. BFIF Floor Mounting One or Two Cabinets H C 1. Remove front, side, and top covers from cabinet(s) (Figure 2-4). Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver. 2. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (BPSU672A) are installed per “Install Power Supply” on Page 2-6. 3. If installing just one or two cabinets, install the BFIF fixtures on each side of the bottom of the cabinet (Figure 2-15) and place the cabinet where it should be installed. 4. Set the bottom cabinet on the floor or mount surface, then set the top cabinet on the bottom cabinet. 5. Fasten the two cabinets together with the four screws provided: (two screws at front “A” and two at back “B” of cabinet. Place cabinet where it should be installed. 6. Connect the Expansion Cabinet data cable to the “CAB. 2” data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 2-8 and 2-11). ...or if installing a Remote Expansion Cabinet: see details in “Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions” on Page 2-50. 7. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 2-5. 8. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on cabinet(s) (Figure 2-7). 9. Reinstall covers on to cabinets (Figure 2-4). Floor Mounting Three or More Cabinets This section shows you how to mount three or more cabinets to a concrete, wood or computer room floor. Use the General Steps for all of these methods first, then the specific steps that follow for each method. 1. 2. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (BPSU672A) are installed per “Install Power Supply” on Page 2-6. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets (Figure 2-4). Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using Phillips screwdriver (Figure 2-3). 3. 2-26 Install a floor fixture (BFIF) on each side of the bottom cabinet. (Make sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge. For Steps 3~10, see Figures 2-15~2-19. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation 4. Place cabinet two on top of the bottom cabinet and connect them together at points “A” and “B” with the screws provided. 5. Place cabinet three on top of cabinet two and connect them together at points “A” and “B” with the screws provided. 6. If installing more than three cabinets, install wall brackets (RWBF) on the top of cabinet three. Position the three cabinets parallel to the wall (two inches from the wall) and secure the wall brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors as required. 7. For systems with just three cabinets, secure the floor fixtures (already attached to the bottom cabinet) to the floor with the customer-provided floor bolts. 8. Refer to the sub-sections that follow the appropriate procedure to anchor the system to concrete, wood, or computer room floor. 9. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and B with the screws provided. 10. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF) are installed on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three. 11. Check to make sure the cabinets are parallel to the wall. Secure the floor fixtures attached to the bottom cabinet to the floor with the customer-provided floor anchors. H C 12. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 2-8). (The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet should be connected to the connector labelled “CAB. 2”, the cable from the second Expansion Cabinet to the “CAB. 3” connector, etc.) 13. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 2-5. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet and reinstall covers on the cabinets. (The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-27 Strata CT Installation Top Cabinet Wall Securing Brackets (RWBF) (Left and Right Side) B B Front (2) Mouting Screws A Provided with BFIF Kit B Back (2) Mounting Screws Provided with BFIF Kit B B Base Cabinet (bottom) H B Third Cabinet Wall Securing Bracket (RWBF) (Left and right side) A B A B A B A B A BFIF Mounting Screws C B A Anchor Bolts (2) Bottom Wall Securing Bracket (RWBF) 1 BFIF is inside of cabinet edge 5042 Figure 2-15 Anchor Bolts (2) Floor Fixture (BFIF) BFIF Mounting Screws Strata CT Cabinet Floor Installation Important! ◆ BFIF (two-each) and RWBFA (six-each) are supplied with the floor installation kit BFIF. ◆ Upper and third cabinets must be fixed to the wall with RWBFS on each side (use #12 x 1.25 wood screws and wall anchors, as required). ◆ Floor fixture (BFIF) must be fixed to floor by either anchor bolts, or wall by RWBF wall brackets (see Figures 2-15 and 2-16). 2-28 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation RWBFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated RWBF “A” Front two screws, left and right sides “B” Back two screws, left and right sides RWBF RWBF A B RWBF A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B RWBF BFIF RWBF RWBF BFIF BFIF 5007 H BFIFs are used on left and right sides, wherever indicated Note Figure 2-16 RWBF (3-pairs) and BFIF Stands (1-pair) are supplied with floor installation kit BFIF. Floor Mounting Cabinet Installation Bolt Cabinets to Concrete Floor C 1. Mount the Strata CT Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (see Figures 2-15 and 2-17). Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. Bottom Cabinet BFIF (Floor mount fixture) Bolt Lockwasher Concrete Floor Bolt Anchor Plug 5242 Figure 2-17 2. Installation on Concrete Floor Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note 3. Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8-inch bolt anchors. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-29 Strata CT Installation 4. Install the bolt anchors, with plugs, in the drilled holes. 5. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive each bolt anchor into the floor. 6. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor. 7. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using bolts, lock washers, and flat washers. Bolt Cabinets to Wooden Floor 1. Mount the Strata CT Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (BFIF). See Figures 2-15 and 2-16. Base Cabinet BFIF (Floor mount fixture) Bolt Lockwasher Wooden Floor H 1468 Figure 2-18 C Installation on Wooden Floor 2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note 4. Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. Drill pilot holes to make insertion of 3/8 inch lag bolts easier, and to prevent splitting of wood flooring. 5. Move the Base Cabinet into position on the equipment room floor. 6. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using lag bolts, lock washers, and flat washers Bolt Cabinets to Computer Room Floor 1. Mount the Strata CT Base Cabinet on Floor Mount Fixtures (BIMF). See Figures 2-15 and 2-16. 2. Position the Base Cabinet at the selected installation location. 3. Mark the floor where holes will be drilled. Move the Base Cabinet prior to drilling. Note 2-30 Cover the Base Cabinet with a drop cloth to protect the power equipment from dust created during drilling. 4. Drill holes through tile for 3/8-inch threaded rods. 5. After the tiles have been drilled, insert threaded rods through the holes in the tile and mark the concrete floor directly beneath the holes in the tiles. 6. Remove the tiles. Use a hammer drill to make holes for 3/8-inch bolt anchors. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation 7. Install the bolt anchors with plugs in the drilled holes. Bottom Cabinet BFIF (Floor mount fixture) Floor Tiles Flat Washer Lock Washer Hex Nut Lead Anchors Concrete 1469 Figure 2-19 H C Installation on Computer Room Floor 8. Using the driving tool and a hammer, drive each bolt anchor into the floor. 9. Screw threaded rods into each bolt anchor. 10. Install a hex nut, lock washer, and flat washer on each threaded rod. Screw the nuts down far enough to allow floor tiles to be replaced over the threaded rods. 11. Replace tiles over threaded rods in their original positions on the floor. 12. Reach under the tiles, and screw the hex nuts upward until the flat washers are touching the bottom of the tile. 13. Use a hack saw to cut the threaded rods at a height of approximately 1.5 inches above the floor tile. 14. Move the Base Cabinet into position over the threaded rods. 15. Secure the Base Cabinet to the floor using flat washers, lock washer, and hex nuts on each threaded rod.Mount Cabinets to Computer Room Floor (Unbolted) 16. Make sure that cabinet power supplies (BPSU672A) are installed per “Install Power Supply” on Page 2-6. 17. Remove front, side, and top covers from all cabinets (Figure 2-4). Note As shown in Figure 2-4, the two screws on each side cover and the three screws on the front cover (the bottom left screw must be completely removed) should only be loosened and the covers slid to the right for removal. 18. Remove plastic locating parts from all cabinet back covers using a Phillips screwdriver (Figure 2-3). 19. Install a floor fixture (BFIF) on each side of the bottom cabinet (Figures 2-15 and 2-19), making sure that the fixture is inside of the cabinet edge. 20. Secure a wall bracket (RWBF) to both floor fixtures with the screws provided. Secure the wall brackets to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors. 21. Place a cabinet on top of the bottom cabinet and connect the cabinets together at points “A” and “B”17 with the screws provided. 22. Install wall brackets (RWBF) on the top of cabinet three and secure them to the wall with customer-provided wood screws and wall anchors. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-31 Strata CT Installation 23. Add remaining cabinets, making sure that the cabinets are connected together at points A and B with screws provided. 24. For systems with four or more cabinets, make sure that wall brackets (RWBF) are installed on both sides of the top cabinet, in addition to cabinet three. 25. Connect the data cable of each Expansion Cabinet to the applicable data cable connector on the Base Cabinet (Figures 2-8 and 2-11). The data cable from the first Expansion Cabinet should be connected to the connector labelled “CAB. 2”, the cable from the second Expansion Cabinet to the “CAB. 3” connector, etc.) 26. Install ground wiring, AC and reserve power cabling, and PCB cabling per the “Recommended Installation Sequence” on Page 2-5. 27. Fill out cabinet/slot identification labels on each cabinet (see Figure 2-7), then reinstall covers on the cabinets. (The top cover should be installed on the top cabinet.) H C 2-32 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Strata CT Floor Mounted Bottom Cabinet (Wall Mount) Second from Bottom Cabinet (Floor Mount) Cable from BCCB BBTCIA-2M BPSB240A Power Strips BBDB1A Battery Distribution Box BBTC2A-2M Five Cables Supplied with BBDB BBDB1A Battery Distribution Box H 240 Conduit Connection Box Floor Mounted Bottom Cabinet C To BPSU672F Power Supply "BATT" Jack Cables to BBDB1A Conduit Reserve Batteries Primary AC Power Pannel Battery AC Power BCCB120A or BCCB240 Conduit Connection Box BFIF Floor Mount Stand 4784 Figure 2-20 Battery Distribution and Conduit Connection Box Installation Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-33 Strata CT Installation F1~F4 Battery Fuses 250VAC/15A To BBDB Battery Distribution Box F3 F1 F4 F2 BCCB240 (top view) 2 outlets Not Fused Rated: 250VAC/20A BCCB BATT + - H AC L N Battery Wire Specifications #10 AWG minimum (2 pairs) 42A max. AC Wire Specifications: 5047 Conduit Holes to 1/2 inch trade size From reserve battery C From 20A dedicated circuit BCCB120 #10 AWG 29A max. BBCB240 #12 AWG 18A max. WARNING! BCCB conduit boxes must be installed by a certified electrician. Figure 2-21 BCCB AC Power and Battery Connections Notes 2-34 ● When floor mounting the Strata CT, the batteries must be installed by a licensed electrician per local electric code using conduit. (See Figure 2-21.) ● Batteries should be installed in a customer-supplied commercial battery box or enclosed rack. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Reserve Power/AC Wiring for Three or More Cabinets (Floor Mount) ➤ To connect reserve power to floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets See Figures 2-11~2-13 and follow these steps: 1. Make sure that the Conduit Connection Box is installed on the bottom base cabinet (see Figure 2-20). The box can be installed by the regular system installer. 2. Have a licensed electrician install conduit and battery cabling to the Conduit Connection Box per local electrical codes. The remaining steps in this procedure can be performed by the regular system installer (see Figure 2-21). 3. Install the Battery Distribution Box on the second cabinet (the cabinet directly above the bottom cabinet), see Figure 2-20. 4. Plug the two Conduit Connection Box cables (coming from the left side of the BCCB box) into the Battery Distribution Box (BBDB). Important! H C The cabinets must be connected to the (live) AC power source, and the power supply On/Off switches set to On prior to the final step of connecting the reserve power batteries to the power supplies via the BATT +/- receptacle. If the batteries are connected after AC power is lost, reserve power will not function. 5. Connect cables from the (BBDB) Battery Distribution Box to the BATT +/- receptacle of individual power supplies. BBTC2A-2M cables come with each BBDB distribution box (see Figure 2-11). 6. To test reserve power operation, turn off the system AC power circuit breaker with power supply On/Off switches in the On position. The system should continue to operate without interruption. See “Install Reserve Power” on Page 2-22 for battery specifications and wiring guidelines. Step 6: Install Universal and Processor PCBs This section provides procedures for the installation of Strata CT processor (or common control) PCBs. The Strata CT system Base and Expansion Cabinets are shipped empty. PCBs are not installed at the factory. Universal PCBs must be placed according to the configuration information obtained and developed in Chapter 1 – Strata CT Configuration. Processor PCB installation starts on Page 2-37 of this chapter. ◆ Install PCBs only after installing the Base Cabinet and, if applicable, Expansion Cabinets per the Cabinet Installation section in this chapter. ◆ Be sure the power supply has been tested and the ground has been checked (see “Install Power Supply” on Page 2-6. ◆ Install universal slot PCBs per the Strata CT configuration guidelines (see “Strata CT Cabinet Slot Configuration” on Page 1-16. ◆ Install the metal mesh shield, B50MT around the 25-pair cables connected to PCBs per Figure 2-9. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-35 Strata CT Installation PCB Installation Considerations The Base Cabinet has ten slots. The first two slots, labelled “B101” and “B102” are reserved for the common control unit and future feature upgrades. The next eight slots (labelled “S101” ~“S108”) are universal and capable of hosting any of the station, line, and option interface PCBs compatible with the Strata CT systems. The Expansion Cabinets have ten universal slots, labelled “S_01,” “S_02,” etc., where the blank space of the label represents the number of the Expansion Cabinet. Like the universal slots in the Base Cabinet, these universal slots are capable of hosting any of the station, line, and option interface PCBs (except RSIU which can only be installed in slot S101 of the Base Cabinet). Cabinets are numbered from 1 to 5. The Base Cabinet is numbered 1; the first Expansion Cabinet, number 2; the second Expansion Cabinet, number 3, etc. See the Strata CT Configuration and Universal Slot PCB section for details regarding PCB installation. PCB Option Considerations Strata CT PCBs can be configured for a variety of hardware and software options. Hardware options are defined as either internal (generally related to optional PCB subassemblies) or external (related to connection of peripheral equipment such as background music, voice mail, etc.). H Hardware Options Some PCBs must be configured for hardware options prior to installation of the PCB in the cabinet. Configuration instructions for internal hardware options are provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter and in Chapter 3 – Universal Slot PCBs. Configuration instructions for external hardware options are provided in Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation. C Software Options PCBs are configured for software options through programming, following the installation instructions of the PCBs. A programming overview for each PCB is provided in the individual PCB installation procedures in this chapter. Refer to the Strata CT Programming Manual for detailed programming instructions. 2-36 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation BCU Processor PCBs System Type: Strata CT Base Cabinet Current Version: B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, B5CAU Older Version(s): None The common control unit provides centralised control for the system. It incorporates a 16 or 32 bit, 68000-type microprocessor and contains a custom time switch and conference Large Scale Integration (LSI) circuitry. The processor operating software is programmed on four read-only-memory (ROM) chips on the B1CU, B2CAU, B3CAU, B5CAU PCBs. The B5CBU also has a flash memory PCB (BMMS). The operating software (ROM or BMMS) is factory-installed. The BCU common control units interface with optional BRCS DTMF receivers, feature keys (RKYS 2, 3 or 4) for Auto Attendant (AA), Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), Management Information System (MIS) for ACD, Toshiba proprietary RS-232 and SMDI voice mail interfaces. PCB Installation Power Supply Considerations H C 1. The power supply must be Off whenever removing or installing the processor PCB— B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, and B5CAU PCBs (see Figure 2-2). 2. It is recommended that the power supply be Off, whenever possible, when removing or installing the other PCBs. Maximum Capacities Configurations for a fully-expanded system can range from 200 lines/ 336 stations. Additionally, each of the common control units can support a separate set of features. Refer to Chapter 1 – Strata CT Configuration for more information. Each of the common control units may be equipped with an BRCS (4, 8, or 12) to interpret Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) signals transmitted from Tie/DDI lines, built-in AA and standard telephone ports. The common control units also provide an interface (along with a volume control) for a Music-on-hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) source. BCU PCBs are described later in this chapter. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-37 Strata CT Installation Internal Hardware Options The BCU common control units support the following hardware options: RKYS Feature Key Upgrades The system can be upgraded for built-in AA, ACD, and MIS for ACD with feature keys that attach to the BCU processor PCB (see Table 2-7). The RKYS 2, 3 and 4 are compatible with all BCUs. Table 2-7 RKYS Features Feature Key RKYS11 RKYS2 RKYS3 H RKYS4 Feature(s) Provided ● Built-in Auto Attendant ● Built-in Auto Attendant ● ACD ● Built-in Auto Attendant ● ACD with an MIS application ● Built-in Auto Attendant ● Enhanced ACD with MIS 1 The RKYS1 is built into all the processors as standard. ➤ C To install the RKYS (1, 2, 3 or 4) ➤ Note Insert the RKYS into the socket on the appropriate BCU PCB see Figure 2-24 on Page 2-42. Only one RKYS socket is available on the card. It is not necessary to run any special programs (i.e., Program 03) when RKYS is installed. RKYS can be installed before or after system initialisation, and, before or after the customer database is entered. The feature(s) provided by the RKYS are immediately enabled when the RKYS is installed. However, configuration programs for AA and ACD must be run for the feature to operate. Music-on-hold/Background Music Volume Control (External Options) Each of the common control units (except B2CBU, B3CBU and B5CBU) has a trim potentiometer (VR1) to adjust the volume of the MOH/BGM source connected to the Musicon-hold (MOH)/Background Music (BGM) RCA jack interface, which is also on the common control unit. The volume control potentiometer and the MOH/BGM interface are on the B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU and B5CAU/B5CBU PCBs. The VR1 potentiometer does not control the volume of alternate BGM sources connected to either the RSTU, PSTU or other BGM source interfaces. ➤ 2-38 To install the MOH/BGM source to the BCU ➤ Adjust the VR1 potentiometer to the desired volume level while listening to MOH or BGM (see Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation DTMF Receiver Unit (BRCS-4, BRCS-8, BRCS-12) There are three BRCSs: the BRCS-4 has four DTMF receiver circuits; the BRCS-8 has eight receiver circuits; and the BRCS-12 has 12 receiver circuits.The BRCS is shown in Figure 2-22. The B1CU can support up to 12 DTMF receiver circuits; all other processors can have up to 24 circuits. One BRCS can be installed on each processor PCB. The DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS) translates DTMF signals to data signals and attaches to common control units with 4, 8, or 12 receiver circuits. ➤ To install an BRCS onto B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, or B5CAU/B5CBU ➤ The BRCS connectors on these PCBs are positioned to allow installation of the BRCS only in the proper position. Mu Auto Note Mate BRCS connectors (see Figure 2-22) with the applicable BCU PCB. Apply firm, even pressure to the BRCS to ensure proper mating of the connectors. Connectors for each BCU card are shown on Figures 2-22~2-30. One BRCS (4, 8, or 12) can be installed on each processor, allowing up to 12 DTMF receivers on B1CU and 24 on all other processors. H J4 P1 UP J2 J1 BRCS BRCS Connector BCU C J3 BRCS Connector BRCS Connector ON OFF BATT BCU 5222 Figure 2-22 BRCS Printed Circuit Board Connection Example Note Install the RSIU in slot 101 only and ensure ribbon cable connection to processor. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-39 Strata CT Installation BCU Installation CAUTION! ◆ Do not remove the plastic insulation shield from the back of the BCU PCB. If the shield comes off, do not allow the back of the PCB to contact metal. ◆ The BCU PCBs are shipped from the factory with the battery jumper in the “Off” position. Ensure it is moved to the “On” position before installing the BCU to protect customer configuration information stored in the BCU RAM. ◆ The power supply must be off when installing the BCU PCB or damage to the board could result. H 1. Set the battery jumper, “BATT”, on the B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU or B5CAU/B5CBU, to the “On” position (see Figures 2-24~2-30 and Tables 2-8~2-14). 2. Ensure the BCU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options (i.e., BRCS or RKYS). See “Internal Hardware Options” on Page 2-38. 3. Insert the B1CU, B2CBU, B3CBU, or B5CBU (1, 2 or 3) into the “B101” slot in the Base Cabinet. If B1CU and RSIU is installed, you must also install a ribbon cable between them (Figure 2-23). Port 1 Port 2 C Two-connector ribbon cable (supplied with RCTU) Port 3 Three-connector ribbon cable (supplied with RSIU) Slot B2CAU, B3CAU or B5CAU Port 4 B101 B102 S_01 S_02 S_03 5240 RSIU B1CU (see Note), B2CBU, B3CBU or B5CBU RSIS or RMDS PDKU or PEKU Note: B1CU doesn't use 2-connector ribbon; There is no partner processor PCB. Figure 2-23 Processor PCB Connectors and RSIU Placement Ensure the component side of the BCU PCB is facing right when installing it in the Base Cabinet. 2-40 4. Insert the B2CAU, B3CAU, or B5CAU PCB into slot B102. 5. After installing the BCU PCBs, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation 6. Connect the supplied ribbon cables between B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU and B5CAU/B5CBU and RSIU, if installed. Note Do not adjust the C14 or C15 trimmer capacitor. The capacitor is factory-calibrated. CAUTION! 7. When transporting the BCU PCBs, keep the P8 or P9 battery jumper in the “On” position in order to save the configuration data stored in BCU RAM. (The battery will protect RAM for approximately six years.) Otherwise, to conserve the lithium battery, move the jumper to the “Off” position. When packaging the BCU PCB, use only a nonconducting material enclosure, such as plain cardboard. Conductive material can cause the internal battery to discharge and erase memory in the BCU PCB. BCU Programming H C After initially installing a new and unused common control unit, all on-board RAM memory needs to be erased and initialised by running Program 91-9 twice before all other PCBs are installed. If RAM contains configuration or feature data from previous programming that should be retained, do not run Program 91-9. See the Strata CT Programming Manual. If installing a BCU PCB perform a processor RAM test with Program 00, part 2. On new BCU installations, run the RAM test after BCU initialisation, before entering the customer database. The following parameters can be specified, through programming, for the BCU PCB. Program 00, part 2: BCU RAM test. Program 03: ➤ ➤ Assign the appropriate slot code for each BCU PCB: slot code 00 for B101. Assign the appropriate code for each PCB: ◆ Code 91 – no BRCS ◆ Code 92 – four BRCS circuits ◆ Code 93 – eight BRCS circuits ◆ Code 94 – 12 BRCS circuits Notes ➤ ➤ ➤ ● System Power must be cycled or Program 91-2 must be run after Program 03. ● If there are no options on the BCU, Program 03 can be skipped and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead. Program *03: For B5CAU/BU1A only. Run program to identify Strata CT cabinets. Program 12: Select the seize time of the BRCS circuits. Program 90, 91, 92: BCU initialisation programs. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-41 Strata CT Installation Table 2-8 B1CU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector H Type of Component Description Serial Interface Connector P12 Ribbon connector. Serial interface unit connector. DTMF Receiver Connector P3 16-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P4 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P5 6-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). BATT Battery Jumper P8 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for onboard lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/ BGM source. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to RCTUA. UP BRCS Connector (J4 to P4) P4 IC18 BRCS Connector (J1 to P3) IC17 B1CAU C IC8 P3 IC15 P2 IC12 IC16 BRCS Connector (J3 to P5) P5 P12 P1 RSIU Connector ON P8 OFF BATT BGM/MOH Volume Control P9 BGM/MOH Interface (RCA Jack) Backplane Connector TOSHIBA RKYS_A CBRUNK B1CAU 5029 RKYS Feature Key Figure 2-24 2-42 B1CU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Table 2-9 B2CAU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector H Type of Component Description DTMF Receiver Connector P3 16-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P4 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P5 6-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). Connector P10 Connector for ribbon cables Ribbon cable connector for connection to B2CBU. Connector P11 Connector for ribbon cables Ribbon cable connector for B2CBU and RSIU. BATT P9 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to B3CAU. UP C BRCS Connector (J4 to P4) P4 P3 BRCS Connector (J1 to P3) P2 IC10 P10 B2CBU Connector BRCS Connector (J3 to P5) P5 P1 OFF BATT ON B2CAU1A P9 P13 BGM/MOH Interface (RCA Jack) Backplane Connector VR1 BGM/MOH Volume Control P11 B2CBU/RSIU Connector 5024 Figure 2-25 B2CAU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-43 Strata CT Installation Table 2-10 B2CBU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector H Type of Component Description DTMF Receiver Connector P5 16-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P6 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P7 6-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). Connector P10 Connector for ribbon cables Ribbon cable connector for connection to B2CAU. Connector P3 Connector for ribbon cables Ribbon cable connector for B2CAU and RSIU. Heart Beat indicator CD5 Red LED Flashes to indicate operation (1/4 second On — 1/4 second Off). BATT P9 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to B3CAU. UP B2CBU1A C IC12 IC9 IC10 BRCS Connectors (J3 to P7) P1 P9 OFF BATT ON P3 RKYS Feature Key Socket P2 IC6 RSIU Connector BRCS Connector (J4 to P2) P7 P10 B2CAU Connector P6 IC11 P5 BRCS Connector (J1 to P5) C5 Backplane Connector B2CBU1A 5023 CBRUNK Figure 2-26 2-44 B2CBU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Table 2-11 B3CAU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector H Type of Component Description DTMF Receiver Connector P3 16-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P4 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P5 6-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). Connector P10 Connector for B3CBU ribbon cables Ribbon cable connector for connection to B3CAU. Used in conjunction with P2. Connector P11 Connector for B3CBU ribbon cables Ribbon cable connector for connection to B3CBU. Used in conjunction with P2. BATT P9 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to B3CAU. UP C BRCS Connector (J4 to P4) P4 P3 P2 BRCS Connector (J1 to P3) IC10 P10 B3CBU Connector BRCS Connectors (J3 to P5) P5 P11 P1 B3CBU/RSIU Connector BGM/MOH Volume Control VR1 OFF P9 BATT B3CAU1A ON P13 BGM/MOH Interface (RCA Jack) Backplane Connector 5027 Figure 2-27 B3CAU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-45 Strata CT Installation Table 2-12 B3CBU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description DTMF Receiver Connector P3 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P4 6-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P5 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). Connector P10 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector for connection to B3CAU. Connector P11 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector for B3CAU & RSIU. BATT Battery Jumper P9 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to B3CAU. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 H UP CD5 Heartbeat LED BRCS Connector (J1 to P5) IC9 IC10 BRCS Connector (J4 to P6) P2 P10 B3CAU Connector IC12 P5 C P6 IC11 BRCS Connector (J3 to J7) P7 P1 OFF P9 Backplane Connector BATT ON P3 RSIU Connector CBRUNK RKYS Feature Key Socket CBRUNK B3CBU1A 5026 Figure 2-28 2-46 B3CBU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Table 2-13 B5CAU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description BRCS Connector P5 16-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). BRCS Connector P6 6-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). BRCS Connector P7 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). Connector P3 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to B5CBU. Connector P4 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to B5CBU & RSIU. BATT P9 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. MOH/BGM Source Connector RCA jack Interface connector for MOH/BGM source. MOH/BGM Source Volume Control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume for MOH/BGM source connected to B5CBU. H UP UP RTSS2 C P7 UP P20 P2 P6 P3 BRCS Connectors (J3 to P6) IC37 P4 B5CBU/RSIU Connector P10 B5CBU Connector P5 BRCS Connector (J1 to P5) BRCS Connectors (J4 to P7) Backplane Connector CBRUNK P1 BGM/MOH Interface (RCA Jack) VR1 BGM/MOH Volume Control B5CAU1A 5021 Figure 2-29 B5CAU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-47 Strata CT Installation Table 2-14 B5CBU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description DTMF Receiver Connector P8 16-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P9 6-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). DTMF Receiver Connector P10 10-pin male connector Interface connector for optional DTMF receiver subassembly (BRCS). Connector P2 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to B5CAU. Used in conjunction with P2. Connector P3 Connector and ribbon cable Ribbon cable connector to B5CAU and RSIU. Used in conjunction with P3. Heart Beat Indicator CD5 Red LED Flashes to indicate operation (1/4 second On, 1/4 second Off). BATT Battery Jumper P5 3-terminal jumper Interface connector for on-board lithium battery that protects configuration data stored in system RAM. H BMMS1 C UP UP CD5 BRCS Connector (J4 to P10) P7 P6 P8 BRCS Connector (J1 to P8) P10 P2 P3 B5CAU Connector P9 BRCS Connector (J3 to P9) P1 P4 B5CAU/RSIU Connector IC16 Backplane Connector ON 2-48 OFF Figure 2-30 P5 BATT RKYS Feature Key Socket CBRUNK B5CBU1A 5020 B5CB PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Remote Expansion Cabinet Unit The RRCU1A PCB enables a Strata CT Expansion Cabinet to be located up to three kilometers from its Base Cabinet. One RRCU1A connects to up to two ribbon-type Data Cables and applies the inter-cabinet signal to a fiber-optic pair. One fiber pair can support one or two expansion cabinets in one remote location using one RRCU1A in the Base Cabinet and another in the Remote Expansion Cabinet. Local Strata CT Cabinets Expansion Cabinet (2) 1 (M1) 2 (S1) 3 (M2) 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 (S2) Optical Module Base Cabinet Remote Strata CT Cabinets H Fiber Optic Connection Up to 3 Kilometers MSBU (Dealer Supplied) Remote Expansion Cabinet (4) 1 (M1) 2 (S1) Optical Module 3 (M2) C 4 (S2) Remote Expansion Cabinet (3) 5235 Figure 2-31 Remote Expansion Cabinet Connection A Strata CT Base Cabinet will support up to four RRCU1A PCBs, and will support up to four Remote Expansion Cabinets. An inter-cabinet Data Cable in the Base Cabinet is attached to an RRCU1A which converts the signal and uses an LED source to apply the signal to 500 MHz/km multi-mode fiber. Another RRCU1A in the Remote Expansion Cabinet receives the LED signal, converts it back to its original form and applies it to a ribbon Data Cable connected to the Remote Expansion Cabinet. See Figure 2-31. This is a hardware solution and has no effect on software or administration. Remote cabinets support all line and trunk interfaces. Network clock signals can only be derived from digital trunks installed in the Base Cabinet (Master) location. RRCU1A cards are used at both the Base (Master) and Remote (Slave) Cabinet locations. The card set consists of an RRCU1A PCB and its ROMS1A daughter board. The RRCU1A connects to the inter-cabinet Data Cables, holds the Remote/Slave option jumpers, and has an RS-232C port for monitoring the fiber connection. (See Figure 2-34.) The ROMS1A daughter board holds an SC-type fiber connector, a connector for control of two 8-circuit DPFT units, and status LEDs. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-49 Strata CT Installation Remote Cabinet Installation Instructions All instructions apply to both the Base Cabinet and the Remote Expansion Cabinet except where specifically noted. 1. Install cabinets according to the instructions given at the beginning of Chapter 5. Pay particular attention to wiring and grounding instructions given for Remote Expansion Cabinets. 2. If installing a standalone Remote Expansion Cabinet, or the first in a stack, install the Base Jumper Plug in accordance with Figure 2-2. 3. Cabinets in which RRCU cards are installed must be modified to protect the routing of the cables through the cabinet. ◆ Attach the plastic guide to the bracket provided with the RRCU1A card. See Figure 2-33. ◆ Attach the bracket to the inner wall of the cabinet. 4. Install the RRCU Card ◆ Select correct jumper options (see Figure 2-34). On the Master side, both option plugs connect the centre pin to the upper pin (M1, M2). On the Slave side, both option plugs connect the centre pin to the lower pin (S1, S2). ◆ Remove the protective rubber cap from the fiber connector on the ROMS1A daughterboard. See Figure 2-35. H 5. Install a BCTC1A top cover on the topmost cabinet (see Figure 2-32). C Top View Place lid over screws and slide it to the right. 5030 Figure 2-32 2-50 Remove/Replace Remote Cabinet Cover Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Data Cable Door BDCL1A Data Cable CA B 2 CA B 3 CA B 4 CA B 5 CA B 6 CA B 7 4512 Spiral Tube H Clamp Bracket for Spiral Tube Figure 2-33 Insert Optical Fiber Through Cabinet Important! C 6. When installing the RRCU, be sure to put the card in the slot before attaching the data cables. Detach the data cable before removing an RRCU1A. Failure to do so may cause interference with other data highways. Insert the cards ◆ On the Master side, the RRCU card may be installed in Slots 101~107 ◆ On the Slave side, the RRCU card may be installed in Slots 101~109 (Remote Expansion Cabinet). ◆ The RRCU1A is a non-timeslot card and can be installed in slots normally left vacant adjacent to digital trunk cards. 7. Connect the data cables ◆ At the Base Cabinet, attach an BDCL1A data cable from the data cable connector at the left of the cabinet to Connector M1 or M2 on the RRCU card. (Cables are provided according to the connectors on the RRCU card to which they are attached, see Table 2-15.) ◆ The cabinet connected to M1 in the base emerges on connector S1 of the RRCU1A at the Remote Expansion Cabinet. ◆ The cabinet connected to connector M2 of the RRCU in the base emerges on connector S2 of the RRCU1A at the Remote Expansion Cabinet. See Figure 2-34. ◆ Route the cable through the cabinet according to Figure 2-33. ◆ Coil the excess and attach it to the grommet on the cabinet wall with a tie wrap per Figure 2-5. Be careful not to bind the cable tightly. ◆ Close the data cable doors. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-51 Strata CT Installation Remote Cabinet Data Cables and Connectors Table 2-15 RRCU Connectors Data Cables BDCL1A-MS1 M1 S1 X X M2 BDCL1A-M2 S2 X BDCL1A-S2 X X=applies to connector 8. Connect the fiber optic cables ◆ Pass the fiber optic cable through the protective tube. ◆ Route the tube through the clamp attached to the inner cabinet wall and secure the clamp ◆ Attach fiber to the SC connectors on the ROMS1A daughterboard. ◆ The TX side of the Master connects to the RX side of the slave. ◆ The RX side of the Master connects to the TX side of the slave. H ◆ TAIS recommends that the cables be marked within the cabinet for ease of maintenance. ◆ Observe the minimum bend radius of 30mm. 9. Restore power. 10. Run Command Program 91-1 Automatic PCB Recognition and Port Renumber. C The RRCU PCB and its controls and connectors are shown in Figure 2-34 and Table 2-16. ROMS1A P6 Master 1 P3 P1 M1 Connect to Base Cabinet P7 Slave 1 2-52 Backplane Connector 4356 Figure 2-34 S P9 RS-232 Port S P4 S2 Connect to MSBU P10 P11 P8 Slave 2 M M2 Connect to Base Cabinet M Master 2 P2 S1 Connect to MSBU RRCU1A Remote Expansion Cabinet Printed Circuit Board (RRCU1A) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Table 2-16 RRCU Controls Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Jumper Plug P10 3-terminal Jumper Plug Master Mode (M connections) Jumper Plug P10 Slave Mode (S connections) The ROMS subassembly and fiber optic cable connectors is shown in Figure 2-35. Table 2-16 lists the fiber optic cable specifications. 11 J3 1 1 SD RDER SYCF SYCS RST ROMS1A J1 -24v DG PFT-CONTROL CD1 CD2 CD3 CD4 CD5 15 1 J2 H 10 11 4379 C Plastic Cap J4 1 TX Side Optical Module RX Side Remove Rubber Cap to plug in Fiber Optic Cable Fiber Optic Cable CAUTION! Figure 2-35 Inserting the fiber connector at an angle or too forcefully can cause damage. ROMS1A Subassembly Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-53 Strata CT Installation Table 2-17 Fiber Optic Specification Item Specification Transmission Speed 155.52 Mbps Optical Source LED, 1300 nm Fiber Type Multi-mode, Graded Index Fiber (GIF) Core Diameter 62.5 micrometers Cladding Diameter 125 micrometers Connector Type SC (2-pin transmit and receive) Maximum Fiber Length 3 km (500~1000 MHz/km fiber) 2 km (200~400 MHz/km fiber) H C Optical Budget (Loss) 9 dB (one way) Minimum Bend Radius 30 mm Round Trip Delay Time 30 micro seconds. Transmit Power >= -23.5 dBm Receiver Sensitivity <= -30 dBm The fiber connection must conform to both the Optical Budget and Fiber Length specifications. It is possible to have a fiber connection longer than 3 km with less than 9 dB of loss; however, the Strata CT Remote Expansion Cabinet is sensitive to signal delay and cannot be guaranteed to operate at distances greater than 3 km. 2-54 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation Status Indicators The RRCU1A card set provides two status indicators: a set of LEDs on the ROMS1A card and an RS232C Monitor Port on the RRCU1A. Status indications are provided according to Tables 2-18 and 2-19. Binary Code Output is generated upon change of a reported condition. Table 2-18 BIT D0 RS-232C Binary Code Output Label SD Function 1: Optical signal not detected 0: Optical signal detected D1 RDER 1: Code rule violation detected in received data 0: Code rule violation not detected in received data D2 H SYCF 1: Frame synchronisation of received data not established Normal Condition 0 0 0 0: Frame synchronisation of received data established D3 SYCS 1: System synchronisation between cabinets not established 0 0: System synchronisation between cabinets established D4 C RST 1: Reset signal from CTU detected 0: Reset signal from CTU not detected 0 D5 Not Used 0 D6 Not Used 1 D7 Not Used 0 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-55 Strata CT Installation Table 2-19 LED Status Indications LED Blinking: Power is supplied PWR Blinking Off: Power is not supplied On: Optical signal not detected SD Off Off: Optical signal detected On: Code rule violation detected in received data RDER Off: Code rule violation not detected in received data On: Frame synchronisation of received data not established SYCF H Normal Condition Function Off: Frame synchronisation of received data established On: System synchronisation between cabinets not established SYCS Off: System synchronisation between cabinets established On: Reset signal from CTU detected RST Off Off Off Off Off: Reset signal from CTU not detected C Monitor Port Communication Parameters Data rate: Data word bits: Parity: Stop bits: 9600 bps 8 None 1 Monitor Port Pin Assignments 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 2-56 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Strata CT Installation The monitor port pin connection and pin assignments are shown in Figure 2-36. RRCU1A PC with communication software - such as ProComm™ Monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 4439 H Monitor jack (RJ-12) pin numbering C Figure 2-36 RRCU1A Monitor Jack Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 2-57 Strata CT Installation H C 2-58 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs 3 Universal Slot PCBs This chapter contains information on Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) which can be used in the universal slots of the Strata CT cabinets. Note Prior to PCB installation, the power supply must be tested and the ground checked. PCB Compatibility The following is a list of PCBs that appear in this chapter: H C PCB Compatible with Strata CT BVPU X Voice Over Internet Protocol (IP) Gateway Unit EOCU X Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (See PEKU for installation/programming instructions) IMDU X Remote Maintenance Modem Unit (See PIOU2, PIOUS2 for installation/programming instructions) PCOU X (Four circuit loop start Exchange Line Interface Unit) PDKU X Digital Telephone Interface Unit Function PEKU X Electronic Telephone Interface Unit PEMU X Four current E&M Tie Line Unit PEPU X External Page/Door lock Interface Unit PIOU, PIOUS X Option Interface Units PSTU X (See RSTU2 for installation/programming instructions) RATU X Attendant Console Interface Unit PCOU X Four-Circuit Loop Start Exchange Line Interface Unit RMDS X Optional built-in modem. (See RSIU for installation/ programming instructions.) RSIS X Optional RS-232 ports. (See RSIU for installation/programming instructions.) RSIU X RS-232/Modem Interface Unit RSTU X Standard Telephone Interface Unit Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-1 Universal Slot PCBs PCB Compatible with Strata CT Function PACU X Four Circuit AC15 Tie Line Interface Unit RPTU X ISDN30 Primary Rate Interface Unit RBSU X ISDN BRA Interface Unit 2-circuit (4 B channels) RBSS X Sub-Assembly for RBSU-supports 2 S-BUS circuits (4 B channels) - NT only R40S1A X DC40V power supply unit for RBSU1 - supplies PS1 to ISDNTE RSTU X Standard Telephone Interface Unit R48S X Sub-Assembly Unit for RSTU-48Vdc supply PCB Chapter Layout Each PCB outline begins with the PCB’s designation and title (the outline appears in the chapter in alphabetical order by designation). A brief synopsis of the PCB appears next and includes a notation of the system(s) that the PCB can be used in, the circuits supplied by the PCB, what equipment the PCB interfaces with, and a list of the PCB’s older version(s) with a brief description of their differences. Installation and programming instructions follow the synopsis with a table showing the PCB’s controls, indicators and connectors and an illustration of the board. H Universal Slot PCBs PCB Title C RSTU Standard Telephone Interface Unit System: System: Circuits per PCB: Interfaces with: Strata CT Expansion KSU eight standard telephone circuits standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only) auto attendant digital announcer Compatible Slot(s): slots 15~18 Older Versions: PSTU2-190V P-P or 130V P-P W1 jumper Only one telephone (or device) can be connected to a RSTU2 port. If more than one telephone or device is connected to a port or ringing may not function. Gives the type of system that is compatible with the given PCB. Be sure to read this information before attempting to use a PCB with your system application. Notes ● For the system to recognise the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF receiver Unit (K5RCU) must be installed on the Strata CT. ● Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require the 190VP-P level; however, some devices may experience ring-trip with 190VP-P and should be set for 130 P-P. Circuits per PCB: Type and number of circuits available on the PCB. See Figure 3-4 for an illustration of the PSTU2. Figure 3-5 shows the RSTU2. See Table 5-4, for details of the PSTU and RSTU2 controls and indicators. sample.pg Interfaces with: Type of line/hardware the PCB can accept. Compatible Slot(s): Which system slot(s) the PCB can be installed into. Older Version(s): Describes older version or versions of the PCB. 3-2 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs BVPU – Internet Protocol (IP) Interface Unit (Future Release) System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: four Tie line circuits; one 10BaseT Ethernet connection Interfaces with: H.323 terminals over an IP network Appears as: 4 E&M Tie lines 2- or 4-wire transmission Type I and II Signalling Immediate and Wink Start Older Version(s): none BVPU Configuration H C Each BVPU PCB can support four VolP channels. One circuit on each unit can also be assigned to handle facsimile traffic. A circuit assigned for fax calls cannot handle voice as well, and visce versa, voice circuits are not able to handle fax calls. Note For the system to recognise the Duelitone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tones generated by incoming calls, a BRCS (-4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the processor card. BRCS is not required for BVPU dial pulse operation (see Program 30, LED 11). BVPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 3-1 and described in Table 3-1. BVPU Installation Install the BVPU in accordance with the following steps: 1. Remove the BVPU PCB from its protective packaging. 2. Insert the BVPU into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. Attach the 10BaseT Ethernet connection to the LAN Connector. 4. Connect a PC equipped with Maintenance Console Software (MCS) to the Serial Port as shown in the diagram below. A serial connection is necessary to establish the IP address of the BVPU. Once the IP address is allocated, programming and maintenance may be conducted over the Ethernet port. 5. Once the BPVU is installed, gently pull it outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Note Each BVPU interface board installed decreases the maximum system PSTN line ports by four. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-3 Universal Slot PCBs BVPU PC with maintenance console software Monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port Toshiba TTY - PC - Cable RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 1 2 3 4 5 6 Call-monitor jack (RJ12) pin numbering 5243 Figure 3-1 BVPU Monitor Jack H BVPU Programming Note C For programming purposes, the Strata CT regards the BVPU card as a PEMU or PACU and identifies it as such. Programming instructions for the gateway component are included in the Voice Over IP Installation Guide. ◆ Program 03: Specify Code 13 for slots that support PEMUs or REMUs (BVPUs) and make sure RRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. ◆ Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming Tie lines to route calls to the proper telephones. ◆ ◆ ◆ Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference. Program 15: Assigns tandem connections and dial pulse option to Tie lines. Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to BVPU Tie lines. Important! Note ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 3-4 Also used to turn on Tie line dial tone return. When a BVPU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four consecutive Exchange line port numbers. Program 30: Disables BRCS for dial pulse operation. Program 71 (1~5) and Program 72: Tie/DDI assignments. Program *71~*73: DH/Tie/DDI to [DN] ringing assignments. Program 93: Assigns a name to a Tie line Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs Table 3-1 BVPU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Serial Port RS-232C Maintenance Connection LAN Connector RJ45 SW0 Dipswitch Unused. All switches = Off LED 1 Green LED On = Tie trunk 4 active LED 2 Green LED On = Tie trunk 3 active LED 3 Green LED On = Tie trunk 2 active LED 4 Green LED On = Tie trunk 1 active LED POWER H BUSY ALARM 10BaseT Ethernet Connection Function Power Status Indication of Line Status - Green ON: OFF: Yellow ON: OFF: Power ON Power OFF Busy Standby Abnormal Status in BVPU or LAN - Red ON: Abnormal OFF: Normal Operation Status Green ON: OFF: Slow Flash: ONLINE C Description Fast Flash: LINK Link to LAN Status LAN Traffic Indicator - Data (RJ45) Collision (RJ45) Data Collision Indicator - Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 After Start-up and operating Starting up or Off-Line Emergency maintenance mode (Error detection in BVPU) Shut down mode Green ON: Normal OFF: Abnormal Green ON: Flashing Green: OFF: Green ON: OFF: Data Communication Data Communication No Data Communication Data Collision No Data Collision 3-5 Universal Slot PCBs 4 3 2 1 VPIS1A Line in Use LEDs UP CN2 SPORT Serial Port LEDs JTAG POWER BUSY ALARM ONLINE LINK BDM Backplane Connector LAN ON LSB 12345678 MSB H CN1 LED7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BVPU1A 5031 TBO Ground Terminal C Figure 3-2 3-6 BVPU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs PDKU – Digital Telephone Interface Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: eight digital telephone circuits Interfaces with: digital telephones (with or w/o PCIU-DI or ADM) DDSS console (circuit 8 only) DDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) DKT2001 single line digital telephones (see Note below) Older Version(s): None PDKU Hardware Options PDKU does not have to be configured for any option. Refer to Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus for instructions on how to connect digital telephones, DDCBs, and DDSS consoles to the PDKU2, as well as how to upgrade digital telephones with these options: a Speaker Off-hook Call Announce upgrade (DVSU), a Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface (HHEU) and the PCIU-DI to provide TAPI connectivity. H Note DKT2001 telephones do not support HHEUs, DADMs, DDSSs, PCIU-DIs, or DVSUs. There are no controls or indicators on the PDKU (Figure 3-3). PDKU Installation C 1. Insert the PDKU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 2. After installing the PDKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PDKU Programming Program 03 ◆ ◆ Specify Code 61 to indicate a station line PDKU. ◆ ◆ Specify Code 64 to indicate a PDKU supporting a DDSS console, Speaker OCA. Specify Code 62 to indicate a PDKU supporting Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) and/or PCIU. For PCIU TAPI mode only and Handset OCA, code 61 can be used and the PDKU can be in any universal cabinet slot. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-7 Universal Slot PCBs Note If there are no PDKU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 919 can be run instead. Programs 28 and 29: Digital Direct Station Selection Consoles (DDSS) assignments. Program *29: Enables ADMs on 2000 & 2500-series digital telephones. Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital telephone handsets. Programs 30, 31: Enables OCA. Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79, *79: Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (DDCB) and door phone ringing assignments. Program 92-5: Initialises initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital telephones. Backplane Connector H C 1371 50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector Figure 3-3 3-8 PDKU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs PEKU – Electronic Telephone Interface Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: eight electronic telephone circuits Interfaces with: electronic telephones (6500-series) HDSS console (circuits 7 and 8 only–each console requires two circuits) EOCU PCB for OCA HDCB (circuit 5 only–ports 004, 012, 020, and 028) Older Version(s): none PEKU controls and interface connectors are shown in Figure 3-5 and described in Table 3-2. Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation onto the PEKU (Internal Option) Note H 1. PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60 are positioned to allow installation of the EOCU only in the proper position (Figure 3-4). Mate EOCU connectors J10, J20, J40, J50, and J60 with PEKU connectors P10, P20, P40, P50, and P60. J60 J40 C J50 J20 J10 1373 Figure 3-4 Off-Hook Call Announce Unit (EOCU) Installation 2. Apply firm, even pressure to EOCU to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. Use a three-pair cable for making connections between the PEKU and the speaker OCA electronic telephone. 4. Refer to “Electronic Telephone Upgrades” on Page 5-16 for procedures to upgrade electronic telephones for Speaker OCA. Note Electronic telephones do not support handset OCA. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-9 Universal Slot PCBs External Options Note Refer to Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus and Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for installation of electronic telephones (including the following upgrades: HVSU2 or HVSU, HVSI for Off-hook Call Announce and HHEU for headset and/or loud ringing bell interface) and external options, respectively. PEKU Configuration to Support an HDSS Console Option 1. Set the SW1 switch to DSS. 2. See “HDSS Console” on Page 5-22 for console installation instructions. Each HDSS console requires dedicated use of circuits 7 and 8 of a particular PEKU PCB. PEKU Configuration to Support Door Phone/Lock Control Unit (HDCB) 1. Cut the W9 Door Phone jumper wire on the PEKU PCB. 2. Refer to “Door Phone (MDFB) Installation” on Page 5-25 for HDCB, associated Door Phones (MDFBs) and door lock control installation procedures. Only circuit 5 of a PEKU associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 can support HDCBs. H PEKU Installation C 1. Make sure the PEKU has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. See previous pages for more information. 2. Insert the PEKU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. After installing the PEKU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. PEKU Programming Program 03: Door phones: ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ Note Specify Code 21 to indicate a non-optioned station line PEKU. Specify Code 22 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA. Specify Code 23 to indicate a PEKU configured for an HDSS console. Specify Code 24 to indicate a PEKU configured for Speaker OCA and an HDSS console. If there are no PEKU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91 can be run instead. Programs 28 and 29: HDSS console assignments. Programs 77-1, 77-2, 79: HDCB and door phone ringing assignments. 3-10 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs Table 3-2 PEKU Controls, Indicators and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Off-hook call announce P10 Off-hook call announce P20 Off-hook call announce P40 Description Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P20, P40, P50, and P60). Used with P10, P40, P50, and P60. 10-pin connector Used with P10, P20, P50, and P60. Off-hook call announce P50 Used with P10, P20, P40, and P60. Off-hook call announce P60 Interface connector for optional Off-hook Call Announce subassembly connector (used with P10, P20, P40, and P50). DSS/EKT HDSS Console/ Electronic Telephone SW1 Switch 2-position slide switch Configures PEKU for operation with an HDSS console or electronic telephones. White jumper wire When cut, configures PEKU for installation of an optional HDCB. Door phone W9 jumper wire H BGM source connection W5 jumper wire Backplane Connector P60 P50 C P20 W9, cut for HDCB option P10 P40 W5, cut for BGM option EKT DSS SW1 1372 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Figure 3-5 PEKU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-11 Universal Slot PCBs PIOU, PIOUS – Option Interface Units System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: (see interfaces) Interfaces with: night transfer/music hold control relay door lock/external amplifier control relay remote maintenance (IMDU) SMDR output alarm sensor zone page interface–four zones (PIOU2 only) built-in paging amplifier (PIOU2 only) unamplified page output Older Version(s): none The PIOU and PIOUS both provide a circuit interface with the system peripheral options. A maximum of three PIOU or PIOUS PCBs can be installed in the system. (see “PIOU, PIOUS Installation” on Page 3-13). PIOU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 3-7 and described in Table 3-3. PIOUS information is provided in Figure 3-7 and Table 3-3. H IMDU2 Installation onto a PIOU2 or PIOUS2 (Internal Option) 1. On the PIOU or PIOUS, set the SW3 switch to the “MODEM” position for IMDU operation. C J3 J1 J2 1387 Figure 3-6 Remote Maintenance Modem (IMDU2) Installation 2. Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the “CCITT” position; or, leave the W4 jumper wire intact on the PIOUS for “CCITT” operation. 3. Ensure that P3 has been set to A law operation and not Mu law operation. 4. Mate IMDU connectors J1, J2, and J3 (Figure 3-6) with PIOU or PIOUS connectors P1, P2, and P3. Note 3-12 PIOU or PIOUS connectors P1, P2, and P3 are positioned to allow installation of the IMDU only in the proper position. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs 5. Refer to the Strata CT Programming Manual and turn LED 14 on in Program 77-1 to enable IMDU operation. Note The IMDU default station intercom or [DN] is #19. 6. Apply firm, even pressure to the IMDU to ensure proper mating of connectors. 7. Set the SW2 baud rate switch on the front panel to 300 or 1200, as appropriate, after the PCB has been installed in the KSU/cabinet (in for 300 bps, out for 1200 bps). Note Refer to Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for external option installation procedures. PIOU, PIOUS Installation H 1. Make sure that P15 has been set to A-Law operation and not Mu-Law operation. 2. Ensure that the PIOU or PIOUS has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. (Refer to Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for more details.) 3. Insert the PIOU or PIOUS (component side facing right) into the last slot (“S108”) of the Base KSU/cabinet if the system only has a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/cabinets. If there are Expansion KSUs/cabinets, install the PIOU or PIOUS in the highest slot number in any KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 4. After installing the PIOU2 or PIOUS2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. PIOU, PIOUS Programming C Program 03: Specify Code 41, 42, or 43 for the slot that will support a PIOU or PIOUS. (See “Multiple Serial Port Installation” on Page 7-2.) Note Program 76 assignments for RSIU, RSIS, RMDS will override Program 03 assignments (41, 42, and 43) for SMDI, SMDR, TTY, and maintenance modem. Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code #39 only, not with All Call Page button). Program 60: Assigns SMDR options. Program 77-1: Assigns relay control and IMDU2 options. Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-13 Universal Slot PCBs Backplane Connector P2 1388 P3 P1 SW1 1200 SPO P10 B SPI TTY 300 P13 B SW3 M C.C.I.T.T. N.O. P12 MODEM P11 J3 H TTY Figure 3-7 50-PIn Female Amphenol Connector SMDR SW2 PIOU Printed Circuit Board J3 C SW1 W4 Set for CCITT Modem Specification SW3 TTY CCITT W4 NORMAL OPEN W3 BELL NORMAL CLOSED SMDR IMDU P3 SW2 P1 P2 CD4 MAKE Optional IMDU PCB Remote Maintenance Modem W1 DE NH ALM SPT SPR DET DER NHT NHR ALMT ALMR 600 TBI Terminal Strip BREAK MAKE W2 BREAK K2 Backplane Connector K1 PIOUS 1389.eps Figure 3-8 3-14 PIOUS2 PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs Table 3-3 PIOU Controls, Indicators and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector H C Type of Component SMDR/TTY interface connector J3 Dual modular connector IMDU connector P1 10-pin connector IMDU connector P2 9-pin connector IMDU connector P3 3-pin connector Description Interface connector for SMDR printer/call accounting device and maintenance terminal/modem. Interface connector for remote maintenance modem piggy-back module. M/B make/break jumper plug P10 External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make or Break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Night/Hold Relay Make or Break jumper. Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. jumper plug P12 Wire jumper Alarm sensor normally open or closed jumper. IMDU or external modem operating specification jumper plug. UK operation must be CCITT. CCITT/BELL jumper plug P13 SMDR baud rate switch SW1 Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) 2-position slide switch for SMDR printer or call accounting device. TTY baud rate switch SW2 2-position locking push-button switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back module (IMDU) or external TTY jack. Enables PIOU for operation with IMDU modem or TTY jack. Modem/TTY switch SW3 SPO/SPI internal/external amplifier switch SW4 2-position slide switch Select built-in 3-watt amplifier (SP1) or 600 ohm outout (SPO) for external page/BGM operation.. Volume control VR1 Trim potentiometer Adjusts volume of built-in 3-watt amplifier. P15 3-pin jumper A or Mu law switch. Must be set for A law operation in th UK. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-15 Universal Slot PCBs Table 3-4 PIOUS Controls, Indicators and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector H C Type of Component Description SMDR/TTY interface connector J3 Dual modular connector (top modular is TTY, bottom is SMDR) Interface connector for SMDR printer/call accounting device and maintenance terminal/modem.* IMDU connector P1 10-pin connector IMDU connector P2 9-pin connector Interface connector for remote maintenance modem piggy-back module. IMDU connector P3 3-pin connector M/B make/break jumper W1 3-terminal jumper plug External Page/Door Lock Control Relay Make or Break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper W2 Night/Hold relay make or break jumper plug. Alarm sensor N.O./N.C. W3 Alarm sensor normally open or normally closed jumper plug. CCITT/BELL jumper W4 IMDU or external modem operating specification jumper. For UK operation ensure it is set for CCITT. SMDR baud rate switch SW1 2-position slide switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for SMDR printer or call accounting device. TTY baud rate switch SW2 2-position locking pushbutton switch Selects baud rate (300 or 1200 bps) for Remote Maintenance Modem piggy-back module (IMDU) or external TTY jack. Modem/TTY switch SW3 2-position slide switch Enables PIOUS for operation with IMDU modem or TTY jack. P15 3-pin jumper A or Mu law switch. Must be set for A law operation in th UK. *Top modular is TTY and bottom modular is SMDR. 3-16 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 – External Page Interface Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: (see interfaces) Interfaces with: built-in paging amplifier or page speaker door lock control external amplifier control external paging 600 ohm (duplex) interface (one zone) MOH control night relay control Older Version(s): none The PEPU is similar to the PIOU2 and PIOUS2, but supports fewer peripherals than both PCBs. PEPU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are illustrated in Figure 3-9 and described in Table 3-5. PEPU does not support the following PIOU2 and PIOUS2 options: H C ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Alarm sensor Four-zone page SMDR port Remote maintenance modem or ASCII terminal connector IMDU connection Note Refer to Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for installation of external options. PEPU2 Installation 1. Ensure the PEPU2 has been configured for the appropriate hardware options. (Refer to Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation.) 2. Insert the PEPU2 (component side facing right) into the last slot (S108) of the Base KSU/cabinet if the system has only a Base KSU/cabinet and no Expansion KSUs/ cabinets. If there are Expansion KSU/cabinets, install the PEPU2 in the highest slot number of the highest numbered KSU/cabinet. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. After installing the PEPU2, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-17 Universal Slot PCBs PEPU2 Programming Program 03: Specify Code 41 for the slot that will support a PEPU. Program 10-2: Activates External Page with All Call Page (with access code #39 only, not with All Call Page button). Program 77-1: Assigns relay control options. Program 78: Sets Night Ringing over External Page. Table 3-5 PEPU Controls, Indicators and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description External page/door lock control relay make or break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper plug P10 3-terminal jumper plug Night/hold relay make or break jumper plug. M/B make/break jumper plug P11 Backplane Connector H C SPO SW4 P10 M M SPI P11 B B VR1 1390 50-Pin Female Amphenol Connector Figure 3-9 3-18 PEPU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs PCOU - Exchange Line Interface Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: four loop start exchange line circuits Interfaces with: loop start lines Older Version(s): PCOU1 The PCOU also provides ring detection, dial outpulsing, and hold circuitry. Each PCOU line can be programmed for DTMF or dial pulse signalling. Note Toshiba strongly recommend that dial pulse signalling is not selected. PCOU PCBs are shown in Figure 3-10 and described in Table 3-6. PCOU Installation H C Excessive loudness which is caused by close proximity to a local Exchange or PBX can be fixed through the PCOU decibel (dB) PAD switches. PCOU dB switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 provide a -3 dB signal level drop between the PBX and local Exchange when set to position 3. Switches are factory-set at the 0 (0 dB signal level drop) position. See Figure 3-10 and Table 3-6 for PCOU controls, indicators, and interface connectors. ➤ To install a PCOU PCB 1. If the Strata CT system is within one mile of the PBX or local Exchange, set the PCOU dB PAD switches SW101, SW201, SW301, and SW401 to the 3 (-3 dB signal level drop) position. 2. Insert the PCOU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. After installing the PCOU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance will be felt. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-19 Universal Slot PCBs PCOU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 11 for each slot that will support a four-circuit PCOU. Note Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead. Program 10-1: Enables or disables line-to-line Conference and Direct Inward System Access (DISA). Program 15: Assigns DTMF/Dial Pulse dialling, DISA, and additional attributes to each line. Automatic Release (AR) assignments only need to be made for loop start lines. Program *15: Makes tenant assignments. Program 16: Assigns lines to line groups. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to lines (outgoing only). Program 42-0, 1~8: Assigns behind PBX operation to each line. Programs 45 ~ 48: Defines Toll Restriction for any line. Programs 50 ~ 56: Defines Least Cost Routing assignments. Program 78: Assigns special ringing of lines: includes Night Ring Over Page, DISA, Remote Maintenance via the Internal Maintenance Modem (IMDU), and Integrated Auto Attendant. Programs 81 ~ 89: H ◆ ◆ Assigns lines to ring selected stations. Assigns Delayed Ringing to any line. Program 93: Assigns names to lines. C 3-20 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs Table 3-6 PCOU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Exchange line connectors 1~4 Screw Terminals Interface connector for Exchange line circuits. Exchange line circuit 1 CD112 Red LED Lights to indicate that line circuit is in operation. Exchange line circuit 2 CD212 Exchange line indicator will not light unless PCOU is connected to an Exchange line. Exchange line circuit 3 CD312 Exchange line circuit 4 CD412 PAD switch SW101 (circuit 1) 2-position slide Enables -3dB signal level drop for Exchange switch line circuit. PAD switch SW201 (circuit 2) PAD switch SW301 (circuit 3) H PAD switch SW401 (circuit 4) Backplane Connector C SW101 3 PSTN Line LEDs SW401 3 0 SW301 3 0 PAD PAD 4 3 2 1 SW201 3 0 PAD PAD F Red LEDs 1380 Screw Terminals for Lines 1-4 Earth Screw for Signalling Figure 3-10 0 Modular Socket for Power Fail Connection PCOU Printed Circuit Board Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-21 Universal Slot PCBs RATU - Attendant Console Interface Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: four attendant console circuits Interfaces with: up to four conventional and/or PC attendant consoles Older Version(s): none RATU controls and indicators are illustrated in Figure 3-11 and described in Table 3-7. RATU Installation H 1. Insert the RATU (component side facing right) into the slot following the last station PCB. Apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors (consoles will assume the next four station port numbers). 2. After installing the RATU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. RATU Programming See Windows Operator Console Programming in Chapter 5, on Page 5-30 for programming details. Table 3-7 Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Console 1 indicator CD3 Description Lights when a PC or conventional console is not operating. The LED will turn off when the console is operational. The LED temporarily flashes when the console is first installed and the Strata CT processor and attendant console or RATI initialise. Console 2 indicator CD4 Red LED Console 3 indicator CD5 Console 4 indicator CD6 Backplane Connector 1391 C RATU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors 43 2 1 CD3 CD4 CD5 CD6 Figure 3-11 3-22 Female Amphenol Connector RATU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs PEMU - DC5 Tie Line Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: four DC5 tie line circuits Interfaces with: DC5 two wire transmission with E & M signalling. DC5 four wire transmission with E & M signalling. Older Version(s): None Each PEMU Interface decreases the maximum system exchange lines by four. (See Chapter 1 – Strata CT Configuration.). Note For the system to recognise the DTMF tones generated by incoming Tie lines a DTMF Receiver Unit (BRCS) must be installed on the Strata CTProcessor PCB(s). The Strata CT system assigns one station port and one trunk port number to each Tie Line connected. PEMU controls, indicators, and interface connectors are shown in Figure 3-12 and described in Table 3-8. H C PEMU Installation 1. Determine if the E & M tie lines will be configured for 2- or 4-wire transmission. 2. Set the 2W/4W jumper plugs P103, P203, P303, and P403 to the appropriate positions. 3. Set the FG jumper plug P3 to the “2-3” position. 4. Set all GND/BAT jumper plugs to the “BAT” position for connection to the telephone network. 5. Insert the PEMU (component side facing right) into the appropriate Expansion KSU cabinet slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. Important! 6. Each PEMU decreases the maximum system exchange lines by four each. After installing, gently pull the PEMU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-23 Universal Slot PCBs PEMU Programming Program 03: Specify Code 13 for slots that support PEMUs and make sure BRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming Tie lines to route calls to the proper telephones. Program *09: Assigns Tie Line Ringing to ACD Groups. Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference. Program 10-4: Assigns Toll Restriction (maximum number of Tie line calls dialling simultaneously). Program 10-5: Assigns privacy on Tie line transferred calls. Program 12: Assigns various timing options to the Tie lines. Program 15: Assigns tandem connections and dial pulse option to tie lines. Program 16: Assigns Tie lines to line groups. Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start to PEMU tie lines. Important! Note H Also used to turn on tie line dial tone return. When a PEMU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four consecutive Exchange line numbers. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to Tie lines (incoming and outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to Tie lines (outgoing). Programs 48 & *48: Assigns the level of Toll Restriction to the Tie Line Groups. Program *53: Assigns outgoing digit translation. Program *54: Assigns incoming digit translation. Programs 50~56: Assigns LCR, if using the network as a route option. Program 81 ~ 83: Tie to [DN] ringing assignments. Program 93: Assigns a name to a tie line C 3-24 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs Table 3-8 PEMU Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/ Connector Type of Component Tie trunk circuit 1~4 (CD102, 202, 302, and 402) Red LED Lights to indicate that tie line is in operation. E&M tie line connector J101, 201, 301,and 401 (circuit 1~4) Screw terminal Interface connector for E&M tie line circuit. FG jumper P3 3-terminal jumper Enables or disables -48V ground to FG. GND/BAT jumper P101 3-terminal jumper (tie line 1) Enables -3 dB signal level drop for line circuit. GND/BAT jumper P102 GND/BAT jumper P201 3-terminal jumper (tie line 2) GND/BAT jumper P202 GND/BAT jumper P301 3-terminal jumper (tie line 3) GND/BAT jumper P302 GND/BAT jumper P401 H Description M-lead origination for tie line (must be in BAT position per FCC requirements. 3-terminal jumper (tie line 4) GND/BAT jumper P402 2W/4W switch P103, 203, 303, and 403 (circuit 1~4) 3-terminal jumper Selects 2- or 4-wire configuration for E&M tie line circuit. Backplane Connector C 2W P403 4W 2W P303 4W P203 P103 2W 2W 4W 4W SP1020 -48 Volt Supply Ground/Battery Jumpers (Ensure set to 'GND' Position) P401 P202 P201 P402 P102 P302 P301 FG LEDs P3 P101 123 4 3 2 1 J401 J301 J201 J101 1384 Screw Terminals for Tie Lines 1-4 Figure 3-12 E4 C4 D4 M4 T4 R4 E3 M3 C3 D3 E2 T3 R3 M2 E4 M4 E3 M3 T3 T4 R4 R3 E2 M2 T & R = Transmit Pair C & D = Receive Pair C2 D2 E1 T2 R2 M1 C1 T1 D1 R1 E1 M1 T1 R1 T2 R2 4 WIRE, E & M 2 WIRE, E & M PEMU Printed Circuit Board Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-25 Universal Slot PCBs PACU - AC15 Tie Line Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: four AC15 tie lines Interfaces with: AC15 ‘type A’ circuits Older Version(s): PACU1 Each PACU Interface Unit decreases the maximum number of system exchange lines by four. Each PACU Interface Unit will support four AC15 ‘type A’ tie lines. If the system is connected to another Strata system (or any system in compliance with BTNR181, section 4) the recall feature inherent in AC15 ‘type C’ signalling which allows anti-tromboning will be available. Note For the system to recognise the DTMF tones generated by incoming TIE lines a DTMF receiver unit (BRCS) must be installed on the Strata CT Processor PCB. PACU controls, indicators and interface connectors are shown in Figure 3-13 and described in Table 3-9. H PACU Installation 1. Insert the PACU (component side facing right) into the appropriate Expansion cabinet slot and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of the connectors. Important! C 2. 3-26 Each PACU decreases the maximum system exchange lines by four. After installing, gently pull the PACU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs PACU Programming Program 03: Specify code 14 for slots that support PACUs and make sure the BRCS is enabled for DTMF operation. Program 04: Specifies [PDNs]. These are also the numbers that must be received by incoming Tie Lines to route calls to the proper telephones. Program *09: Assigns Tie Line Ringing to ACD Groups. Program 10-1: Enables/disables two-line conference. Program 10-4: Assigns Toll Restriction (maximum number of Tie line calls dialling simultaneously) Program 10-5: Assigns privacy on the tie line transferred calls. Program 12: Assigns various timing operations to the PACU. Program 15: Assigns tandem connection, exchange line signalling and recall. Program16: Assigns the tie lines to line groups. Program 17: Assigns immediate or wink start, camp on over tie lines, paging over tie lines. Important! Note H C Also used to turn on the tie line dial tone return. When a PACU is installed in a system, it automatically assumes the next four consecutive exchange line numbers. Program 39: Assigns line access buttons to digital and electronic telephones. Program 40: Assigns station access to tie lines (incoming & outgoing). Program 41: Assigns station access to the lines (outgoing). Programs 48 & *48: Assigns the level of Toll Restriction to the Tie Line Groups. Program *53: Assigns outgoing digit translation. Program *54: Assigns incoming digit translation. Programs 50~56: Assigns LCR, if using the network as a route operation. Program 81-83: Tie line ringing assignments. Program 93: Assigns a name to a tie line Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-27 Universal Slot PCBs Table 3-9 PACU controls, indicators and connectors Type of Component Control/Indicator/Connector Tie Trunk Circuit 1~4 (CD101,201, 301 and 401) PAD Jumper Wire Circuits 1~4 (W101, 201, 301 and 401) Description Red LED Lights to indicate status. LED ON = cct busy or faulty. LED OFF = cct idle or operational. White Wire Jumper Enables a -3dB receive signal lexel drop for line circuit. Backplane Connector H W401 W201 W401 W201 C 4 3 2 1 Red LEDs 1380 Screw Terminals for Tie Lines 1-4 RT4 RR4 RT3 RR3 RT2 RR2 RT1 RR1 TT4 TR4 TT3 TR3 TT2 TR2 TT1 TR1 Figure 3-13 3-28 TT & TR = Transmit Pair RT & RR = Receive pair PACU Control, Indicator and Interface Connectors Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS – RS-232/Modem Interface Unit H C System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: four interface ports Interfaces with: SMDI or Toshiba Proprietary RS-232 voice mail ACD SMIS computer SMDR printer or SMDR call accounting machine DK Admin PC or maintenance terminal (locally or remotely) Older Version(s): none The RSIU is a standard plug-in type PCB that must be installed into the first universal slot of the Strata CT base cabinet. The RSIU PCB provides one standard RS-232 port (modular jack) when ordered from the factory; this port can be configured in system programming to support any one of the hardware options listed above. The RSIU can be equipped with up to three more optional RS-232 ports (total of four RS-232 ports) or with two optional RS-232 ports and one modem port (total of three RS-232 ports and one modem port). The optional RS-232 ports are provided by installing RSIS piggy-back PCBs onto the RSIU PCB. The optional built-in modem is provided by installing an RMDS piggy-back PCB onto the RSIU (see Figure 3-14 on Page 3-31). The RSIS PCB can support any one of the hardware devices listed above via its RS-232 modular jack. The RMDS PCB can function two ways: the RMDS can operate like an RSIS allowing it to support any one of the hardware devices listed above locally from its RS-232 modular jack; or, the RMDS can operate as a 1200 bps (bits-per-second) or 2400 bps system remote maintenance modem. The RMDS PCB function (modem or RS-232 port) is set in a system program option. The RMDS can be set for one function only; it cannot support both functions simultaneously. When configured as a modem, the RMDS PCB supports only the Strata CT remote maintenance, ASCII terminal, and DK Admin functions, and does not simultaneously support SMDI, SMIS, SMDR, etc. (See Figure 4-22 on Page 4-23.) The total bits-per-second (bps) data rate of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS (RS-232/modem) ports combined cannot exceed 9600 bps. The RSIU, RSIS RS-232 ports can be individually set in system programming to operate at 1200 bps, 4 ports max.; 2400 bps, 3 ports max.; 4800 bps, 2 ports max.; or 9600 bps, 1 port max.; or, any other combination that does not exceed 9600 bps. The RMDS modem function can be set to operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps; however, if the RMDS port is used as a RS-232 port instead of a modem, it can also be set for 4800 bps or 9600 bps. The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the function of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active.The communication parameters for all RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port function types except the SMDR are: ◆ ◆ ◆ Data word bits = 7 Parity = even Stop bits = 1 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-29 Universal Slot PCBs The communication parameters for an RSIU, RSIS SMDR port is: ◆ ◆ ◆ Data word bits = 8 Parity = none Stop bits = 1 Only one RSIU can be installed per Strata CT system. When the RSIU PCB is installed, the RSSU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, IMDU modem, and PEPU PCBs can still be installed with all of their respective paging, modem, and RS-232 port functions available; however, five RS-232/ modem ports can be installed in one Strata CT system. When installed together in the same Strata CT system, the RSIU, PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU port functions are identified and enabled (turned On/Off) in system programming. If the same function is programmed for an RSIU port and a PIOU2, PIOUS2, RSSU port, only the RSIU port will function. RSIS, RMDS Piggy-Back Installation 1. Up to three RSIS PCBs can be installed on the RSIU PCB; only one RMDS PCB can be installed on the RSIU. The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of each RSIS and RMDS circuit port is set in Program 76 as described in the Programming Part that follows. H C Install all RSIS and RMDS PCBs on the RSIU PCB before installing the RSIU into the Strata CT. Each RSIS or RMDS piggy-back PCB is installed on the RSIU PCB as shown in Figure 3-14 on Page 3-31. 2. After installing all RSIS, RMDS PCBs, install the RSIU into the Strata CT per the following instructions. RSIU Installation 1. The RSIU must be installed only in slot 11 of the base cabinet (see Figure 3-14 to install the RSIU PCB). 2. A PDKU or PEKU PCB must be installed in slot 12 of the base cabinet to support the programming telephone. 3. The first 8-station ports (000-007) appear on the PDKU or PEKU as installed in slot 12. The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013 until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12. The function and bit-per-second (bps) data rate of the RSIU or RMDS, RS-232 circuit port is set in Program 76 as described in the Strata CT Programming Manual. All information provided in the “RSIU Installation” on Page 3-30 applies to installing an RSIU in an existing system. Hence, most PCBs must be moved to the next highest slot. 3-30 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs Each position on the RSIU card can accept either an RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) card. Only one RMDS card can be used per RSIU. (See Note 1) 1 UP 17 J2 J3 J4 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P4 Port #1 3-Pair Modular Jack 1 Port #2 3-Pair Modular Jack UP J1 P5 J1 P3 17 1 UP 17 J2 1 RSIU1 Port #3 3-Pair Modular Jack 17 1 J3 J4 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P7 UP J1 1 H 17 1 UP 17 J2 J4 1 Port #4 3-Pair Modular Jack 17 P8 J3 RSIS or RMDS (Note 1) P2 UP P11 J1 17 1 17 Bottom View (solder side) P9 C RSIU1A V.1 RMDS Top View RSIS Top View 17 RSIS1A J3 J1 17 J3 J1 J4 CAUTION: 1 1 1 1 RMDS1A J4 Do not connect telephone circuit Tip/Ring to J4 (See Note 2) J2 J2 1 17 17 17 17 1 1814 Notes 1. Maximum of one RMDS per RSIU, maximum of three RSIS per RSIU. 2. If RMDS is not used for modem operation, then it can be used when RMDS is confiqured for TTY, SMDI, SMDR, or MIS operation like RSIS. Figure 3-14 RSIU, RSIS, RMDS PCB Installation Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-31 Universal Slot PCBs Strata CT Base Cabinet with B1CU Strata CT Base Cabinet with B2CA/CB, B3CA/CB, B5CA/CB Port 1 Port 1 Port 2 Port 2 Ribbon Cable 2-connector Ribbon Cable (supplied with RCTU) Install ribbon cables as shown Ribbon Cable Port 3 Port 3 Install ribbon cables as shown 3-connector Ribbon Cable (supplied with RSIU) Port 4 Port 4 SLOT R11 RCTU S11 RSIU PCB TYPE B2CA/CB B3CA/CB B5CA/CB RSIS or RMDS S12 S13 PDKU or PEKU SLOT R11 RCTU B1CA PCB TYPE S11 RSIU RSIS or RMDS S12 S13 PDKU or PEKU 1815 H➤ Figure 3-15 To move the PCB to the next highest slot 1. C RSIU Installed into an Existing System Identify (mark) the attendant console and all station PCB wiring connectors so they can be removed and then reinstalled on the same PCB later (console station PCBs include: PDKU, PEKU, RSTU, PSTU and RATU PCBs). 2. Turn system power Off. 3. Disconnect the connectors from the attendant console and all station PCBs listed in Step 1. 4. Remove all station PCBs listed in Step 1. 5. Install each PCB that was removed in Step 4 into the next highest empty station PCB slot number. Skip over all other types of PCBs that were not removed. Example: If a PDKU was originally in slot 11 and a PSTU was in slot 12, the PDKU is moved to slot 12 and the PSTU is moved to slot 13. The programming telephone will then be on the 6th circuit (port 005; or, 013 until Program 03 Code 49 is set for slot 11) of the PDKU in slot 12. 6. Connect all PCB connectors that were removed back into the same PCBs they were removed from in Step 3. 7. Turn the system power On and note that the programming telephone is on port 13 and all other ports are shifted up by eight ports. Program slot 11 with Code 49 and all other slots with the appropriate codes using Program 91-1 and/or 03. Next, cycle system power Off (five seconds) and On, or, run Program 91-2 to transfer Program 03 data from temporary to working memory. At this time the programming telephone changes from port 13 to port 005 and all other ports shift down by eight ports. 3-32 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs RSIU, RSIS, RMDS Programming Program 03: Programs slot 11 with code 49 to identify that the RSIU PCB is installed in slot 11. Program 76-1X-Y: Assigns each installed RSIU port to a function. Where X identifies the RSIU port no. 1~4 (see Figure 3-14 for RSIU port number configuration) and Y identifies the RSIU port function: ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Y=1, RS-232 TTY (Program 77-1, LED 14 Off) Y=1, RMDS modem (Program 77-1, LED14 On) Y=2, SMDR Y=3, MIS or SMIS Y=4, SMDI Y=5, Open Architecture Y=0, No function - this should be used for any of the four RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports that are not used. Notes H C ● Function codes set in Program 76-1X-Y will override RSSU, PIOU2, and/or PIOUS2 function codes (41, 42, 43) set in Program 03. ● The TTY and modem function cannot operate on separate RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports simultaneously. If both functions are programmed at the same time on separate ports, the function of the lowest numbered RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port (TTY or modem) will be active. ● When uploading Program 76-1 with DK Admin, the data will not change until the system power is cycled. Program 76-2X-Z: Assigns each installed RSIU port to operate at a specified transmission rate. Where X identifies the RSIU port no. 1~4 (see Figure 3-14 for RSIU port number configuration) and Z identifies the RSIU, RSIS, RMDS port transmission rate in bits-persecond (bps). Notes ● The sum of the used RSIU, RSIS, RMDS ports transmission rates cannot exceed 9600 bps. Ports assigned as “non-function” (code 0) in Program 76-2X-Y will not be included in the transmission rate sum. The RMDS will only function at 1200 or 2400 bps. ● When uploading Program 76-2 with DK Admin make sure that Program 76-2 bps rate for the TTY/ modem port is set the same in: DK Admin communications setup, DK Admin customer database, and any Strata CT RCTU. If the bps rate is not the same in all three areas, uploading will fail on Program 76 Program 77-1, LED 14: Enables the RMDS modem function. If the RMDS should function as a modem, turn On LED 14. If the RMDS should function as a RS-232 port, turn Off LED 14. Program 77-1, LED 15: Sets the RMDS communications standard type to CCITT/V.22bis (2400 bps) or Bell 212A (1200 bps). The standard set in this program must match the standard of the modem communicating with the Strata CT RMDS. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-33 Universal Slot PCBs If the RMDS modem standard should be CCITT/V.22bis, turn LED 15 On. If the RMDS standard should be Bell 212A, turn LED 15 Off. Most Hayes compatible modems will function with either standard. Check with the modem manufacturer’s documentation to verify which protocol should be used. When the system is initialised the Bell 212A standard is set (LED 15 Off). Program 77-4, LED 01/LED 02: Enables CLI and/or DDI information for ACD calls to be sent from the RSIU OA port. ➤ ➤ Turn LED 01 On if the OA port should send CLI information for ACD calls. Turn LED 02 On if the OA port should send DDI information for ACD calls. Program 77-4 allows LED 01 and LED 02 to be turned On simultaneously, allowing CLI and DDI information to be sent from the OA port for ACD calls. The system will initialise with LED 01 and 02 Off—no CLI or DDI information will be sent from the OA port for ACD calls. H C 3-34 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs PSTU & RSTU – Standard Telephone Interface Unit C Strata CT Circuits per PCB: eight standard telephone circuits Interfaces with: standard telephones voice mail ports off-premises stations other similar devices alternate BGM source (circuit 2 only) auto attendant digital announcer message waiting lamp (RSTU2 only) Older Version(s): PSTU–190V P-P or 130V P-P W1 jumper Only one telephone (or device) can be connected to a PSTU/RSTU port. If more than one telephone or device is connected to a port, ringing or message waiting may not function. Only the RSTU3 provides a 90-volt square wave message waiting generator to drive standard telephone 90V message waiting lamps. Notes ● For the system to recognise the DTMF tones generated by a standard telephone (or any other device connected to a standard telephone port), a DTMF Receiver Unit (RRCS-4, -8, or -12) must be installed on the Strata CT BCU. ● Most standard telephones and two-wire devices require the 190V P-P level; however, some devices may experience ring-trip with 190V P-P and should be set for 130V P-P. See Figure 3-17 for an illustration of the PSTU2. Figure 3-18 shows the RSTU3. See Table 3-10, for details of the PSTU and RSTU controls and indicators. R48S -48 Volt Supply Installation (Internal Option) ➤ Note Mate the R48S connectors P6 and P7 (Figure 3-16 and Figure 3-18) with the R48S connectors P6 and P7 on the RSTU2 or RSTU3. RSTU connectors P6 and P7 are positioned so that the R48S only fits in the proper position. P7 P6 Figure 3-16 1374 H System: R48S Interface Connectors Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-35 Universal Slot PCBs External Options W1 Ring Generator Switch Configuration (PSTU2) ➤ On the PSTU, ensure the W1 switch is set to the “H” (190V P-P) position for initial installation. The “L” (130V P-P) position is used if devices connected to the PSTU2 experience ring trip. Standard Telephone Message Waiting Lamp Control No steps required here. Note Only the RSTU3 will support this feature. RSTU2/RSTU3 Installation 1. WARNING! H C Make sure the factory-installed SSTS or SSTU subunit is securely attached to the PSTU/RSTU (Figure 3-17 and Figure 3-18). Table 3-10 The shield on the back of the RSTU is designed to protect the installer from potentially hazardous ring voltage. Do NOT remove this shield. 2. Insert the PSTU/RSTU3 (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot, and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper mating of connectors. 3. After installing the PSTU/RSTU, gently pull the PSTU/RSTU outward. If the connectors are properly mated, a light resistance is felt. RSTU2/RSTU3 Controls, Indicators, and Connectors Control/Indicator/Connector Type of Component Description Ring voltage W1 jumper (PSTU1 (V.4) and PSTU2 only) 3-terminal jumper Sets ring generator voltage level for all circuits. H=190V P-P, L=130V P-P. R48S connector P6 (RSTU or RSTU2 only) 9-pin connector Interface connector to P6 of R48S. R48S connector P7 (RSTU or RSTU2 only) 6-pin connector Interface connector to P7 of R48S. 3-36 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCBs Backplane Connector W1 Ring Voltage H = 190V P-P L = 130V P-P (PSTU2 only) SSTU Subunit W1 H L 1375 H 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Figure 3-17 PSTU and Subunit (SSTU) SSTU Subunit Backplane Connector C P6 R48S Installed on RSTU2 P7 UP R48S RSTU2 1376 50-Pin Amphenol Connector (Female) Figure 3-18 Optional RSTU2/RSTU3 Controls and Interface Connectors Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 3-37 Universal Slot PCBs PSTU/RSTU Programming Program 03: Specify code 31 for all slots that have RSTUs and PSTUs installed. Note If there are no RSTU or PSTU options, Program 03 can be skipped, and Program 91-1 or 91-9 can be run instead. Program 10-2: Sets standard telephone ringing option. Program 19: Used for BGM connection. Programs 10-3, 23, 24, 25, 26: Integrated Auto Attendant Digital Announcer assignments. Program 31: Configures all RSTU and PSTU ports connected to voice mail or external Auto attendant devices. Program *34, LED 01: Standard telephone Camp-on/Busy Override tone option. Program 35, LED 03: Standard telephone message waiting lamp control option. (RSTU3 0nly) H C 3-38 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Universal Slot PCB Wiring 4 This chapter contains point-to-point wiring diagrams for connection of telephones, lines, peripheral equipment, and power supplies for the universal slot PCBs of the Strata CT system. Wiring diagrams are divided into groups according to the PCB which provides the interface for, or controls the operation of, the associated equipment, as listed below: ◆ Station Wiring: ◆ Digital Stations H C ◆ Electronic Stations ◆ Attendant Consoles ◆ Analogue Stations ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Power Failure Cut-through (DPFT) Pin-outs Exchange Line Wiring Tie Line Wiring Option Interface PCBs Note Before using the Connect Record Sheets (following each Wiring Diagram), make copies for future use. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-1 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Station Wiring Diagrams Digital Station Wiring 25-Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector To PDKU W/Female Connector H C W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling KRONE 237A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) A2 B2 PA2 PB2 A3 B3 PA3 PB3 A4 B4 PA4 PB4 A5 B5 PA5 PB5 A6 B6 PA6 PB6 A7 B7 PA7 PB7 (-) (GND) (-) (GND) A1 (Voice/Data) B1 (Voice/Data) PA1 (Add, Power) PB1 (Add. Power) Jacketed Twisted Pairs CW1308 0.5mm Circuit 2 to DKT 2 Circuit 3 to DKT 3 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 to DKT 4 BS6312 2 3 4 5 PB Circuit 5 to DKT 5 or DDCB AB PA Modular Cord DB25 Female Connector To Personal Computer RS-232 Cable Circuit 6 to DKT 6 Digital Telephone (with or without PCIU) Circuit 7 to DKT 7 A8 (Voice/Data) B8 (Voice/Data) PA (Add Power) PB (Add Power) (See Note 1) Not Used 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 PB AB BS6312 PA Modular Cord DDSS Console (Circuit 8 Only) or... Digital Telephone (DKT 8) 1 A/B wires are always required; PA/PB are additional power wires required only for long station runs per. PA/PB may be used with normal station runs also. 2 Voltage levels: A, PA = 26.3~27.8 VDC B, PB = 0.0 VDC (GND). Reference to SG ground. Figure 4-1 4-2 MDF Wiring for Digital Telephones (DKTs) with or without PCIU and DDSS Console to PDKU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring To PDKU With Female Connector H 25 Pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector W-BL C 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 Circuit 1 2 1 L1 L2 Not Used Circuit 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 Door Phone A MDFB (Rear View) 3 4 DDCB Circuit 3 Door Phone MDFB Modular Cord Circuit 4 - A5 (Voice/Data) (GND) B5 (Voice/Data) PA PB AB C HKSU 2-pair Modular Cords Circuit 6 MDFB Door Phone B or Door Lock Control Circuit 7 Circuit 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 BS6312 MDFB Door Phone C Modular Cord See Note 1 MDFB (Door Phone) Station #s Not Used See Note 2 Port # A B C 43 004 #151 #152 #153 44 44 012 #154 #155 #156 45 45 46 46 020 #157 #158 #159 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 1596 Figure 4-2 Screw Terminals KRONE 237A Notes 028 #161 #162 #163 1. DDCB "B" output options: • SW1: Always in DOOR position. • SW2: DOOR position; "B" connects to door phone LOCK position; "B" connects to door lock 2. Door phones may only be connected to circuit 5 on ports 04, 012, 020, and 028 only. MDF Wiring-DDCB/Door Phone/Lock to PDKU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-3 Universal Slot PCB Wiring MDF Block Number H C KSU Slot Number Colour Code Designation W-Bl A Bl-W B W-O PWR-A O-W PWR-B W-G A G-W B W-Br PWR-A Br-W PWR-B W-S A S-W B R-Bl PWR-A Bl-R PWR-B R-O A O-R B R-G PWR-A G-R PWR-B R-Br A Br-R B R-S PWR-A S-R PWR-B Bk-Bl A Bl-Bk B Bk-O PWR-A O-Bk PWR-B Bk-G A G-Bk B Bk-Br PWR-A Br-Bk PWR-B Bk-S A S-Bk B Y-Bl PWR-A Bl-Y PWR-B CCT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Location 1 2 3 4 51 6 7 8 1. DDCBs connect only to Circuit 5, Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028. Note Figure 4-3 4-4 Indicate if digital telephone (with or without PCIU), DSS console (number 1~3), or DDCB is connected. PDKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Electronic Station Wiring Diagrams To PEKU w/Female Connector H C 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Station Cabling KRONE 237A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Jacketed Twisted Pairs CW1308 0.5mm Voice A1 (VA) Voice B1 (VB) Data A1 (DA) Data B1 (DB) VA VB DA Circuit 2 DB VA VB DA Circuit 3 DB OCAT VA VB DA OCAR 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 4 DB 1 2 3 4 5 6 VA VB DA BS6312 Circuit 5 DB Modular Cord VA VB DA Station Circuit 6 DB VA VB DA Circuit 7 DB VA VB DA Electronic Telephone Circuit 8 DB Only if Electronic Telephone Receives "Off-Hook" Calls OCA T1 (OA) OCA R1 (OB) OA OB Circuit 2 OA OB Circuit 3 OB Notes • To receive OCA, the 6500-series electronic telephone must have an HVSU2 or the combined HVSI and HVSU installed. Circuit 5 • Program 31, button/LED 03 must be ON for electronic telephone to receive OCA. Circuit 6 • An HHEU must be installed inside 6500-series electronic telephones for headset or HESB, Loud Ringing Bell option. OA Circuit 4 OA OB OA OB OA OB Circuit 7 OA OB Circuit 8 Not Used 1578 Figure 4-4 MDF Wiring/Electronic Telephone to PEKU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-5 Universal Slot PCB Wiring 25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector To PEKU w/Female Connector H C W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 DSS EKT SW1 Figure 4-5 4-6 KRONE 237A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Voice A1 Voice B1 Data A1 Data B1 Circuit 2 Jacketed Station Cable Twisted Pair CW1308 0.5mm Circuit 3 Y X To OCA A1 Circuit 4 To OCA B1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 BS6312 Circuit 5 Modular Cord Station Circuit 6 Electronic Telephone Associated with HDSS Voice Pair - Not Used Circuit 7 Data A7 Data B7 Voice Pair - Not Used Circuit 8 Data A8 Data B8 OCA A1 X OCA B1 Y Circuit 2 Circuit 3 Circuit 4 Circuit 5 Circuit 6 Only if Electronic Telephone Receives Off-Hook Calls 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuits 7 & 8 A/B pair order must be wired as shown. 2 3 4 5 Modular Cord Circuit 7 Circuit 8 Not Used Notes • Place PEKU SW1 to HDSS. • All cable CW1308 0.5mm (303m maximum). • See Program 29 to assign HDSS feature buttons. • See Program 28 for telephone to HDSS assignments. DSS Console 1579 MDF Wiring/HDSS Console and Associated EKT to PEKU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring To PEKU w/Female Connector H C 25 Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 Screw Terminals LJU Slave KRONE 237A Circuit 1 2 1 L1 L2 Not Used Circuit 2 6 5 4 3 2 1 Door Phone A MDFB (Rear View) 3 4 Circuit 3 HDCB BS6312 Modular Cord Circuit 4 Voice A5 Voice B5 Data A5 Data B5 Door Phone MDFB A B C HKSU See Note 1 VA VB DB 2-Pair Modular Cords DA Circuit 6 MDFB Door Phone B Circuit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Circuit 8 LJU Slave 2 3 4 5 BS6312 Modular Cord MDFB Door Phone C See Note 1 See Note 2 MDFB (Door Phone) Station #s Not Used See Note 3 Notes 1. 2. On PEKU, cut W9. See Programs 39, 77-1, 77-2, and 79. HDCB "B" output options: Port # A B C 004 #151 #152 #153 012 #154 #155 #156 020 #157 #158 #159 028 #161 #162 #163 SW1: Always in DOOR position. SW2: DOOR position; B connects to door phone Door Lock option only available on DDCB Unit. 50 3. Door phones may be connected to Circuit 5 on Ports 004, 012, 020, and 028 only. 1580 Figure 4-6 MDF Wiring-HDCB/Door Phone to PEKU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-7 Universal Slot PCB Wiring MDF Block Number H C Colour Code Designation W-Bl VT Bl-W VR W-O DT O-W DR W-G VT G-W VR W-Br DT Br-W DR W-S VT S-W VR R-Bl DT Bl-R DR R-O VT O-R VR R-G DT G-R DR R-Br VT Br-R VR R-S DT S-R DR Bk-Bl VT Bl-Bk VR Bk-O DT O-Bk DR Bk-G VT G-Bk VR Bk-Br DT Br-Bk DR Bk-S VT S-Bk VR Y-Bl DT Bl-Y DR KSU Slot Number CKT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/ Electronic Telephone Location 1 2 3 4 5 See Note 1. 6 7 See Note 2. 8 See Note 2. 1. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDCB (allowed HDCB port numbers: 004, 012, 020, 028). 2. Indicate if electronic telephone or HDSS Console number (1~8). Figure 4-7 4-8 PEKU Station MDF Cross Connect Record Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Attendant Console Wiring Diagrams To RTAU PCB W/Female Connector H C 25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 PC Attendant Console Cabling3 Bridging Clips 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 (-) A1 (Voice/Data) (GND) B1 (Voice/Data) (-) (GND) PA2 A2 B2 PC Attendant PA2 Console #2 PB2 A3 B3 PC Attendant PA3 Console #3 PB3 A4 B4 PC Attendant PA4 Console #4 PB4 Jacketed Twisted Pairs CW1308 0.5mm (2 Pair, See Note 1) LJU Slave 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 PB AB BS6312 PA Customer Supplied Personal Computer Attendant Console 1-pair Modular Cord TO PC COM PORT Customer supplied 9-pin RS232 9 ft max (female DB9 connectors on each end) Handset RATHC Headset To AC 2 Outlet 150~200 W 2-pair modular cord (RJ11 plugs on each end) 2-pair Modular 8-pair modular cord (RJ45 plugs on each end) RATI (Rear Connections) 4 (–22 dBv Output) (–25 ~ –30 dBv Audio Input – Future Use) Audio Plugs REC AUX OUT IN RJ11 RJ45 DB9 (Female) Notes 1. RATI is wired with 1-pair wiring - maximum distance from KSU (RTAU PCB) is 303 m (1,000 feet). 2. Personal Computer Attendant Console requireS local AC power. 3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: • Cable splits (single or double) • Cable bridges (of any length) • High resistance or faulty cable splices 4. To tape recorder “REC” input. 5. Audio input is for future use. 1607 Figure 4-8 MDF Wiring FOR RATU/ PC Attendant Console Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-9 Universal Slot PCB Wiring To RTAU PCB W/Female Connector KRONE 237A H 25-pair Cable W/Male Amp Connector W-BL C 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 Figure 4-9 4-10 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Console Cabling3 (-) A1 (Voice/Data) (GND) B1 (Voice/Data) (-) PA1 (GND) PB1 A2 B2 Attendant PA2 Console #2 PB2 A3 B3 Attendant PA3 Console #3 PB3 A4 B4 Attendant PA4 Console #4 PB4 Jacketed Twisted Pairs CW1308 0.5mm (2-pair, See Note 1) A1 B1 PA1 PB1 LJU Slave 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 5 PR TR BS6312 PT 2-pair Modular Cord 9-wire Cable W/DB-9 Male Plug Not Used EGA Color Monitor Modular Plug RJ11 Modular Jack DB-9 Female Jack RS-232C Connector (Not Used) 3-Prong AC Plug To 240VAC2 ATTENDANT CONSOLE #1 Notes 1. Console must be wired with 2-pair wiring - maximum distance from KSU (RATU PCB) is 303 m (1,000 feet). 2. EGA monitor will require local AC power. 3. Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: • Cable splits (single or double) • Cable bridges (of any length) • High resistance or faulty cable splices 1606 Attendant Console MDF Wiring Diagram Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Analogue Devices Wiring To PSTU or RSTU w/Female Connector H C 25-Pair Cable w/Male amp Connector W-BL 26 BL-W 1 W-O 27 O-W 2 W-GN 28 GN-W 3 W-BR 29 BR-W 4 W-S 30 S-W 5 R-BL 31 BL-R 6 R-O 32 O-R 7 R-GN 33 GN-R 8 R-BR 34 BR-R 9 R-S 35 S-R 10 BK-BL 36 BL-BK 11 BK-O 37 O-BK 12 BK-GN 38 GN-BK 13 BK-BR 39 BR-BK 14 BK-S 40 S-BK 15 Y-BL 41 BL-Y 16 Y-O 42 O-Y 17 Y-GN 43 GN-Y 18 Y-BR 44 BR-Y 19 Y-S 45 S-Y 20 V-BL 46 BL-V 21 V-O 47 O-V 22 V-GN 48 GN-V 23 V-BR 49 BR-V 24 V-S 50 S-V 25 KRONE 237A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 Jacketed Twisted Station Cable (CW1308 0.5mm) A1 B1 Not Used A2 (Note 1) B2 Not Used A3 B3 Not Used A4 B4 6 5 4 3 2 1 Not Used 1 2 3 4 5 6 A5 B5 Not Used Modular Cord A6 B6 A B Not Used Standard Telephone, Voice Mail Port, ACD/Auto Attendant Digital Announcer, or Similar Device A7 B7 Not Used A8 B8 Notes • An alternate BGM source can be connected to Circuit 2 of RSTU or PSTU. An isolation transformer may be required when connecting BGM to RSTU or PSTU (see Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation, Alternate BGM Source to RSTU/PSTU). • Two ringers maximum. Not Used DPFT Power Failure Transfer Box (J1) DG (J1, 50) -24 Volts (J1, 25) DG -24V 1583 Figure 4-10 MDF Wiring/Standard Telephone, Voice Mail, DPFT to RSTU2/RSTU3/PSTU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-11 Universal Slot PCB Wiring MDF Block Number H C KSU Slot Number Colour Code Designation W-Bl A Bl-W B W-O Not Used O-W Not Used W-G A G-W B W-Br Not Used Br-W Not Used W-S A S-W B R-Bl Not Used Bl-R Not Used R-O A O-R B R-G Not Used G-R Not Used R-Br A Br-R B R-S Not Used S-R Not Used Bk-Bl A Bl-Bk B Bk-O Not Used O-Bk Not Used Bk-G A G-Bk B Bk-Br Not Used Br-Bk Not Used Bk-S A S-Bk B Y-Bl Not Used Bl-Y Not Used Note Figure 4-11 4-12 CCT Number Port Number Intercom Number Device/Standard Telephone/ Electronic Telephone Location 1 See Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Indicate if standard telephone, voice mail port, etc. RSTU/RSTU2/RSTU3/PSTU/PSTU2 Station MDF Cross Connect Record Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Power Failure Cut Through (DPFT) Wiring Pin-outs H C Pair 1t R 2T R 3T R 4T R 5T R 6T R 7T R 8T R 9T R 10T R 11T R 12T R 13T R 14T R 15T R 16T R 17T R 18T R 19T R 20T R 21T R 22T R 23T R 24T R 25T R Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 Colour Code W-BI BI-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-BI BI-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-BI BI-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y Y-O O-Y Y-G G-Y Y-Br Br-Y Y-S S-Y V-Bl Bl-V V-O O-V V-G G-V V-Br Br-V V-S S-V Figure 4-12 Lead Designation A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Function A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU B-RSTU/PSTU A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU B-RSTU/PSTU A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU/ B-RSTU/PSTU A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU B-RSTU/PSTU A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU B-RSTU/PSTU A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU B-RSTU/PSTU A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU B-RSTU/PSTU A-TEL B-TEL A-RSTU/PSTU B-RSTU/PSTU PSTU/RSTU/KSTU PCB Position #1 #1 #1 #1 #2 #2 #2 #2 #3 #3 #3 #3 #4 #4 #4 #4 #5 #5 #5 #5 #6 #6 #6 #6 #7 #7 #7 #7 #8 #8 #8 #8 DPFT Connector J2/Terminal Sequence & Designations/Station Line Connection Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-13 Universal Slot PCB Wiring H C Pair 1t R 2T R 3T R 4T R 5T R 6T R 7T R 8T R 9T R 10T R 11T R 12T R 13T R 14T R 15T R 16T R 17T R 18T R 19T R 20T R 21T R 22T R 23T R 24T R 25T R Pin 26 1 27 2 28 3 29 4 30 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 34 9 35 10 36 11 37 12 38 13 39 14 40 15 41 16 42 17 43 18 44 19 45 20 46 21 47 22 48 23 49 24 50 25 Colour Code W-BI BI-W W-O O-W W-G G-W W-Br Br-W W-S S-W R-BI BI-R R-O O-R R-G G-R R-Br Br-R R-S S-R Bk-BI BI-Bk Bk-O O-Bk Bk-G G-Bk Bk-Br Br-Bk Bk-S S-Bk Y-Bl Bl-Y Y-O O-Y Y-G G-Y Y-Br Br-Y Y-S S-Y V-Bl Bl-V V-O O-V V-G G-V V-Br Br-V V-S S-V Figure 4-13 4-14 Lead Designation A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare Spare PFT DG PFT -24V Function A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU A-Exchange line B-Exchange line A-PCOU B-PCOU PFT GROUND (INPUT) PFT -24V (INPUT) PCOU/TCOU PCB Position #1 #1 #1 #1 #2 #2 #2 #2 #3 #3 #3 #3 #4 #4 #4 #4 #5 #5 #5 #5 #6 #6 #6 #6 #7 #7 #7 #7 #8 #8 #8 #8 RSTU/PSTU/PIN50 RSTU/PSTU/PIN25 DPFT Connector J1/Terminal Sequence & Designations/Exchange Line Connection & DPFT Control Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Exchange Line Wiring Diagrams To Network A1 B1 A2 B2 A3 B3 A4 B4 H C KRONE 237A A1 B1 A2 B2 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 Line 3 16 16 Line 2 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 PCOU Line LEDs #4 #3 #2 #1 Signal Ground (only required for Earth Recall in piggyback application) Line 4 Line 1 CO1 Modular Socket for Power Fail Connection Pins 2 & 4 provide 24 VDC (2 = -24 & 4 = GRD) 6-1 B A 4 3 6-1 PFT PCOU Only Power Failure Standard Telephone 1586 Figure 4-14 MDF Wiring/Exchange Lines to PCOU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-15 Universal Slot PCB Wiring To Network T1 R1 E1 M1 H C KRONE 237A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 T1 R1 E1 M1 PEMU 2-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 M1 E1 T1 R1 2 WIRE CT Wire Pair Functions CT, Transmit T1 CT, Receive R1 Signalling E1, M1 50 1587 Figure 4-15 4-16 MDF Wiring/2-Wire Tie Line to PEMU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring To Network T1 R1 C1 D1 E1 M1 H C KRONE 237A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 T1 R1 C1 D1 E1 M1 PEMU 4-Wire #4 #3 #2 #1 M1 E1 C1 D1 36 36 T1 37 37 E1 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 4 WIRE CT Wire Pair Functions CT, Transmit T1, R1 CT, Receive C1, D1 Signalling E1, M1 50 1588 Figure 4-16 MDF Wiring/4-Wire Tie Line to PEMU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-17 Universal Slot PCB Wiring To Network TR1 TT1 RR1 RT1 KRONE 237A 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 H C TR1 TT1 RR1 RT1 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 PACU #4 #3 #2 #1 TT1 TR1 RT1 RR1 CT Wire Pair Functions CT, Transmit TT1, TR1 CT, Receive RT1, RR1 49 50 50 1589 Figure 4-17 4-18 MDF Wiring AC15 Tie Lines to PACU Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring Option Interface PCB Wiring Diagrams PIOU 25 PR Connectors PIOU/PEPU PCB PIN Multi-zone Page 30W max./Composite Impedance 300 OHMS COLOUR PG.OUT 1 PG.IN 1 15 40 . . S-Bk Bk-S Zone A or E PG.OUT 2 PG.IN 2 17 42 . . O-Y Y-O Zone B or F PG.OUT 3 PG.IN 3 19 44 . . Br-Y Y-Br Zone C or G 21 46 . . Bl-V V-Bl Zone D or H 32 7 . . R-O O-R 38 . Bk-Gn 13 . Gn-Bk SP.T1 50 25 . . V-S 3 WATT SP.R1 PG. Common 23 . Gn-V ALM.T ALM.R 36 11 . . Bk-Bl Bl-Bk PIOU Only PG.OUT 4 PG.IN 4 All Zone Page (#39) Select Relay Function with Program 77-1 Door Lock or Amp. Control H Break SP.T0 600Ω (Duplex) SP.R0 SW4 SP0 C DE.T DE. R P10 Door Lock Control Make SP1 Page or BGM from CT KSU 8W VR1 (PIOU Only) N.C. P12 N.O. Break Alarm Sensor Mute Amplifier Multi-zone 8Ω S-V Speaker Alarm Sensor AMP Tape Player P11 NH.T NH.R 34 9 . . R-Br Br-R Control External Background Music Source Make 1589 CT I&M Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Night Relay or MOH Control Note Figure 4-18 MDF Connections All wires should be jacketed CW1308 0.5mm twisted pairs Night Bell To Music On-Hold Input on PCTU PCB P6 Connector. Refer to Strata CT Programming Manual for paging zone access codes. MDF Wiring/PIOU or PEPU Peripherals (25-pair) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-19 Universal Slot PCB Wiring TTY-PC-Cable or PPTC1A-5M Programmable RS-232 Port SMSG SMCD SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD The TTY-PC-Cable or PPTC1A-5M connects to: Call Accounting Device or Printer TTY (6-pin Modular Jack) 6-1 TYSG TYCD TYDTR TYDSR TYTD TYRD PIOU Card 6-1 The TTY-PC-Cable or PPTC1A-5M connects to any one of these devices: MIS Device DKAdmin PC COM Port External RM Modem VM SMDI Port SMIS PC COM Port OAI PC COM Port SMDR (6-pin Modular Jack) 6 1 6 1 Station Message Detail Recording RS-232 Port TTY-PC-Cable or PPTC1A-5M SW2 LED CD4 Notes • PIOU option settings: SW1 — Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. H C Pin No. TTY SMDR 1 TYRD SMRD 2 TYTD SMTD SW3 — Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack. — For IMDU operation. MODEM — For ASCII terminal or TTY external modem. 3 TYDSR SMDSR 4 TYDTR SMDTR 5 TYCD SMCD 6 TYSG SMSG See PIOU/MDF Drawing in this Section 2377 Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification. This must be CCITT for UK operation. Figure 4-19 4-20 PIOU Modular Pin Out SW2 — Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack). LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set IN. LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set OUT. W4 — (25-pair Female Amp. Jack) PIOU/TTY and SMDR Wiring (with PPTC Adapter) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring KSU Backplane TBI MDF SPT Page and BGM 600 SPR Break DER K1 Break DE Door Lock Control NH MOH Source Unit NHT W2 Make K2 Mute Control DET W1 Make HESB or Page Amplifier NHR Night Bell Normal Open ALMT H Alarm Sensor W3 ALM Facility Alarm Unit ALMR Normal Close C PIOUS Relay Options: • K1 (DE): Door Lock or Amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07 • K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05 • K1 & K2: 24 VDC, 1 AMP Maximum Notes • • All wiring connections must be CW1308 0.5 twisted pairs. Dotted lines show optional connections; only one optional connection is allowed. 1591 Figure 4-20 PIOUS Page/Relay/Alarm Connections Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-21 Universal Slot PCB Wiring TTY-PC- Cable or PPTC!A-5M TTY (6-Pin Modular Jack) 6-1 TYSG TYCD TYDTR TYDSR TYTD TYRD SMSG SMCD SMDTR SMDSR SMTD SMRD The TTY-PC-Cable or PPTC1A-5M connects to: Call Accounting Device or Printer PIOUS CARD Programmable RS-232 Port 6-1 The TTY-PC-Cable or PPTC1A-5M connects to any one of these devices: MIS Device DKAdmin PC COM Port External RM Modem VM SMDI Port SMIS PC COM Port OAI PC COM Port SMDR (6-Pin Modular Jack) 6 1 6 1 Station Message Detail Recording RS-232 Port TTY-PC- Cable or PPTC!A-5M SW2 LED CD4 TB1 to MDF: 600 OHM Page H Door Lock/ Amp, Mute Notes • PIOU option settings: Pin No. TTY SMDR Night Relay/ MOH Control SW2 — Sets the PIOU programming speed to be 300 or 1200 BPS (for IMDU or TTY jack). 1 TYRD SMRD Alarm 2 TYTD SMTD LED CO4 ON = 300 BPS/SW2 set “In”. LED CO4 OFF = 1200 BPS/SW2 set “Out”. 3 TYDSR SMDSR 4 TYDTR SMDTR 5 TYCD SMCD 6 TYSG SMSG SW1 — Sets the SMDR baud rate to be 300 or 1200 BPS. SW3 — Sets the PIOU to operate with the IMDU or an external device connected to the TTY modular jack. MODEM — For IMDU operation. — For ASCII terminal or TTY external modem. C W4 — PIOUS Modular Pin Out Sets the IMDU and TTY jack for bell or CCITT specification. This must be CCITT for UK operation 2376 Figure 4-21 4-22 PIOUS SMDR/TTY Options and Wiring (with PPTC Adapter) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Universal Slot PCB Wiring RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Modular Jack 6-wire Modular Cord - telephone type (modular jack locking tabs on the same side of each cord). Toshiba PPTC PC COM Port RSIU (plug-in motherboard) Port 1 H C RSIS (piggy-back)1 serial interface subassemly Port 2 RSIS (piggy-back)1 serial interface subassemly Port 3 RMDS or RSIS (piggy-back)1 (2400 bps modem or serial interface)3 Port 4 MIS2 SMDI2 SMDR2 TTY2 Notes 1. The RSIU can be configured with up to three RSIS, or two RSIS and one RMDS (in any position). Use Program 76 to set RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port types. 2. All RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports are system programmable to allow up to four of any of the functions: SMDR, MIS, SMDI, TTY, and remote modem. 3. When the RMDS is used as a modem, the modular jack is not used. If the RMDS is used as an RS-232 interface port, the modular jack is used. ACD/MIS PC Stratagy Voice Mail System Station Message Detail Report DKAdmin CAUTION! Do not plug Exchange line or RSTU tip/ring into RMDS or RSIU modular jack RSIU DKAdmin Remote Exchange Modem Line Telephone Network Exchange RMDS Line RS-232 Cable Exchange Line Circuit Flash or ROM and RAM Time Switch Strata CT 4274 Exchange line connects to RMDS port (#19) via: DDI, Auto Attendant, DISA, Ring transfer, or ringing assignments. Figure 4-22 Strata CT RSIU/RSIS/RMDS Wiring Diagrams Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 4-23 Universal Slot PCB Wiring PIOU/PIOUS 2 3 6 4 1 5 (female) 5 4 3 2 1 Connect to: • Personal 9 8 7 6 Computer 9-pin COMX Port RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG DB9 Pin-out (front view) 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD CT Modular Jack Pin-out (front view) PIOU/PIOUS (female) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 20 Connect to: • Personal Computer 25-pin COMX Port H 3 2 6 20 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD CT Modular Jack Pin-out (front view) DB25 Pin-out (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 PIOU/PIOUS (male) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Connect to: • External Modem 2 3 20 5 8 7 RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 DB25 Pin-out (front view) Jumper Pin 4-5 C 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD CT Modular Jack Pin-out (front view) PIOU/PIOUS (male) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 20 Connect to: • ASCII Terminal • Printer • Call Accounting Device 3 2 6 20 8 7 DB25 Pin-out (front and side view) RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 SG DCD DTR DSR TD RD CT Modular Jack Pin-out (side view) Jumper Pin 4-5 2378 1 The above modular adapters can be used to connect PCs, terminals, and SMDR devices to RSIU, RSIS, RMDS, PIOU, and PIOUS RS-232 ports. 2 All DB9/25 connections require a 6-wire, telephone type modular cord (with modular jack locking tabs on the same side of each cord.) Figure 4-23 4-24 CT RS-232 Modular Adapter Pin Configuration Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus 5 This chapter provides instructions on how to connect telephones to the Strata CT systems and how to configure and upgrade them for optional features. Procedures for installing direct station selection consoles and door phones also appear in this chapter. Types of Telephones The Strata CT systems can support digital, electronic and standard telephones. Digital Telephones H Installation instructions for digital telephones in this chapter and elsewhere in this manual apply only to the Toshiba 2000 & 2500- series digital telephones. The 2000-series digital telephones consist of five models: Note Toshiba 2000- digital telephones are supported when connected to the Strata CT. DKT2001-F The DKT2001-F is a zero key Digital Telephone. C DKT2510-FS The DKT2510-FS is a 10-Button Digital Speakerphone. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-1 Station Apparatus DKT2510-FSD The DKT2510-FSD is a 10-Button Digital Speakerphone with Liquid Crystal Display. DKT2520-FS The DKT2520-FS is a 20-Button Digital Speakerphone. DKT2520-FSD H The DKT2520-FSD is a 20-Button Digital Speakerphone with Liquid Crystal Display C Electronic Telephones The electronic telephone instructions in this manual apply to the Toshiba 6500-series electronic telephones. They consist of four models: the EKT6510-H, EKT6510-S, EKT6520H, and EKT6520-SD. 5-2 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus Standard Telephones Standard DTMF telephones apply whenever standard telephones are mentioned in this manual. Toshiba supplies the CWB100 standard telephone. H C Telephone Installation This section describes the wiring required to connect telephones to the system. Before installing any telephone wiring, read the following warning and caution notes: WARNING! ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ ➤ Never install the telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install the telephone jacks in wet locations, unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface. Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. If telephone, DSS console, door phone control box, or door phone wiring exits the building, external secondary protection is required. CAUTION! When installing the station cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-3 Station Apparatus Telephone Speaker Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (DVSU) To receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls over the digital telephone speaker, a digital telephone must be upgraded with a DVSU; the telephone making the call does not require a DVSU. In a CT system, a DVSU is not required to receive OCA in the telephone handset or headset. An additional wire pair is not required for digital telephones that receive Speaker OCA calls. The DVSU is compatible with both 2000-series and 2500-series digital telephones. Notes Digital telephones cannot be equipped with a DVSU and integrated data interface unit ● (PCIU-DI) or DADMs at the same time. ● Program 03, Code 62 or 64 must be set for the PDKU for telephones that are to receive Speaker OCA and Program 31 LED 03 must be turned ON for telephone ports. ● DVSU is not necessary to receive handset OCA. System Connection H Digital Telephones The following provides information on how to connect digital telephones to the CT system. Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 5-3. Digital telephones connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twistedpair jacketed telephone cable. If using CW 1308 cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for digital telephones to operate effectively at up to 305 metres from the system. Digital telephones that are equipped with PCIUS or ADMs should have two-pair (or external power) to function effectively at this distance. This also applies to digital telephones supported by systems that must operate with battery reserve power. To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a BS6312 modular connector block (which then plugs into a slave LJU) at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular digital telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 3 metres. (the maximum allowed is 10 metres.). C Note 5-4 Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus Electronic Telephones The following provides information on how to connect electronic telephones to the Strata CT system. Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 5-3. Electronic telephones are connected to electronic telephone circuits in the CT System on the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. Two-pair wiring, as a minimum, is required for telephone connection. However, three-pair wiring is recommended for some upgrades, such as OCA. To accommodate the electronic telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a BS6312 modular connector which then plugs into a slave LJU at the station location. The standard two-pair modular electronic telephone cord length is 3 metres (the maximum allowed length is 10 metres). See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details. Standard Telephones The following provides information on how to connect standard telephones to the CT system. H C Note Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 5-3. Standard telephones connect to standard telephone circuits of the Standard Telephone Interface PCBs: RSTU and PSTU. Standard telephones connect to RSTU or PSTU via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. (See single-pair wiring Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details.) The standard telephone cable’s overall loop resistance, connected on- or off-premises, is 300 ohms maximum, (for PSTU), 600 ohms for RSTU with -24VDC (no R48S), and 1200 ohms for RSTU with -48VDC (R48S installed on RSTU PCB), including the telephone resistance. This also applies to all devices connected to standard telephone circuits. Telephone Wall Mounting This section explains how to mount digital and electronic telephones to a wall or other vertical surface. See the manufacturer’s documentation for instructions on mounting standard phones. Notes Digital telephones equipped with PCIUS cannot be wall mounted. ● ● Electronic and older digital telephones equipped with an HHEU1 can be wall mounted. 2000 & 2500-series digital telephones with headsets can only be wall mounted with an HHEU2. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-5 Station Apparatus ➤ To mount digital and electronic telephones Handset Hanger Plastic Tab 1478 Figure 5-1 Removing the Telephone Base Refer to Figures 5-1~5-2 and the following steps. H 1. C Loosen the captive screws, and remove the telephone base. 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four captive screws. 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). 1480 Figure 5-2 5-6 Wall Mounting Base Rotation Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. Handset Hanger 1479 Figure 5-3 Handset Hanger Telephone Upgrades H Digital and electronic telephones can be upgraded for a number of features; there are no upgrades for standard telephones. Each of these upgrades shares a circuit with the telephone that it is connected to and is not considered a station. See Table 5-1 for more information. Table 5-1 Telephone Subassembly Upgrades Subassembly C 1. Host Telephone Function DVSU1 2000- and 2500-series Digital Telephones Provides interface for digital telephone to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA). Not required for Handset/Headset OCA. HHEU 2000- and 2500-series Digital Telephones. 6500- and 6005series Electronic Telephones. Provides interface for headset and loud ringing bell to telephone. Can be installed with DVSU or DADM. PCIU1 2000 & 2500-series Digital Telephones Provides TAPI PC application and data calling interfaces. DADM1 2000 & 2500-series Digital Telephones Provides telephone with 20 (or 40 with two DADMs) additional feature buttons for DSS, System or Station speed dial, or Exchange line appearances. Capacity 1 per telephone 1 or 2 per telephone Only one of the following subassemblies allowed per telephone: DVSU, PCIU or DADM. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-7 Station Apparatus Digital Telephone Upgrades This section describes how to upgrade and configure 2000- and 2500-series digital telephones for features and options. TAPI and Simultaneous Voice and Data Upgrades (RPCI-DI) Both the 2000- and 2500-series digital telephones can be upgraded with an integrated data interface unit to transmit and receive simultaneous voice and data calls. There are three versions of the integrated unit: ◆ PCIU for the 2000 & 2500-series telephones The PCIU can provide a TAPI from the Digital Telephone. TAPI Mode In the TAPI mode, the PC connected to the PCIU can place telephone calls. The PC can also receive Caller ID/CLI, and DDI information received by the PCIU telephone. When in the TAPI mode, the PCIU is designed to be compatible with Microsoft TAPI application programs. For more information, see Chapter 9 – Computer Telephony Integration. PCIU Installation H See Figures 5-1 and 5-4 and follow these steps: C 1. Loosen the four screws on the digital telephone base and remove the base. 2. Insert the two integrated unit wire plugs into the connectors on the PCB in the telephone (observing the red wire for correct positioning). 3. Attach the integrated unit to the bottom of the phone. Install the PCIU for 2000 & 2500series phones. Secure with the four captive screws. 4. Remove the directory tray from the original telephone base and install it on the integrated unit phone base. Squeeze the tray on its sides so it bows slightly to remove and re-install. RS-232 (Female) DB-25 Connector DIU & VSU DIU & ADM TO P1 of Bottom PCB Digital Telephone Top Assembly To P2 of Bottom PCB Red Wire 14 81 Figure 5-4 5-8 PCIU Installation into 2000 & 2500-series Digital Telephone Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephone The following provides information on how to connect the DKT2001 Digital Single Line Telephones (SLTs) to the CT system. Before proceeding, see warning and caution notes in “Telephone Installation” on Page 5-3. The digital SLTs connect to the digital telephone ports via the MDF with standard twisted-pair jacketed telephone cable. If using CW1308 cable, single-pair wiring is sufficient in most cases for DKT2001 model standard telephones to operate effectively at up to 305 metres from the system. To accommodate the digital telephone line cord, the cable should be terminated in a slave LJU at the station location. The standard single-pair, modular DKT2001 model standard telephone cord that is sent with the telephone is 3 metres. (the maximum allowed is 10 metres.). Digital telephone cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of any length), or high resistance or faulty cable splices. H ➤ To wall mount DKT2001 digital SLTs Handset Hanger Plastic Tab C 1478 Figure 5-5 Removing the Telephone Base 1. Loosen the screws, and remove the telephone base. 2. Using a suitable cutter, remove the handset hanger from the base. 3. Insert the handset hanger in the slot on the front of the phone. The hanger fits in the notch on the handset cradle. 4. Rotate the telephone base 180 degrees and secure it to the telephone with its four screws. 5. Connect the phone to the wall modular connector with a cord approximately four inches long (available at most telephone supply companies). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-9 Station Apparatus 6. Route the cord into the hollow portion of the base. 7. Mount the phone on the wall mounting modular connector plate. Installation If required to achieve maximum distance (greater than 305 metres), install a two-pair house cable (or external power). Programming Program 03: Specify Code 61 to indicate a station line PDKU. Program 27: Adjusts initial off-hook volume level for digital telephone handsets. Program 38: Specify Code 21. Program 39: Specify button 01 as a [PDN]. Important! * H C Do not program Exchange lines or secondary line appearances onto button 01 or in any other position. Since the system assigns Exchange lines 01~17 by default, be sure to remove any Exchange line appearances by programming them as Station Speed Dial buttons (code ). Note If the Speed Dial Select button is removed, the key becomes the Speed Dial Select button. While on an outside call, the user must press then # to activate the and # DTMF tones for the duration of the call. * * * Program 92-5: Initialises initial ringing, speaker, and muted ring volume levels of digital telephones. Also, refer to the Numerical Programming Listing in the Strata CT Programming Manual for other station-related programs. DVSU Upgrade Installation Red Wire Red Wire 1483 Figure 5-6 5-10 DVSU Installation for Digital Telephones Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus See Figures 5-1 and 5-6~5-8 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Loosen the four captive screws on the metal plate to the standoffs inside the base. Remove and discard the plate. 3. Position the DVSU PCB on the standoffs), and secure with the four provided screws. 4. If installing the DVSU into a 2000 & 2500-series digital telephone and then connect the DVSU wire plugs to the DVSU connectors on the PCB inside the telephone. 5. Reinstall the telephone base and secure it with its four captive screws. W101 W102 W204 C 1484 Figure 5-7 DKT2510-FS Strap and Connector Locations RED P1 DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM RED P6 RED P2 P3 EX.SP RED W204 W204 EX.SP HHEU BEEP RED W101 W102 EX.POW EX.POW P1 RED HHEU HHEU W203 W201 W202 W203 H Carbon P2 Carbon W201 W202 BEEP RED P6 W409 DVSU DIU&DVSU DIU&ADM HS-BOV EX.POW 1485 Figure 5-8 DKT2510-FSD, DKT2520-FS, and DKT2520-FSD Strap and Connector Locations Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) for the Loud Ringing Bell feature and/or a headset to be connected to both series of digital telephones. Notes There are two types of HHEUs: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the ● HHEU2. ● Both 2000- and 2500-series digital telephones require either an HHEU2 or a V.3 or V.4 HHEU1 for HESB operation; earlier HHEU1 versions are only sufficient for headset operation only. ● Only digital telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-11 Station Apparatus ● A Toshiba HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in a digital telephone to the HESB. ● 2000 & 2500-series digital telephones can support an HHEU and a PCIU at the same time. HHEU Upgrade Installation Component Side of HHEU SW601 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) OCA (HHEU1 V.4 or HHEU2) P601 HHEU H 1487 Figure 5-9 HHEU Installation for Digital Telephones See Figures 5-1 and 5-7~5-10 and follow these steps: C 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. 2. Use a screwdriver or other suitable tool to remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. (The HHEU modular connector for the headset is accessed through this opening.) 3. If installing a V.3 HHEU1, set the SW601 switch on the HHEU to headset for the headset or loud bell application. V.4 HHEU1 and HHEU2 do not have this switch, because they are automatically set for the headset/loud bell application. 5-12 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus 4. Connect the HESC-65A cable to P601 of the HHEU (both HHEU1A versions and the HHEU2 have P601) if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required. Feed Through for HESC-65(A) Cable To HESB Block 1488 SW601 HESC-65 Cable or HESC-65A Cable HHEU H C Figure 5-10 P601 HESC-65A Cabling Refer to Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. 5. For the V.3 HHEU1: If only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the R607 resistor, then remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact. Note Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. ...or For the V.4 HHEU1 and the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap. Note 6. Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. Position the HHEU PCB on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws. Note See Figures 5-7,~5-8 for Steps 7~8. 7. For 2000 & 2500-series digital telephones. Connect the wire plug of the HHEU PCB to the HHEU connector on the PCB in the phone. 8. For 2000 & 2500-series digital telephones: If an HESB will be connected to the HHEU (for Loud Ringing Bell), locate the EX.SP strap on the PCB in the telephone and cut the strap. 9. For 2000 & 2500-series digital telephones: If a headset will be connected to the HHEU, locate and cut the HHEU strap on the PCB in the phone. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-13 Station Apparatus Note If the HHEU PCB is removed from the phone, the HHEU strap must be replaced for proper telephone operation. 10. Reinstall the telephone base; secure with the four captive screws. ➤ To adjust the volume of the HESB Loud Ringing Bell 1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB. 2. Adjust the volume control on the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone. Carbon Headset/Handset Straps If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the telephone, two jumper straps inside the telephone must be cut. ➤ To cut the straps Note You do not need to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU. See Figures 5-1 and 5-7~5-8 and follow these steps: H 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base, and remove the base. 2. For 2000-series digital telephones, and cut the W201 and W202 carbon straps. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Beep Strap C➤ 5-14 A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad or feature button is pressed on a digital telephone. To eliminate the beep sound See Figures 5-1 and 5-7~5-8 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws from the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Cut the beep strap. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus Microphone/Speaker Sensitivity Adjustment (Speakerphones Only) High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on some digital telephone speakerphone models to cut off frequently. ➤ To make the 2000 & 2500-series digital telephone models less sensitive to loud surrounding noise ➤ ➤ Hold down Mic button, then press the Vol ▲ button. The less-sensitive level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. To reset the sensitivity back to the normal level Hold down the Mic button, then press the Vol ▼ button. The normal level will be set after the third flash of the Mic LED. ➤ Note H C On 2000 & 2500-series digital telephone speakerphone models that are set for low sensitivity, the Mic LED flashes at the in-use rate when the speakerphone is used. When set to normal sensitivity, the Mic LED is on steady when using the speakerphone. Busy Override and Camp-on Ring Tone Over Handset/ Headset Option Using a 2000 & 2500-series digital telephone, the busy override and camp-on ring tones can be sent over the telephone handset or headset, in addition to the speaker. ➤ ➤ To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset of the DKT2010-H model 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base (Figure 5-1), and remove the base. 2. Install a strap in the HS-BOV W409 location (see Figure 5-7). 3. Reinstall the telephone base. To send busy override/camp-on ring tones over the handset/headset of the DKT2510-FSD/ 2520-FS/2520-FSD ➤ ➤ Hold down the Redial button and press the Vol ▲ button. To block the tone over the handset/headset of the DKT2510-FSD/2520-FS/2520-FSD ➤ Note Hold down the Redial button and press the Vol ▼ button. For this to function properly with headsets, make sure the speaker OCA strap or R607 is cut on the HHEU PCB and the HHEU strap is cut on the telephone. (See “Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU)” on Page 5-11 for more information.) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-15 Station Apparatus External Power Straps Digital telephones equipped with options such as integrated data interface units and ADMs require two-pair wiring or external power to operate efficiently at the maximum-allowed distance from the KSU. Two-pair wiring or external power is also necessary for maximum cable run lengths for digital telephones that are connected to systems that must operate with reserve power. Each digital telephone has two external power straps which must be cut for external power when the cabling of the telephone is connected to an external AC/DC power supply. ➤ To cut the straps See Figures 5-1 and 5-7~5-8 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Depending on the telephone, locate the W101 and W102 external power straps and cut them. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. DKT2000 ADM Installation See “Digital Add-on Module Installation” on Page 5-26 for more information.. H Electronic Telephone Upgrades This section describes how to upgrade and configure electronic telephones for features and options. C Off-hook Call Announce Upgrade (HVSU2 or HVSU/HVSI) Electronic telephones must be equipped with either the HVSU2 subassembly or the combined HVSU and HVSI subassemblies to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. These telephones also require three-pair wiring to receive speaker OCA, instead of the standard two-pair. Telephones making speaker OCA calls do not require an upgrade or extra wire pair. Notes Handset OCA is not available on electronic telephones. ● 5-16 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus HVSU2 Upgrade Installation See Figures 5-1 and 5-11 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Position the HVSU2 on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two provided screws. 3. Connect the HVSU2 wire plug to the P2 connector on the PCB in the telephone. R-UP (6510-H, 6510-S, 6520-S) To HVSU Connector (P2) On Main PCB Inside Telephone Room Noise HVSU2 To HHEU Connector P1 RED P1 HI P2 RED Beep Strap Carbon H R-UP (6520-SD) Carbon Straps W201 W202 HHEU Strap W203 1489 Figure 5-11 C Red Wire To HVSU Connector, P2 1490 HVSU Installation for Electronic Telephones HVSU/HVSI Upgrade Installation See Figures 5-1 and 5-11~5-12 and follow these steps: To P2 HVSU Connector on Main PCB Inside Telephone P5 HSVI HVSU 1491 Figure 5-12 HVSI/HVSU Installation for Electronic Telephones Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-17 Station Apparatus 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Align the P5 connector on the HVSI subassembly with the receptacle on the HVSU subassembly. Apply firm, even pressure to the PCBs to ensure that the connectors mate properly (they should click). Note Exercise care when assembling the HVSU to the HVSI to prevent damage to the connector pins; also, verify that the HVSU is aligned with the silk-screened image on the HVSI. 3. Position the HVSU/HVSI subassembly on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two screws provided. 4. Connect the HVSU/HVSI subassembly wire plug to the P2 connector on the electronic telephone PCB. 5. Reinstall the electronic telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Loud Ringing Bell/Headset Upgrade (HHEU) The Loud Ringing Bell/Headset upgrade (HHEU) enables an external speaker (HESB) and/or a headset to be connected to the electronic telephone. The HESB serves as a loud ringing bell when connected to a telephone. H Notes There are two types of HHEU: the HHEU1 (which has four versions, V.1~V.4) and the ● HHEU2. C 5-18 ● Only electronic telephones equipped with an HHEU2 can be wall mounted. The HHEU2 is identical to the V.4 HHEU1, except that the HHEU2 has longer wires to accommodate wall mounting. ● A Toshiba HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable is required to connect the HHEU in an electronic telephone to the HESB. Refer to Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. ● All HHEU versions and types, except for V.1 HHEU1, are compatible with the Speaker Off-hook Call Announce upgrades (HVSU2 and HVSU/HVSI). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus HHEU Upgrade Installation Component Side of HHEU R607 (HHEU1 V.1 ~ V.3) SW601 (HHEU1A V.1 ~V.3) To P1, HHEU Connector of Telephone PCB OCA (HHEU1 V.4 or HHEU2) P601 HHEU H C 1492 Figure 5-13 HHEU Installation for Electronic Telephones See Figures 5-1, 5-10, 5-11 and 5-13 and follow these steps: 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Using a screwdriver or other suitable tool, remove the plastic tab on the back of the base. The HHEU modular connector for the headset will be accessed through this opening. 3. If using a V.3 or earlier HHEU1, set the SW601 switch to the HEADSET position for HESB and/or headset connection. This switch is not on either the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2, because the operation is automatic with these subassemblies. 4. Connect either the HESC-65 or HESC-65A cable to P601 of the HHEU if the Loud Ringing Bell option is required. Refer to Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for HESB installation procedures. 5. For the V.3 or earlier HHEU1: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut both sides of the R607 resistor on the HHEU and remove the resistor to eliminate electrical contact. Note Do not cut the R607 resistor if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the Loud Ringing Bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. ...or For the V.4 HHEU1 or the HHEU2: if only the headset is connected to the HHEU, cut the speaker OCA strap. Note 6. Do not cut the speaker OCA strap if connecting an HESB to the HHEU for the loud ringing bell–even if a headset is also installed on the HHEU. Position the HHEU subassembly on the standoffs inside the base, and secure with the two screws provided. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-19 Station Apparatus 7. Connect the HHEU subassembly wire plug to the P1 connector on the electronic telephone PCB. 8. Cut the HHEU strap on the telephone PCB. Note 9. The HHEU strap must be replaced if the HHEU PCB is removed from the telephone. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Adjust (HESB) Loud Ringing Bell Volume 1. Call the telephone connected to the HESB. 2. Adjust the volume control on both the back of the HESB and the ring volume control on the telephone. Carbon Headset/Handset Straps If a carbon-type handset or headset is connected to the handset jack on the side of the 6500series electronic telephone, two straps inside the telephone must be cut. H ➤ To cut the straps Note It is not necessary to cut these straps if the headset is connected to the HHEU. See Figures 5-1 and 5-11 and follow these steps: C 1. Loosen the four captive screws on the telephone base and remove the base. 2. Locate the carbon straps, W201 and W202 and cut them. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure it with its four captive screws. Beep Strap A “beep” sounds whenever a dial pad button or feature button is pressed on an electronic telephone. ➤ To eliminate the beep See Figures 5-1 and 5-11 and follow these steps: 1. 5-20 Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone and remove the base. 2. Locate and cut the beep strap on the telephone PCB. 3. Reinstall the electronic telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus Microphone/Speaker Threshold (Speakerphones only) High ambient noise levels may cause the speaker on the electronic telephone speakerphone models (the EKT6510-S, EKT6520-S, and EKT6520-SD) to cut off frequently. ➤ To make these telephones less sensitive to noise and to prevent the cut-off See Figures 5-1 and 5-11 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the base to the telephone, and remove the base. 2. Locate the room noise switch on the PCB inside the telephone, and push it carefully to the HI (high) position. 3. Reinstall the telephone base and secure in place using the four captive screws. Handset Receiver Volume-up Strap (Version 2 6500-series Telephones Only) For Version 2 (V.2) 6500-series electronic telephones only, the handset receiver volume can be increased six decibels (dB) by cutting a strap inside the telephone. ➤ H C To cut the strap See Figures 5-1 and 5-11 and follow these steps: 1. Remove the four captive screws on the telephone base to the telephone, and remove the base. 2. Locate the R-UP strap on the PCB inside the telephone and cut it. 3. Reinstall the telephone base, and secure in place using the four captive screws. Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console/System Connection ◆ ◆ B1CAU support up to four DSS consoles B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU, B5CAU/BU up to eight consoles. There are two types of consoles: the Digital DSS (DDSS) and the Electronic (HDSS) console. The DDSS console can be connected to designated digital telephone circuits, and the HDSS console can only be connected to designated PEKU circuits. This section provides instructions on how to install both types of consoles. 1872 DDSS Console Connections The DDSS console, which can operate with a digital telephone (preferably an LCD model), can connect only to circuit 8 of a PDKU digital telephone circuit. Standard twisted single-pair or two-pair jacketed telephone cable (maximum 305 metres) is used for the connection. To accommodate the DDSS console connection, the instrument end of the cable should be terminated in a BS631 Modular Connector connected to a slave LJU. Refer to Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-21 Station Apparatus Notes DDSS console cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges (of ● any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. ● See the appropriate Installation chapter for secondary protection information and loop limits. CAUTION! When installing the DDSS cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. DDSS Programming Program 03: Code 64 identifies the slots that support DDSS consoles. Program 28: Assigns DDSS console(s) to telephones. Program 29: Assigns button functions for DDSS consoles. H HDSS Console HDSS Console Connections The HDSS console must be connected to the data pairs of circuits 7 and 8 on a PEKU with standard two-pair twisted, jacketed telephone cable. To accommodate the connection, the instrument end of the HDSS console cable should be terminated in a slave LJU. Refer to Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring/interconnecting details. If using CW1308 cable, the overall length of the cable run from the Expansion Unit (KSU) to the HDSS console must not exceed 152 meters. The HDSS console can operate with either an electronic or digital telephone (preferably an LCD model). C CAUTION! When installing the HDSS console cable, do not run the cables parallel if they are within three feet of an AC power line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. Avoid running HDSS console wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. HDSS Console Configuration The following considerations should be made when installing an HDSS console: ◆ ◆ 5-22 A PEKU PCB is required. Two PEKU ports are required for the HDSS console (always circuits 7 and 8). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus HDSS Programming Program 03: Codes 23 and 24 identify the slot that supports a PEKU that interfaces with the HDSS console. Program 28: Assigns HDSS console to a telephone. Program 29: Assigns individual button functions for the HDSS console. Door Phone (MDFB) This section provides installation instructions for the Door Phone (MDFB). Door Phones can be installed can also with Door Phone/Lock Control Units (see following section). ◆ Strata CT can have up to 12 door phones 1873 H C Lock Control Unit and Door Phone This section provides installation instructions for the Digital (DDCB) or Electronic (HDCB) Door Phone/Lock Control Units. Each DDCB or HDCB can support as many as three MDFBs or two MDFBs and one door lock. DDCBs or HDCBs can only connect to slot 11/ port 004, slot 12/port 012, slot 13/port 020 and slot 14/port 028. DDCBs can only connect to circuit 5 (a PDKU PCB and HDCBs can connect only to circuit 5 of a PEKU). DDCBs and HDCBs cannot connect to the RSTU2 or PSTU. 1874 DDCB/HDCB and MDFB Cabling For DDCB, HDCB, and MDFB wiring/interconnecting details and door lock control installation procedures, refer to Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring. If using CW1308 cable, the length of the cable run from the Strata CT to the MDFB (via the DDCB or HDCB) must not exceed 305 metres. DDCB or HDCB cable runs must not have cable splits (single or double), cable bridges ● (of any length) or high resistance or faulty cable splices. ● See Chapter 2 – Strata CT Installation for secondary protection information and loop limits. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-23 Station Apparatus DDCB/HDCB Wall Mounting External Power Straps (DDCB Only) 1493 KSU Jack MDFB Jack A~C KS DO PH OR ON E U A B Mounting Screws (4) C H Note Figure 5-14 C➤ 5-24 See Table 2-1 regarding external power requirements. Door Phone (DDCB or HDCB) Installation The DDCB and HDCB is designed to be mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. To mount the units 1. Locate the two mounting holes on the right-hand side on the DDCB or HDCB (see Figure 5-14). 2. Remove the side cover from the DDCB or HDCB to expose the two left-hand mounting holes. 3. Position the DDCB or HDCB adjacent to the Base KSU with regard to wiring needs. 4. Secure the DDCB or HDCB to the mounting surface with four one-inch panhead wood screws. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus MDFB Wall Mounting Base Metal Frame 3.25 inches Two Wall Mounting Holes H C Door Phone 1494 Figure 5-15 Door Phone (MDFB) Installation 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the cover. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame (see Figure 5-15). 2. Position the metal frame and base to the mounting surface and secure with two one-inch panhead wood screws. 3. Attach cover to the metal frame and base and secure with the screw which was removed in Step 1. MDFB Volume Control Adjustments 1. Remove the screw from the bottom of the MDFB cover. 2. Detach the cover from the base and metal frame. 3. The volume level is changed by a screw adjustment on the back of the MDFB. Turn the screw with a flat-headed screwdriver while ringing the MDFB or while on a call with it. The volume level will change as the screw is turned. Door Phone/Lock Programming Program 39: Assigns door phone and door lock buttons to digital telephones. Program 77-1: Assigns DDCBs or HDCB to ports, door phone ringing over external page during the NIGHT mode, and door lock activation time. Program 77-2: Busy out unused MDFB positions, identifies which DDCBs support the door lock option, and sets the door phone to ring one or five times. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-25 Station Apparatus Note Each DDCB/HDCB door lock assignment will reduce the system door phone capacity by one (see Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation for HDCB, DDCB, and PIOU/PIOUS door lock installation information). Program 79: Assigns door phone-to-station ringing assignments. Program 79: Assigns which [DN] flashes on telephones assigned in Program 79. * Digital Add-on Module Installation Install one or two DADM 2020s to a 2000 or 2500-series digital telephone (only). The number of DADMs supported by the Strata CT depends on the common control PCB: ◆ ◆ ◆ B1CAU supports 40 DADMs B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU supports 120 DADMs B5CAU/BU support 200 DADMs The DADM provides DSS buttons, speed dial buttons and Exchange line buttons. H Note ➤ To install DADMs See Figure 5-16 and follow these steps: 1. C 5-26 DADMs cannot be installed on telephones that have RPCI-DI on OCA/DVSU installed. Loosen the four captive screws on the 2000 & 2500-series digital telephone base and remove the base. 1870 2. Remove the base handset hanger. 3. Loosen two captive screws on DADM and remove bases. 4. Put the DADM supplied cable through the telephone and DADM bases. 5. Connect DADM cable connectors to P1 of DADM and P1 of DKT2000 or DKT2500 telephone. 6. Install base of DADM and telephone– tuck DADM cable into DADM and telephone base, as necessary, for proper length. 7. Secure DADM to telephone base with DADM connecting plate (using four screws). 8. If required to achieve maximum distance, install 2-pair house cable (or external power) and 2-pair modular cord, supplied with DADM. (See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 9. If a second DADM should be installed, connect P1 of the second DADM to P2 of the first DADM with the DADM connecting cable. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus (Smaller Connector) 4-Screws P1 P 2 (No Connection) 4-Screws 1 1 10 Second DADM 12 DADM Connection Plate (provided with DADM) DADM Base DADM Cable (Supplied with DADM) Remove Handset Hanger Black Wire to Pin 1 First DADM P1 H 1 P2 10 Telephone Base 1 Black Wire to Pin 1 12 1 (Larger Connector) DIU & ADM C P1 of Bottom PCB 2000 or 2500-Series Digital Telephone DADM2020 DADM2020 2000 or 2500-Series DKT View of Bottom 1495 Figure 5-16 Digital Add-On-Module Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-27 Station Apparatus ADM Programming ADMs are programmed in Program 29. * Important! To activate the ADM, Program 29 must be entered for each telephone port * equipped with an DADM. See the Strata CT programming record sheets in the Strata CT Programming Manual for button defaults. Windows Operator’s Console (WOC) The Windows Operator’s console (WOC) requires a customer-supplied, IBM-compatible PC. A VGA or SVGA monitor and a COM port dedicated to the PC attendant console is required. Toshiba recommends the following for the PC attendant console: Pentium processor/100 MHz, 16 MB RAM, 1.44 MB floppy drive, 200 MB hard drive, and a mouse. A tower that sits on the floor is provides better monitor visibility (as opposed to a desktop model). Microsoft® Windows® 95 or 98 software must be resident on the PC. Windows 3.1 will work, but Windows 95 or 98 is recommended. H Important! After the WOC is installed in Windows 95 or 98, you can find your old program groups by clicking the Start button (formally Program Manager) and then selecting Programs. Your groups appear as folders. To manage files in Windows 95 or 98, click the Start button, select Programs, and then click Windows Explorer (formally File Manager). Your directories appear as folders. See Table 5-2 below for Attendant Console Capacities. C Table 5-2 WOC Capacities Processor PCB Number of Attendant Consoles Supported B1CU 2 B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU, or B5CAU/BU 4 Hardware Installation The RATU PCB can support up to four Attendant Consoles in any combination. (See “RATU Installation” on Page 3-22.) Notes The maximum distance from the Strata CT to either attendant console is 305 metres). ● ● 5-28 Attendant console cable runs must not have the following: ● Cable splits (single or double) ● Cable bridges (of any length) ● High resistance or faulty cable splices Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus ● See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for attendant console wiring. CAUTION! ➤ When installing the PC or conventional attendant console cable, do not run the cables parallel to AC power if they are within three feet of an AC line. AC power lines should be crossed at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. To install the WOC See Figure 5-17 and follow these steps: 1. Connect the RATI to the PC COM port a with a standard RS-232 cable. 2. Use one-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location. If you need to use a long cable, use two-pair for more power. 3. Plug in the handset cradle to the RJ45-jack. 4. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the handset base. 5. After programming the Strata CT system, install the PC attendant console software and complete the Telephony Setup per the instructions found on the WOC Installation & Programming Guide shipped with each set of software. H POW C DTR DSR RATI (Front View) Carbon Jumper RATI PCB DB9-FEMALE (To PC COM Port Cable) RJ11-JACK (To RATU Modular Cord) Headset Jumper RJ45-JACK (To RATHC Modular Cord) REC OUT (To Tape Recorder "RECORD" Input) AUX IN (Not Used) 14 97 Bottom Panel Figure 5-17 RATI Assembly/Disassembly Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-29 Station Apparatus Notes ● Do not cut HEADSET jumper unless you are connecting two headsets. ● Cut CARBON jumpers if a carbon handset is connected to the RATHC handset cradle. ● “REC OUT” can be used to monitor or record the attendant console talkpath. Both the attendant and connected party will be monitored or recorded. The record level output from the attendant handset or headset is approximately 3 dB below the connected party record level. Use a 1/8” mini audio jack. ● “AUX IN” can be used to send audio to the attendant and connected party. The audio level to the attendant is approximately 10 dB below the audio level sent to the connected party. Audio sent to the outside party is limited to–15 dBv (CO Tip/Ring). Use a 1/8” mini audio jack. ● See Figure 4-9 in Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RATI cable wiring information. Windows Operator’s Console (WOC) Programming Program 03: Code 51 assigns the RATU PCB attendant console cabinet slot number. Important! H The RATU PCB takes up four station ports in software; each attendant console will be assigned one of the ports in consecutive order. Toshiba recommends installing the RATU PCB in the next highest slot number following the last station PCB installed–do not skip slots. The first port number will be the next consecutive port number following the last station port installed. Program 15: If the attendant console is used to set-up trunk-to-trunk (two Exchange-line or tandem) connections with loop start lines, set Program 15-5 appropriately; if the Exchange line sends the AR-Hold signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to Detect. If the Exchange line does not send the AR signal, set 15-0 and 15-3 to Ignore. Loop start trunk-to-trunk calls remain on attendant hold loops only if AR-Ignore is set. Program 58 C ◆ ◆ 58-1: Sets the attendant console overflow time for each console. ◆ ◆ 58-4: Sets the console Answer key priority for each console. 58-2: Sets the console display for EL or CRT (EGA) and enables or disables console call waiting tone for each console. (Not used for the PC attendant console). 58-5: Sets the console overflow destination for each console. Program 59: Assigns attendant console Flexible Buttons (Keys) for each console. 5-30 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Station Apparatus Attendant Console Load Share Programming Program 81~89: Assigns Exchange lines to share the incoming call load between consoles. (Tie lines load share on Dial “0” calls only, without the use of Programs 81~89.) All incoming Exchange lines (including DDI lines) to be distributed between two or more Attendant Consoles should be assigned to ring each console in Programs 81~89. Note Delay ring assignments do not apply to DDI lines. Programs 71 and 72: Used to provide the assignment of DDI calls. Program 71 assigns the dialled number to ring at different locations during each Night Mode (Day, Day2, Night). DDI tags can be added for personalised identification of calls. Program 72 provides external forwarding of calls listed in Program 71. Program *17: Assigns each Exchange line to an attendant console as the DDI line intercept position as required. (Intercept calls do not load share.) Attendant Console Load Share Programming Example H C The user’s company DDI line [DN] is 583-3700; this number and other loop start lines should ring in a load sharing manner to each of the Company’s two Attendant Consoles in the Day, Day 2, and Night modes. Attendant consoles one and two are connected to RATU ports 024 and 025 respectively and should load share 583-3700 calls and other Exchange line calls. Program the CT as shown below: ◆ In Programs 81, 84, and 87, assign all Exchange and DDI lines to ring ports 024 and 025. ◆ ◆ In Program *81, *84 and *87, assign all Exchange lines to flash the [PDN] of port 024. ◆ ◆ Port 024 is assigned as a secondary DN (SDN) on the console in Port 025. In Program 71, assign digits 3700 to port 024, and assign any other selected DDI extension number(s) to port 025–note that when the DDI extension number assigned to either console is dialled, calls will load share between consoles. In Program 39 assign Port 024 as an SDN on Port 025. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 5-31 Station Apparatus Windows Operator’s Console (WOC) Software Installation Note See the WOC-SFT Installation and Programming Guide shipped with each set of WOC software. Conventional Attendant Console A Strata CT system configured with RCTUB2 can support two Attendant Consoles. PC and conventional Attendant Consoles require processors in Strata CT. The conventional attendant console can be configured with a Toshiba-supplied base (ATT BASE-1) and an Electroluminescent (EL) or EGA Colour CRT. Installation Refer to “Hardware Installation” on Page 5-28 and the following steps. ➤ To install the conventional attendant console 1. H Plug in the EL or CRT display to the base with a nine-pin cable, which is supplied with the display. 2. Plug in the EL or CRT display to a commercial three-prong AC 117V outlet. 3. Use two-pair wiring to connect the MDF to an RJ11 jack at the attendant console location. 4. Plug in the handset to the base RJ45-jack (see Figure 5-17). 5. Plug in the headset (if needed) to the base. C Conventional Attendant Console Programming Follow the same programming instructions provided for the PC attendant console. See “Windows Operator’s Console (WOC) Programming” on Page 5-30. Software Installation and Windows instructions do not apply to the conventional console. 5-32 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation 6 This chapter provides connection procedures for optional peripheral equipment to Strata CT Systems. Information in this chapter applies to all systems, unless stated otherwise in text. Instructions include hardware requirements, PCB configuration, interconnection/wiring requirements, and programming considerations. Peripheral equipment is connected to system PCBs. See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring installation and configuration information and the appropriate installation section. Power Failure Options In the event of a power failure, Strata CT uses these options: H Reserve Power For information on the Reserve Power Option, see Chapter 2, “Reserve Power” on Page 2-4. Strata CT Power Failure Transfer Unit C An optional Power Failure Transfer Unit (DPFT) can be installed that automatically connects up to eight selected Exchange lines directly to designated standard telephones in the event of a power failure. The DPFT enables normal operation of the selected Exchange lines and standard telephones when the system is in service. When power is restored, each telephone is independently reconnected to system standard telephone circuit ports after it is finished with its direct Exchange line call. The DPFT is normally installed on the MDF. Figure 6-1 provides a circuit diagram of the DPFT. Note The DPFT option is only available with annlogue exchange lines. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-1 Peripheral Installation To RSTU/PSTU-A1 J2-27 J2-26 To RSTU/PSTU-B1 J2-2 J2-1 To TEL-A1 To TEL-B1 Telephone Current Detector To PCOU-A1 To PCOU-B1 J1-27 J1-26 J1-2 J1-1 To Exchange line -A1 To Exchange line -B1 J1-50 DG (Input) Relay RSTU or PSTU Control H -24V (Input) J1-25 1498 Notes C • • Figure 6-1 Representation of first of eight circuits. Conditions shown with AC power (-24VDC) off. DPFT Circuit Diagram Power Failure Emergency Transfer (DPFT) Installation 1. Mount the DPFT on or near the MDF. Note 6-2 See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring, DPFT/MDF interconnecting tables. 2. Using 25-pair cables with amphenol-type connectors (female for DPFT connector J1, male for DPFT connector J2), connect the DPFT to two 237 Krone strips. 3. Connect the Exchange lines selected for emergency use to the DPFT J1-block “PSTNA” and “PSTNA-B” terminals. 4. Connect the PCOU circuits related to the emergency Exchange lines to the DPFT J1block “PCOU-A” and “PCOU-B” terminals. 5. Connect the standard telephone stations selected for emergency use to the DPFT J2block “TEL-A” and “TEL-B” terminals. 6. Connect the RSTU or PSTU standard telephone circuits related to the emergency standard telephones to DPFT J2-block “PSTU-A” and “PSTU-B” terminals. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7. ➤ Connect the DPFT to the RSTU/PSTU DG and -24V terminals (See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for RSTU/PSTU and PCOU wiring/interconnecting details). The -24V (Pin 25) and DG (Pin 50) ground terminals are available on the RSTU or PSTU only. To test the operation of the DPFT 1. Turn the system power switch Off. 2. Verify that Exchange dial tone is available at each standard telephone connected to the DPFT. 3. Call back to each telephone using an outside line. Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options Strata CT systems provide an MOH option for Exchange lines, as well as telephones connected to the system. A variety of BGM options are also provided. (See Figure 6-2.) H C MOH Option The Strata CT processor PCBs supports an external, customer-provided music source – such as a tuner, compact disc player, digital music source, cassette downloader digital source or tape player – for MOH. The PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU each has a relay contact on it that can be configured to automatically turn the source on when a Exchange line or station is placed on hold. MOH source and MOH relay contact specifications are as follows: BGM or MOH Source Specifications ◆ ◆ Input Impedance: 600 ohms or 8 ohms Input Voltage (recommended levels) Minimum: 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm) Maximum: 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) Relay Contact Specifications ◆ ◆ Voltage: 24VDC maximum Current: 1 amp maximum Important! In accordance with Copyright Law, a license may be required from compitent organizations, if copyrighted music is transmitted through the Music-on-Hold feature of this telecommunications system. Toshiba Information Systems, U.K., hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license. The output port must also comply with the EN60950 requirements for SELV circuiting. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-3 Peripheral Installation ➤ To install the MOH option 1. Connect the external music source to the Strata CT Processor, RCA jack (see Figure 6-1). 2. Rotate the Strata CT processor PCB’s volume control (VR1) to adjust MOH volume: clockwise increases volume; counterclockwise decreases volume. Listen to the Exchange line on-hold when setting MOH to the proper volume. 3. If MOH relay control is required, access Program 77-1. Set LED 05 to On to configure the MOH/Night Transfer Control relay for the MOH function. This feature requires the installation of a Strata CT Processor, or PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB. 4. If using the MOH control feature with a PIOU or PEPU, set PIOU or PEPU jumper plug P11 to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ◆ MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is activated. ◆ BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when MOH is activated. ...or If using the MOH control feature with a PIOUS, solder PIOUS jumper W2 to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ◆ MAKE (M) – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any Exchange line is in the hold condition. H ◆ BREAK (B) – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any Exchange line is in the hold condition. C 6-4 5. MOH (Exchange line or intercom hold) is applied from the RCTU through the KSU’s backplane to Exchange lines, electronic, digital, and standard telephones on hold. 6. MOH is also applied through the Strata CT processor PCB’s Page/BGM control to provide BGM to electronic/digital telephone speakers and external page. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation See MDF A & B Wiring Diagrams (Chapter 4) CW1308 0.5 Twisted Pair B_C_U RCTU VR1 MOH/BGM Volume Control Max. Music-OnHold Source1 Music MOH RCA Jack On/Off Control (24 Volt Max) Page/BGM Control Music-OnHold Exchange Line & Station PCBs Page or Background Music Station PCBs Stations Digital and Electronic Telephone Speakers Digital and Electronic Telephone BGM Dial Code #481-ON #480-OFF OR Tel Set Music (BGM) Note H DDI Lines TIE Lines Exchange Lines (Loop) Backplane BGM or MOH Source Specifications: • Input Impedance: 600W • Input Voltage: Recommended Levels, Min. = 0.14 VRMS (-15 dBm) Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) NHT/NHR, if Using PIOUS PIOU/PEPU/PIOUS 600Ω SP0 SW4 SP1 Backplane C (9) ( ) PIN No.s of PIOU/PEPU Amphenol Connector 3 Watt amp. Volume VR1 SW4: Optional Page Output Switch 600Ω OR 3-Watt 8Ω. B (34) MOH/NT Relay Contact Jumper Plug (Make or Break) M P11 MOH or Night Transfer Control Relay Optional External Page/ BGM Outputs (38) HESB or Amplifier (13) & Speaker (50) (25) Speaker External BGM Dial Code from Electronic & Digital Telephones Port 000 Only: #491-ON #490-OFF (MOH over BGM) Select MOH Prog. 77-1, 05 Note 3-watt amp and SW4 are available with PIOU and PEPU only; PIOUS provides 600 ohm output only. Figure 6-2 W2, IF Using PIOUS (See Figure 6-8) Relay Contact Specification: 24 VDC Max. 1 amp, Max. 4253 Music-on-Hold and Background Music (same source) Functional Diagram Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-5 Peripheral Installation BGM Options The BGM options allow music to play over optional external speakers (external page system) and/or digital and electronic telephone speakers. BGM can be configured in three ways: Configuration A – One Music Source This configuration enables BGM and MOH to share the same music source (see Figure 6-3). With this configuration, the MOH/BGM music source is connected to the RCA jack on the Strata CT processor PCB. The music source is sent to Exchange lines/stations on hold, to electronic/digital telephone speakers, and to the external page system via the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU optional PCBs. Station Port 000 must dial #491 to send MOH over BGM and #490 to disable the option. B_C_U MOH MOH/BGM Source (SHARED) 600Ω, 0.15 - 0.77 Volt RMS BGM Page MOH RCA Jack VR1 (Volume) H 4254 Exchange Lines and Stations On-Hold Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker (BGM: #481 ON/#480 OFF) PIOU PIOUS PEPU To External Page System (BGM when page is idle or 600W output) C Figure 6-3 MOH/BGM Music Source Configuration A Note Telephone users can turn on BGM at their station by pressing the Tel Set Music (BGM) button; or by pressing [PDN] + #481 (#480 turns BGM Off). Configuration B – Alternate Background Music Source This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the MOH RCA jack of the Strata CT Processor, (as in Configuration A) and a separate BGM source to be connected to a RSTU or PSTU (circuit 2) PCB (see Figures 6-4 and 6-5). With this configuration, the MOH source is sent only to Exchange lines/stations on hold, while the BGM source is sent directly to electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via the PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU or BGM 600 ohm RCA jack. Note 6-6 The BGM source port connected to the system must have the same EN60950 classification as the Strata CT. This port must therefore be of a SELV (Safe Extra Low Voltage) classification. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation RCA Jack A (28) RSTU or PSTU (CKT 2) BGM Music Source 600Ω Output High Level Output Input B (3) 4246 BGM SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS: • Input Impedance: 600Ω • Input Voltage: Recommended Levels Min. = 0.14 VRMS (–15 dBm) Max. = 0.77 VRMS (0 dBm) Phone Line See Program 19 for Slot Assignment Note H Figure 6-4 The BGM source port connected to the system must have the same EN60950 classification as the Strata CT. This unit must therefore be of a SELV (Safe Extra Low Voltage) classification. Strata CT Alternate BGM Source to Standard Telephone Port Connection B_C_U C MOH MOH Source MOH RCA Jack VR1 (Volume) RSTU, PSTU 25-Pair Connector VA = P28, W-GN VB = P3, GN-W Slot XX*, Circuit 2 BGM/PAGE Strata CT To External Page System PIOU PIOUS PEPU BGM Alternate BGM Source: Digital/Electronic Telephones and External Speakers Exchange Lines and Stations On-Hold Strata CT Processor 600Ω RCA Jack VA VB (BGM: #491 ON/#490 OFF) (BGM when Page is Idle, 600Ω Output) Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker RSTU or PSTU in Slot XX* (BGM: #481 ON/#480 Off) 4299 Backplane Wiring Installation Wiring * Program 19 Assigns Slot XX Figure 6-5 Strata CT Alternate BGM Source Configuration B Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-7 Peripheral Installation Configuration C – Three Music Sources This configuration enables the MOH source to be connected to the RCA jack of the Strata CT processor PCB (as in Configuration A). The digital or electronic telephone BGM source is connected to a RSTU or PSTU PCB (as in Configuration B), and a separate BGM source is sent to the external page speakers via the PIOU PCB (see Figure 6-6). When a separate BGM source is connected to the PIOU, two customer-supplied amplifiers are required to drive the external speakers.One amplifier drives the speakers for BGM when page is idle and the other amplifier drives the speakers during page. The PIOU switches BGM or page to the external speakers via zone relays. (The PIOUS and PEPU do not provide zone relays; therefore Configuration C is not possible with these PCBs.) B_C_U RCA Jack Exchange Lines and Stations On-Hold MOH MOH SOURCE KSU BGM 600W RCA Jack VR1 (Volume) RSTU/PSTU1 25 Pair Connector VA = 28, W-GN VB = 3, GN-W SLOT XX2, Circuit 2 H Electronic/ Digital Telephone Alternate BGM Source BGM/Page VA VB Electronic/Digital Telephone Speaker RSTU1 or PSTU1 in Slot XX2 (BGM: #481 On/#480 Off) C Page Amplifier 600Ω External Speaker BGM Source Page Page or BGM P23 BGM BGM PIOU Only To External Page Speaker Zone Relays Activate with Page Amplifier (BGM When Page is Idle) Notes Backplane Wiring Installation Wiring 1. An isolation transformer may be required if connecting BGM source to a standard telephone port. 2. Program 19 assigns BGM Slot number. 4300 Figure 6-6 6-8 Strata CT Alternate Music Source Configuration C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation ➤ To install the MOH/BGM as BGM 1. Ensure that the MOH option is installed in accordance with “To install the MOH option” on Page 6-4 (see Figure 6-2). 2. The output of the Strata CT Processor page/BGM control is applied through the backplane to the output select switch (SW4) on the PIOU or PEPU. Set the SW4 switch to either SPO or SPI, as required: ◆ SPO – Directs external page and non-amplified BGM to the HESB or external amplifier (pins 13 and 38). ◆ SPI – Directs external page and BGM through the on-board 3-watt amplifier to the external speaker output (pins 25 and 50). Note H C The PIOUS provides non-amplified BGM/page output only (SPT and SPR). See Figure 6-8. 3. When using an HESB or external amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust volume using the HESB or amplifier volume control. 4. When using the internal amplifier for paging/BGM, adjust the volume using the volume control (VR1) on the PIOU/PEPU PCB. Alternate BGM Source Installation A BGM source can be connected to a station PCB (RSTU/PSTU) to send music to all electronic/digital telephone speakers and to the external page system via a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU. The BGM source is separate from the MOH source connected to the Strata CT processor PCB. An isolation transformer is needed to connect a music source to one of the above standard telephone circuits (see Figure 6-4). ➤ To connect the BGM source to the RSTU2 or PSTU See Figures 6-4~6-6 and follow these steps: 1. 2. Access Program 10-2. If the BGM source is connected to a RSTU or PSTU, LED 09 and 10 should be Off. Using Program 19, identify (assign) the BGM slot. If connecting the BGM source to a RSTU2/RSTU3/PSTU: Connect circuit 2 of the RSTU/PSTU to a customer-supplied isolation transformer and BGM source. Note 3. The isolation transformer protects the BGM source from potentially damaging RSTU2/RSTU3/PSTU voltage. Some music sources which are designed for telephone system applications may have this protection built-in and do not require the transformer. (Consult the documentation provided with the music source.) Using the BGM source’s volume control, adjust the BGM volume to the desired level while listening to BGM via a telephone speaker and/or the external page speakers. When BGM is sent to external speakers via a PIOU or PIOUS or PEPU PCB, use the external amplifier volume control to balance the BGM and page volume levels. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-9 Peripheral Installation External BGM Installation The external BGM options are closely associated with the external paging options. See “External Page Options” on Page 6-28 for external paging amplifier installation. Relay Control Options and Door Lock Control Two relays are provided on the PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU PCBs to control the operation of peripheral equipment: ◆ ◆ External Page/Door Lock Relay Night Transfer/Music-on-Hold Relay Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the relay control function. Each relay can be configured to provide one of two possible control functions and as normally open (MAKE) or closed (BREAK). Electrical specifications for the relay contacts are as follows: H Voltage: 24VDC maximum Current: 1 amp maximum CAUTION! C Note To prevent relay damage, do not connect relays directly to 240VAC power source. See the Strata CT Programming Manual, as necessary, when instructed to program the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU in the following paragraphs. External Page/Door Lock Relay Options (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB may be programmed for either the external page function or the door lock control function. (See Figures 6-7, and 6-8.) When configured in Program 77-1 for the external page function, the relay controls an external music source connected to the PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU to provide BGM over external speakers. When a paging announcement is made over the external speakers, the external page relay mutes the BGM. When configured in Program 77-1 for the door lock control function, the relay controls an external door lock. When a door lock button at a digital or electronic telephone is pressed, the door lock control relay unlocks the door for three or six seconds, as specified in Program 771 (LED 20). 6-10 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for External Page Mute Option 1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to Off to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the external page function. 2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the jumper plug P10 on the PIOU or PEPU jumper plug to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is activated. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when external page is activated. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W1 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position as required: ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when external page is activated. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when external page is activated. 3. See Figures 6-7, and 6-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the external paging function. PIOU/PEPU PCB H Select Relay Function with Program 77-1 Door Lock or External Page Control Break DE.T P10 DE. R Make C SP.T0 600Ω (Duplex) SP.R0 SW4 SP0 PIOU 25 PR. Connectors PIN NO. Colour 32 7 . . R-O O-R 38 . Bk-Gn 13 . Gn-Bk Door Lock Control Page Amplifier Speaker . . Page or BGM from B_C_U Break P11 Control NH.T NH.R 34 9 . . Tape Player R-Br Br-R Make Select Relay Function with Program 77-1: Night Relay or MOH Control MDF Connections All wires should be jacketed CW1308 0.5mm twisted pairs Night Bell To Music On-Hold Input on CT KSU Notes Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously. Figure 6-7 1507 PIOU/PEPU Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-11 Peripheral Installation KSU Backplane TBI MDF SP.T Page and BGM 600 SP.R Break DE.R Break H DE Door Lock Control NH MOH Source Unit NH.T W2 Make K2 Mute Control DE.T W1 Make K1 Page Amplifier NH.R Night Bell Normal Open ALM.T Alarm Sensor Facility Alarm Unit W3 ALM ALM.R 1508 Normal Close C PIOUS Notes • All wiring connections must be CW1308 0.5 twisted pairs. • Dotted lines and solid lines differentiate optional connections where applicable; do not connect both options simultaneously. Relay Options: • K1 (DE): Door Lock or amp Mute Control; Program 77-1, LED 07 • K2 (NH): Night Relay or Music-on-Hold Control; Program 77-1, LED 05 • K1 & K2: 24VDC, 1 amp Maximum Figure 6-8 6-12 PIOUS Relay Control Functional Wiring Diagram Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Lock Control Function Note Only one door lock control is available using an optional PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) and only the optional PCB with the lowest Program 03 Code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the door lock function. 1. Set Program 77-1 LED 07 to On to configure the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB for the door lock control function (see Figure 6-9). 2. Set Program 77-1 LED 20 to Off for a three-second door lock activation time, or set LED 20 to On for a six-second door lock activation time. 3. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P10 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 7 and 32) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the W1 jumper plug on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: H ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s door lock button is pressed. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (DET and DER) when a station’s Door Lock button is pressed. C 4. See Figure 6-9 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the door lock control function. Note Unlock Door 0 (DRLK 0) PIOU/PEPU assigned to digital and electronic telephones in Program 39 with Code 71. B DET M 25-Pair Amphenol MDF PIN 34, R-BR P10 To Door Lock PIN 9, BR-R DER See Program 77-1, LED 07, 20 for Relay Options Door Lock 0 Button K1 PIOUS Break DET W1 Make K1/P10 (24VDC, 1.0 amp Max.) 1509 Figure 6-9 MDF DE To Door Lock DER Terminal on Front Edge of PCB Door Lock Control Option (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-13 Peripheral Installation Door Lock Control with DDCB and HDCB In addition to the option interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, PEPU), each DDCB can provide one door lock control. ◆ Table 6-1 Strata CT DDCBs connect only to digital circuits (always circuit 5 on a PDKU) associated with ports 004, 012, 020, and 028. DDCB and HDCB/DRLK Assignments Guide DDCB/HDCB Number Port Number Door Lock 1 1 004 Unlock Door 1 (DRLK 1), Code 72 Door Lock 2 2 012 Unlock Door 2 (DRLK 2), Code 73 Door Lock 3 3 020 Unlock Door 3 (DRLK 3), Code 74 Door Lock 4 4 028 Unlock Door 4 (DRLK 4), Code 75 PDKU Important! H Program 39 Button Assignments Each DDCB door lock control reduces the maximum door phone capacity by one. Configure Each DDCB for the Door Lock Control Function C 1. Connect the door lock wire pair to the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4). 2. Set SW1 to the DOOR position. 3. Set SW2 to the LOCK position. 4. SW3 inside the DDCB can be set to open or close the door lock relay whenever a door lock button is pressed: if SW3 is in the “1-2” position, the relay closes when the button is pressed; if in the “2-3” position, the door lock relay opens when the button is pressed. Note 6-14 SW3 comes from the factory in the “1-2” position. 5. In Program 77-1, set the door lock activation for three or six seconds and enable the PDKU ports for DDCB connection. 6. In Program 77-2, enable the DDCB B-jack for door lock operation. 7. In Program 39, assign door lock buttons to stations per the customer’s record sheet. 8. Check each telephone door lock button from each station: the DDCB modular B-jack (pins 3 and 4) will momentarily open or close (three or six seconds) when the button is pressed. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Relay Control Contact 1 DDCB A 2 3 4 5 PDKU (See Chapter 4 Wiring Diagrams) B 3 Strata CT (Ports 004, 012, 020, 028) 4 C 4 3 4 1 2 3 1 4 2 MDFB Door Phone 2 Relay Contact A 5 to Customer Supplied RJ11 MDFB Device 3 3 1 Door Phone B or Door Lock Control 2 4 RJ11 3 Door Lock Control Contact2 RJ11 MDFB Door Phone C DDCB Wiring Chart See Chapter 4—Wiring for PDKU pin-out information. See Chapter 2—Installation for pin-out information. H to DDCB KSU Jack DT (34) / DR (9) to PIN 3 / 4 PT (35) / PR (10) to PIN 5 / 6 Notes 1. Relay control contact will close when the door phone is in the ringing, talk, or monitor state. 2. Relay contact specifications are -24VDC at 1.0 amp. max. Do not connect relay contacts to 120 AC commercial power. 4301 Figure 6-10 C PDKU Multiple Door Lock Control Options (DDCB/HDCB) Night Transfer/Night Relay Options with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU Night Transfer/Night Relay option may be programmed for either the Night Relay or the MOH relay function. (See Figures 6-7, and 6-8.) Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS, or PEPU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42 or 43) will provide the Night Transfer (NT) or MOH relay control function. When configured for the NT function with Program 77-1, the relay activates if the system is in the Night mode. The relay can be programmed to activate continuously when the Night Transfer button (only) is set for the Night mode (for indirect answering machine control), or to pulsate at one-second On/three-seconds Off (for a night bell) when incoming Exchange lines ring (Night Transfer 1~4 = tenant 1~4 Exchange lines) per Program *15 and 77-3. When configured for the MOH function with Program 77-1, the relay activates any time an Exchange line is on hold. In this configuration, the relay is normally used to control the MOH source. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-15 Peripheral Installation Configure PIOU, PIOUS or PEPU for Night Transfer 1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to Off to configure the Night/Hold Relay for the Night Transfer function (see Figures 6-7 and 6-8). 2. In Program 77-1, set LED 06 to provide continuous or pulsating relay activation: ◆ Off – Programs the relay for continuous activation when the Night Transfer button (only) is set in the Night mode. ◆ On – Programs the relay for pulsating activation when the Night Transfer 1~4 button for tenant 1~4 is set to the Night mode and an Exchange line rings. Note H Exchange lines must be enabled in Program 78 for the Night Transfer pulsating relay function. 3. Set in Programs 87, 88, and 89 the Exchange lines that will activate the relay (when the system is in the Night mode). 4. Assign, in Program 39, the Night Transfer buttons to telephones that should be able to set the Strata CT system into the Night mode. 5. Assign in Programs 29-1~29-4 a Night Transfer button on all direct station selection consoles that are to transfer the Strata CT system into the Night mode. 6. If tenant operation is required, set in Program *15 the Exchange lines for tenant 1 through tenant 4 operation. 7. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is activated. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when the night relay is activated. C ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the jumper W2 on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when the night relay is activated. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when night relay is activated. 8. See Figures 6-7, and 6-8 for wiring/interconnecting details. Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the night relay function. Note 6-16 Door phones programmed to ring over external page in the Night mode do not activate the Night Transfer feature, per Program 77-1. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Configure PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU for MOH Relay Control 1. In Program 77-1, set LED 05 to On to configure the Night/MOH relay for the MOH relay function (see Figures 6-8 and 6-9). 2. If using a PIOU or PEPU, set the P11 jumper plug on the PIOU or PEPU to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any Exchange line is on hold. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (pins 9 and 34) when any Exchange line is on hold. ...or If using a PIOUS, solder the W2 jumper on the PIOUS to the MAKE or BREAK position, as required: ◆ MAKE – Shorts the normally open contacts (NHT and NHR) when any Exchange line is on hold. ◆ BREAK – Opens the normally closed contacts (NHT and NHR) when any Exchange line is on hold. 3. H Connect the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU to the MDF as required for the MOH Relay function. External Speaker Unit (HESB) Options Strata CT systems provide three options utilising an HESB: C ◆ ◆ ◆ Loud Speaker Amplification Amplified Speaker Talkback Amplified Speaker System hardware requirements vary depending on the HESB option selected. See the following installation procedures for the hardware requirements for each option. Loud Speaker Amplification Option The loud speaker amplification option enables the voice first or ringing signal tone to be amplified without the use of other manufacturers’ equipment. The voice first and signal tone can be amplified on all electronic and digital telephones equipped with HHEU PCBs and HESB. (See Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus..) The HESB automatically turns Off once the ringing call or voice first has been manually answered from the electronic or digital telephone. This turn-off feature prevents audio feedback problems. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-17 Peripheral Installation Installing the HESB Loud Speaker Amplification in Digital Telephones 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 2 and 10 on the HESB TB1 terminal block (Figure 6-11). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5 on the HESB TB2 terminal block. 3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A cable in the telephone per Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4 for more information.. Note H HESB connections made in Steps 4~6 can be accomplished using the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC65A using a modular block. 5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC65A using a modular block. 6. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the yellow (L2) wire of the HESC-65A cable using a modular block. 7. Connect the customer supplied +12VDC power supply lead (+12V) to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and into a 240VAC, 50Hz power source. Important! If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. C 6-18 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation HESB (Rear View) Volume Control (+) (-) Internal Wiring: Jumper Wires: TB1 2-10 TB2 4-5 TBI 1 2 3 4 Voice 6 1 3 4 (L2) TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Not Used 240VAC maximum 240VAC to 12 VDC CW1308 0.5 Jacketed Twisted Pair from Digital Telephone to HESB TB2 1 2 3 4 5 12V 0V Power Supply MDF 66 Block Jumpers Voice Door Phone 12V 0V Station Cabling A B H (+) R 25-Pair Cable PDKU (CKT 1~8) Jacketed Twisted Pair (CW1308 0.5) Y(L2) LJU Slave Western Electric 4 or 6 way LJU 654321 654321 123456 C (-) GN 123456 Modular HESC-65A Cable Station (-) Green (L2) Yellow (+) Red OCA Strap + R607 Do Not Cut P601 HHEU (V.3 or .4) 2000 or 2500 Series Digital Telephone Install HHEU Circuit (V.3 or .4) or HHEU2 card into base of DKT per HHEU installation information in Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus 4302 Important! Figure 6-11 See Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB. HESB/Digital Telephone with Loud Speaker Amplification Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-19 Peripheral Installation Installing the HESB Loud Speaker Amplification in Electronic Telephones 1. On the HESB TB1 terminal block: connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7, and connect another jumper between terminals 5 and 8 (see Figure 6-12). 2. On the HESB TB2 terminal block, connect a jumper between terminals 4 and 5. 3. Install an HHEU PCB and HESC-65A (or HESC-65A) cable in the telephone per Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus before proceeding with Step 4 for more information.. Note H C HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 can be made with the HESB VOICE modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect terminal 1 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the red (+) wire of the HESC-65 cable using a modular block. 5. Connect terminal 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to the green (-) wire of the HESC65 cable using a modular block. 6. Connect terminal 3 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 3 of the electronic telephone’s modular block (VOICE A). 7. Connect terminal 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to pin 4 of the electronic telephone’s modular block (VOICE B). 8. Connect the customer suppled 12VDC power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the power supply’s 0V lead to terminal 2. 9. Plug the privided power cord into the power supply and to a 240VAC, 50Hz power source. Important! ● Make sure the AC power is within the specified limits shown in Step 9. If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. ● Cut the EX-SP and HHEU straps on telephones and do not cut the OCA strap or R607 on the HHEU (see Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus for details). Testing the Loud Speaker Amplification Option 1. Test the AC input voltage. See Step 9, above. 2. Make an Exchange line or station call to the station configured for the loud speaker amplification. Ringing will be heard over the HESB. 3. Use a small, slotted screwdriver to turn the volume control on the back of the HESB to the desired level and adjust the ring volume control on the telephone. 4. If ringing is heard at the station, but not over the HESB, check the following while the station is ringing: ◆ Using a suitable voltmeter, measure voltage across terminals 1 (+) and 2 (-) of the HESB TB1 terminal block. Voltage indication should be 4.5~5VDC. Note 6-20 Ringing stops once the call is manually answered. There should be NO voltage potential across terminals 1 and 2. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation ◆ If voltage is not as specified during ringing, check that the telephone wiring connections to the HESB have been made properly (wires to terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block may have been reversed). Important! See Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus for instructions to cut EXSP and HHEU jumpers on the electronic telephone main PCB. HESB (Rear View) Volume Control (+) (-) VOICE A VOICE B Internal Wiring: Jumper Wires: TB1 5-8 6-7 TB2 4-5 TBI 1 2 3 4 Voice 6 1 3 4 TB1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Jumpers 654321 654321 Not Used H Modular Connectors May Be Used 240 VAC to 12 VDC 240 VAC maximum MDF TB2 1 2 3 4 5 12V 0V Power Supply CW1308 0.5 mm Jacketed Twisted Pair from Electronic Telephone to HESB Voice Door Phone 12V 0V Jumper Station Cabling Voice A Voice B Voice A Voice B Data A1 Data B1 C (+) (-) 25-Pair Cable Jacketed Twisted Pair (CW1308 0.5mm) 4or 6 Way LJU Slave LJU Slave PEKU (CKT 1~8) 654321 654321 123456 123456 1513 BS6312 Modular Cord Station Green 3 (-) 2 1 (+) P601 Red RJ11 Type 4 or 6 Way Connector HESC-65 or HESC-65A Cable OCA Strap Do Not Cut R607 HHEU Electronic Telephone 6500-Series Figure 6-12 Install HHEU Circuit Card into base of EKT per instructions in Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus. HESB/Electronic Telephone with Loud Speaker Amplification Wiring Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-21 Peripheral Installation Amplified Speaker Option The amplified speaker option enables the HESB to be configured as a paging speaker. The HESB is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600-ohm page output to provide an amplified external speaker. ➤ H To install the HESB amplified speaker option 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 6-13). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 6 and 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. 4. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 5. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 6. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. If using a PIOUS connect the PIOUS 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TBI terminal block. 7. Connect the power supply’s +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 8. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 240VAC, 50Hz power source. 9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position. Important! C ➤ 6-22 If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. To test the amplified speaker option 1. Make an external page. The page should be heard over the HESB. 2. Adjust the HESB volume control to the desired level. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation PIOUS TB1 MDF SPT 600Ω Page Output SPR SPT (38, BK-GN) PIOU or PEPU SPR (13, GN-BK) 600Ω Page Output Jacketed Twisted Pair CW1308 0.5 Block Pin NO.s 1 25 Note Only one interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) may provide amplified speaker output. 26 50 MDF Volume Control 25-Pair Cable Jumper Wires: TB1 1-2 5-8 6-7 H TB1 Modular Connector May Be Used TB2 3-4 5-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 654321 Not Used Internal Wiring: TBI 3 4 Voice Voice 3 4 TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 Note • C Door Phone 12V 0V The 600 ohm page output sends three types of signals during system operation: • Voice page • Background music • Night ringing 12V 0V VDC Jumpers HESB (Rear View) 4303 Power Supply 240VAC to 12 VDC Figure 6-13 HESB/Amplified Speaker Wiring Talkback Amplified Speaker Option The talkback amplified speaker option enables a talkback speaker to be provided in areas where a telephone is not needed. In this configuration, the HESB is connected to the PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU 600 ohm (duplex) output and is used as the amplifier and speaker. A door phone unit (MDFB) is connected to the HESB, and serves as a microphone to provide talkback operation. (The MDFB push-button is inoperative, and the unit serves only as a microphone for talkback and not as the normal door phone.) Note The PIOU, PIOUS, and PEPU 600 ohm is a two-way (duplex) page output compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers – door phone not required for talkback. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-23 ➤ To install the HESB talkback amplified speaker 1. Connect a jumper between terminals 1 and 2 of the HESB TB1 terminal block (see Figure 6-14). 2. Connect a jumper between terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. 3. Connect a jumper between terminals 5 and 6 of the HESB TB2 terminal block. Note 4. HESB connections made in Steps 4~7 may be accomplished using the HESB VOICE and door phone modular jack instead of the TB1 terminal block. Connect terminal 7 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L1 of the MDFB. 5. Connect terminal 8 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin L2 of the MDFB 6. Connect terminal 9 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 1 of the MDFB. 7. Connect terminal 10 of the HESB TB1 terminal block to Pin 2 of the MDFB. 8. If using a PIOU or PEPU, connect the PIOU or PEPU 600-ohm page output (pins 13 and 38) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. ...or If using a PIOUS, connect the PIOUS 600-ohm page output (SPT and SPR) to terminals 3 and 4 of the HESB TB1 terminal block. H 9. Set the PIOU or PEPU SW4 switch to the SPO position. 10. Connect the customer supplied power supply +12V lead to terminal 1 of the HESB TB2 terminal block, and connect the 0V lead to terminal 2. 11. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 240VAC 50Hz power source. C Important! ➤ If AC voltage is not within range, have a qualified electrician correct the problem. To test the talkback amplified speaker 1. Make an external page. Page will be heard over the HESB. 2. Verify that someone speaking into the door phone can be heard at the paging station. (With this application, pressing the door phone button is not required to talk back through the door phone.) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-24 Peripheral Installation MDFB (Rear View) Door Phone Talkback Microphone 1 PIOUS TB1 MDF SPR Jacketed Twisted Pair CW1308 0.5 SPT (38, BK-GN) <Duplex> SPR (13, GN-BK) MDF Volume Control 25 Pair Cable L1 L2 1 2 Jumper Wires: TB1 1-2 C Jacketed Twisted Pair CW1308 0.5 Duplex PIOU or PEPU H L1 L2 SPT 600Ω Page Output 600Ω Page Output 2 TB2 3-4 5-6 Internal Wiring: TBI 4 3 TBI 7 8 9 10 Voice 4 3 Door Phone 4 3 2 5 TB1 Modular Connector May Be Used 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 654321 Voice 654321 Door Phone 12V 0V TB2 1 2 3 4 5 6 12V 0V Notes • The 600 ohm duplex page output is compatible with most commercially available talkback amplifiers. – MDFB not required. • Only one interface PCB (PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU) may provide talkback amplified speaker. Figure 6-14 Jumpers HESB (Rear View) 4304 Power Converter 240VAC ± 10VAC to 12VDC HESB/Talkback Amplified Speaker Wiring Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-25 Peripheral Installation HESB Wall Mounting Some applications may require that the HESB is mounted on a wall or other vertical surface. ➤ To wall mount the HESB One Wall Mounting Hole 6 151 Figure 6-15 H HESB Wall Mounting 1. Find a suitable location on the mounting surface for the HESB (see Figure 6-15). 2. Screw a 1.25-inch panhead wood screw into the mounting surface. 3. Hang the HESB from the screw. T001B Relay Unit Options The T001B unit provides a relay that can be activated by the ringing generated by a digital or electronic key telephone. The device attatched to the T001B needs to be independantly powered with a 12VDC supply (this power supply is supplied as standard with every T001B unit). The relay inside the T001B unit will close as soon as it detects the ringing of the extension being called and will activate the device connected. A HHEU must also be installed in the telephone and a HESC65 (or HESC65A) cable fitted (see Chapter 5 – Station Apparatus). The devices that can be connected to the T001B unit are as follows: C ◆ ◆ ◆ A loud ringing Bell/Klaxon A flashing Light An Electronic Alarm/Siren Note Care must be taken in choosing the device to be connected, as when the relay closes having detected the ringing, the noise the chosen device generates will be constant. This can cause some confusion with different types of alarms e.g. fire alarms. If connecting a flashing light ensure that the device has its own integral relay to generate the flashing, (this is usually achieved by the device using a heat sensitive coil). System Hardware Requirements System hardware requirements are that a HHEU is installed in the telephone with a HESC-65 cable, and the customer supplied, specified device to be connected. 6-26 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation T001B Installation Install the T001B unit in accordance with the following procedures (see Figure 6-16): 1. Install the HHEU and HESC-65 cable into the telephone. 2. Connect the other end of the HESC-65 cable into the T001B unit. 3. Connect the 12V power supply to the terminal strip inside the T001B relay unit, the positive lead to pin 3 and the negative lead to pin 1. Ensure that the power supply is set for 12V. 4. Connect the customer supplied bell, flashing lamp or electronic alarm to the terminal strip inside the T001B relay unit, the positive lead to pin 4 and negative lead to pin 2. 5. Plug the provided power cord into the power supply and to a 240VAC, 50Hz power source. T001B Relay Unit Test Test the T001B Relay Unit installation in acoordance with the following steps: 1. H Make a call to the extension the unit is connected to. The bell or electronic alarm should continually ring, or if a flashing lamp is fitted, it should flash. 2. Ensure that when the telephone is answered and you cease ringing the extension the device stops ringing or flashing. 3. If the device does not ring or flash when the extension is called then using a suitable voltmeter check that the handset is providing 4.5 - 5V across pins 1 & 6 of HESC cable. TB1 1 COM DC 2 DEVICE 3 +12 VDC 4 DEVICE + (TB1 - Pins 1 & 2 internally linked) C WE6 FEMALE SOCKET + - 1 2 3 5V 4 5 6 TB1 2 RLA + - D1 COIL 5V 6 RLB 14 1 COIL 12V 8 10 Figure 6-16 4 3 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 T001B Installation/Configuration Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-27 Peripheral Installation External Page Options Strata CT systems equipped with a PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB offer a variety of external paging options, each of which includes a BGM option. The PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU PCB with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) is required to support these options: ◆ ◆ ◆ Paging with BGM (same amplifier) – available with PIOU, PIOUS, or PEPU Zone Paging with BGM (separate amplifiers) – available with PIOU Zone Paging with BGM (multiple amplifiers) – available with PIOU External Page Option Installation All paging connections are made via the PIOU or PEPU Amphenol connectors or the PIOUS TB1 terminal to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF). Paging (Single-zone) with BGM (Same Amplifier) Paging and BGM are amplified by a common customer-supplied paging amplifier. When the external page access code is dialled, the external page control relay is activated, which applies a short (or opens the contacts) to the amplifier mute control to mute the music. H➤ C 6-28 To install External Page (single zone) with BGM (same amplifier) 1. Connect input 1 from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect to SPT and SPR of the PIOUS (see Figure 6-18). 2. Connect the paging amplifier mute terminal to pins 7 and 32 of the PIOU or PEPU; or connect to DET and DER of the PIOUS. 3. Connect the music source to input 2 of the paging amplifier. 4. Connect the speaker to the paging amplifier output. 5. Verify that the PIOU or PEPU P10 jumper plug is in the MAKE position or that the PIOUS W1 jumper wire is in the MAKE position. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation PIOU/PEPU External Paging Amp MDF 600Ω Input 1 SPT (38) Night Ring and Page from KSU Backplane SPR (13) B P10 DET (32) Mute 2 External Page/ Door Lock Relay (See Program 77-1) M DER (7) Input 2 PIOU/PEPU Pin Numbers 25-Pair Cable BGM Music Source KSU Backplane SPT Night Ring and Page from KSU Backplane 600Ω Break Make K1 C SPR 600 External Paging Amp Input 1 H MDF TB1 P10 DET DER DE External Page/ Door Lock Relay (See Program 77-1) Mute 2 Input 2 BGM Music Source 1517 CT I&M Note Figure 6-17 The PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU PCB with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide External Page options CT Page and BGM Using the Same Amplifier (PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU) Refer to Table 6-2 with Figures 6-18 and 6-19. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-29 Peripheral Installation Table 6-2 Paging Zones and Access Codes Access Codes B1CU, B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU Access Codes B5CAU/BU equipment with a PIOU All Call Page and External #39 #39 All Call Page #30 #30 1 #35 #351 2 #36 #352 3 #37 #353 4 #38 #354 Zones H 5 Not Available #355 6 Not Available #356 7 Not Available #357 8 Not Available #358 Zone Paging with BGM (Separate Amplifiers) Provides multiple-zone paging capability. The output of the paging amplifier is routed back to the PIOU, where it is switched to one of four sets of speakers by PIOU Relays K1 through K4. The relay selected is determined by the access code dialled by the station user. Default access codes are: Table 6-3 C B5CAU/BU More than 1 PIOU Relay Access Codes PIOU Relay Access Codes K1/zone 1 = #35 or #351 K1/zone 5 = #355 DKT LCD Display External Paging A or E K2/zone 2 = #36 or #352 K2/zone 6 = #356 External Paging B or F K3/zone 3 = #37 or #353 K3/zone 7 = #357 External Paging C or G K4/zone 4 = #38 or #354 K4/zone 8 = #358 External Paging D or H See Program 90 in the Strata CT Programming Manual. EXT + ALL CALL PAGE Note Multi-zone page output rating is 30W/maximum at 300 ohms. An all zone page code (#39) is also available as an option (see Program 10-2). When the All Page code is dialled, all four or eight relays are activated to permit simultaneous paging to all speaker zones and all digital and electronic telephone speakers. 6-30 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation ➤ To install the page and background music features on the same amplifier 1. Connect the input from the paging amplifier to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see Figure 6-18). 2. Connect the BGM music source to the music amplifier input. 3. Connect the paging amplifier output to the “M” contact’s PIOU relays K1~K4 and the “C” terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers. 4. Connect the BGM music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to “C” of zone 1 through zone 4 or zone 5 through zone 8 speakers. PIOU Jacketed Twisted Pair CW1308 0.5mm B K1 PGOUT 1 (15) A PGIN 1 (40) C Zone 1 / Zone 5 M B K2 PGOUT 2 (17) A PGIN 2 (42) C PGOUT 3 (19) PGIN 3 (44) A PGOUT 4 (21) PGIN 4 (46) A Zone 2 / Zone 6 M B K3 H Zone 3 / Zone 7 C M B K4 Paging Amp RJ11 JACK Speaker Common Line C Output SPR (13) Input SPT (38) 600Ω C Zone 4 / Zone 8 C M PG Common (23) Music Amp Optional Connection Output BGM Music Source (To External Speaker Only) Input Night Ringing and/or Page from KSU Backplane PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cable 1518 Notes See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing Exchange line and Tenant (1-4) ● assignment options. ● ● Figure 6-18 Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + #59 to pick-up night ringing Exchange lines. The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and Night Ring options. PIOU Zone, Page/BGM/Night Ring (Separate Amplifiers) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-31 Peripheral Installation Zone Paging with BGM (Multiple Amplifiers) Provides multiple-zone paging capability (same as “External Page Option Installation” on Page 6-28) but separate amplifiers are used for each zone. ➤ To install zone and night ringing with multiple amplifiers 1. Connect the inputs from the paging amplifiers to pins 13 (SPR) and 38 (SPT) of the PIOU (see Figure 6-19). 2. Connect the music source to the music amplifier input. 3. Connect the paging amplifier outputs to “M” of the PIOU Relays K1~K4 and to “C” of zone 1 through zone 4 speakers. 4. Connect the music amplifier output to terminal 23 (PG COMMON) of the PIOU, and to the “C” terminal of zone 1 through zone 4 speakers. 5. Connect zone 1 through zone 4 speakers “A” terminal to the “B” contact of the PIOU relays K1~K4, respectively. H C 6-32 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Page Acces Codes ( ): MDF PIOU B K1 Jacketed Twisted Pair (CW1308 0.5mm) PGOUT 1 (15) A Zone 1 (#)35 PGIN 1 (40) C M (+) Output Input B K2 Amp 1 (-) A PGOUT 2 (17) Zone 2 (#)36 PGIN 2 (42) C M (+) Output Input B K3 Amp 2 (-) PGOUT 3 (19) A PGIN 3 (44) Zone 3 (#)37 C M H (+) Output Input B K4 Amp 3 (-) A PGOUT 4 (21) PGIN 4 (46) Zone 4 (#)38 C M (+) Amp 4 Output Input C Night Ringing or Page from KSU Backplane (-) C SPT (38) 600Ω J7 SPR (13) RJ11 Jack (+) PG Common (23) PIOU Pin Numbers ( ) 25-Pair Cables ● ● ● ● BGM Music Source & Amplifier Output C (-) 1519 Notes See Table 6-2 on Page 6-30 for paging access codes. See Programs 78-1, *15 and 77-3 for Night Ringing Exchange line and Tenant (1-4) assignment options. Dial [PDN] or [PhDN] + #59 to pick-up night ringing Exchange lines. The PIOU with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43) will provide the External Page and Night Ring options. Figure 6-19 PIOU Zone Paging and Night Ringing with Multiple Amplifiers Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-33 Peripheral Installation Night Ringing over Selected Page Zones In systems shared by 1~4 tenants, each tenant’s Exchange lines can be assigned to night ring separate PIOU external page zones. This feature can also be used in one-tenant systems. With shared systems, for example, Tenant 1’s night ringing Exchange lines could be programmed to ring PIOU external page zones 1 and 2, while Tenant 2’s lines could be programmed to ring zones 3 and 4. In non-shared systems, night ringing Exchange lines can be assigned to ring all of the zones or just selected zones. Programming Exchange Lines to Ring Selected PIOU Page Zones Program 78-1: Assigns Exchange lines, Tenant 1 through Tenant 4, that will night ring over PIOU external page zones. Program *15: Assigns Exchange lines to Tenant 1 through Tenant 4. Lines are initialised as Tenant 1. Program 77-3: Assigns Tenant 1 through Tenant 4 Exchange lines to night ring specific PIOU external page zones. Program 39: Assigns appropriate Night Transfer and Tenant Pick-up (for Tenant or Non-Tenant systems) buttons to electronic and digital telephones. Note H Any station can pick up Exchange lines that night ring over external page zones by pressing the [PDN] and dialling #59. PIOU Zone Paging Installation See “External Page Option Installation” on Page 6-28, paragraph 4 and Figure 6-18 for installation instructions. C SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Options An SMDR printer or call accounting device may be connected to the system to provide a hard-copy record of station activity. The Strata CT system can record incoming, outgoing, and transferred calls, as well as Account Code entries and names and telephone numbers of answered DDI and ISDN calls. Call record data is printed out at the completion of each eligible call. SMDR format is ASCII-formatted, 8-bits, no parity, 1-stop bit. To support the SMDR printer/call accounting device option, a Strata CT system must be equipped with a PIOU, PIOUS,...or ◆ For Strata CT only, a RSIU/RSIS, PIOU, and PIOUS Connection of the printer or call accounting device to the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS PCB is accomplished with a 3-pair modular cord (seven feet maximum) and a TTY-PC-CABLE/ PPTCIA-3M connector adapter (Figure 6-21, “PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable Connections”). Note PIOU, PIOUS will be 300 or 1200 bps (see Chapter 3 – Universal Slot PCBs); RSIU/RSIS can be 1200~9600 bps (see Program 76). The PIOU, PIOUS and RSIU/RSIS contain a call record buffer which stores call record data (up to 50 calls) when the printed or call accounting device is turned Off, or when no device is connected to the SMDR port. No further call records are stored after the buffer is filled. When the printer or call accounting device is made operational, “ERROR BUFFER OVERFLOW” prints out to indicate the buffer was full, and that some call information may have been lost. 6-34 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Note If PIOU, PIOUS or RSIU/RSIS are assigned as SMDR simultaneously in programming, RSIU/RSIS will operate as SMDR – not PIOU, PIOUS. A display of the customer database (Figure 6-22 on Page 6-41) can also be printed using the SMDR RS-232 port by running Program 97. To program SMDR, use Program 60. The SMDR port is active only on the PIOU or PIOUS with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43), or the RSIU or RSIS Port programmed with code x2 in Program 76-1. SMDR sends out special names for the following types of calls: ◆ MSS – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls to stations. MSS prints only on DISA calls that are answered after the threshold time (set in Program 60-2). If the call is answered before the threshold time, the call will register as a normal incoming call and the MSS/transfer portion of the call will not print out. Note ◆ H The call threshold time – the length of time that a call must be in progress before it is registered by SMDR – can be set for either 1.0 or 10 seconds in Program 60-2. MODEM – Prints on calls to the RMDS or IMDU remote maintenance modem (Station #19). ◆ DISA – Prints on DISA and External Call Forward calls in which Exchange lines are accessed for trunk-to-trunk outside calling. Figure 6-20, “SMDR Output Breakdown” shows a breakdown of the SMDR printout and describes the contents of each column. The following examples show call record samples and describe the sequence of events that generated the call records. If a subaddress for a call is received or sent on an ISDN call, it is included in the SMDR. Subaddresses may/may not be received/sent on all ISDN calls C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-35 Peripheral Installation . 2890 CT I&M 10 20 30 36 63 44 79 98 110 138 Digits 1++++++++0+++++++++0+++++++++0++++++++-----+++--------+++++---++++++-------++++++++---+ Strata CT ABBBC DDDD EEEE FF:FF GG:GG;GG HH;HH IIIIIIIIII J----------J K------K L------------L--M (*2) (*1) Strata CT H C A Indicates a disconnect call. Field Number 1 B Field Number (2~4) Exchange Line Number C C = Caller ID Call; D = DDI Call. Field Number 5 D [PDN] of the Station making/answering a call. Field Number (7~10) E Primary, Secondary, or Phantom Directory Number which made/an- Field Number (12-15) swered the call. Blank if call is made from an Exchange line button. (*1) F Time of Day (HH:MM). G Call Duration (HH:MM:SS) Field Number (17-21) H Exchange Line Incoming Ring Duration Before Answer (MM:SS) Field Number (32-36) I Station to which the Exchange line was transferred. Field Number (38-41) 10 digits (*2) J Outgoing Telephone Number I/C, Caller ID, O/G: 1~20 digits CLI/DDI: 11 digits/6 digits (Format: *CLI number*DDI number*) Field No. (49~68) MAX 20 digits Field Number (23-30) K DDI Name (Caller ID, or Account code) Field Number (70~85) MAX 16 digits L Sub-address (O/G call) Field Number (87~106) MAX 20 digits M Sub-address (I/C call) Field Number (108~127) MAX 20 digits (*2) The first column of IIIII. ’C’ = This terminal (IIII) DDI In the case of Network trans IIII a ‘T’ = This terminal (IIII) DDI Space = RT was performed for that extension Figure 6-20 6-36 SMDR Output Breakdown Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation SMDR Printout Examples Note SMDR printout “time of day” and month/day/year (MM/DD/YY) is the same as the system clock time/date set by the station connected to Port 000. SMDR MM/DD/ YY prints out each time 50 call records are generated and at midnight each day. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Exchange Lines Note DISA station calls print out as MSS or DISA. Example 1 – Ring, No Answer DISA Call Call Sequence A ◆ Outside caller rings Exchange line 003. (Exchange line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.) ◆ Line 003 returns internal dial tone to caller after one or two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ◆ Caller does nothing. DH 200 rings but is not answered. H ◆ After 32 seconds, call is disconnected. ◆ Printout A prints after disconnect at 4:59. Printout A: 003 MSS 04:59 00:00;25 00;05 Example 2 – DISA Internal Station Call Call Sequence B C ◆ Outside caller rings Exchange line 003. (Exchange line 003 is programmed as a DISA line.) ◆ Line 003 returns intercom dial tone to caller after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ◆ Caller dials 203. ◆ After 48 seconds from start of call, station 203 answers. ◆ Printout B prints after station 203 answers the call at 4:32. Note MSS will not print if the call is answered before the threshold time set in Program 60-2. Printout B: 003 MSS 04:32 00:00;48 00;05 203 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-37 Peripheral Installation Example 3 – DISA Outgoing Exchange Line Call Note DISA Exchange line calls print out as DISA. Call Sequence C ◆ Outside caller rings Exchange line 001. (Line 001 is programmed as DISA.) ◆ Line 001 returns intercom dial tone after two ring cycles (5~6 seconds). ◆ Caller dials #7003 to access Exchange line 003 (outgoing). ◆ Caller dials the DISA security code and receives Exchange dial tone. ◆ Caller dials the telephone number and converses when the call is answered. ◆ Caller hangs up. ◆ The call releases, and Printout C prints after the call disconnects at 12:22. Notes H ● If the Exchange provides the Calling Party Control or Auto Release (AR) signal (see Program 15-0 and 15-3), the call disconnects when either party hangs up. A “*” will precede the Exchange line number in Release 3 on the printout if the call is disconnected by the CPC or AR signal. ● If the CPC or AR signal is not sent, the Exchange lines will remain seized until the DISA disconnect timer releases the call (see Program 12). Printout C Auto Release signal 003 MSS 12:20 00:00;03 00:05 DISA (outgoing) *003 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (outgoing) C 001 DISA 12:22 00:02;01 (incoming) Disconnect Timer 001 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (incoming) 003 DISA 12:24 00:04;57 (outgoing) Note 6-38 The “MSS” entry prints out only if the call was connected after the SMDR threshold, 1.0 or 10 seconds. The threshold is set in Program 60-2. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation SMDR Programming Program 03 ◆ ◆ The SMDR output is provided by the PIOU or PIOUS with the lowest code assigned (41, 42, or 43). If using RSIU or RSIS PCB in slot 11 for SMDR, set Program 03 code 49 for slot 11. Notes ● Program 60 ◆ ◆ H C RSIU/RSIS Program 76-1 code x2 overrides PIOU/PIOUS SMDR assignments and code 49 for RSIU/RSIS. Item 1: Selects Caller ID, DDI or Account Code to be sent out the SMDR Port. Item 2: Selects the minimum duration (1.0 or 10 seconds) of calls that will be registered by SMDR. Any call that lasts less than the set time will not be recorded. ◆ Item 3: Selects the records of outgoing calls or outgoing and incoming calls to be printed. ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Item 4: Selects the digit length of Account Codes (4 to 15 digits). Program 76 ◆ Item 5: Allows only long distance call records to be printed. Item 6: DISA security code. Item 7: Credit card calling digit length. RSIU/RSIS is used to interface to the SMDR device use Program 76 to make the appropriate RSIU/RSIS SMDR programming assignments. SMDR Printer/Call Accounting Device Installation 1. Connect the interface cable and the TTY-PC-CABLE or PPTC1A-3M adapter from thePIOU, PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS, or SMDR port to the SMDR printer or call accounting device DB25 or DB9 connector. (See Figure 6-21 and PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS TTY and SMDR Wiring in Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more details.) 2. Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW1 switch to the appropriate bps rate – 1200~9600 bps), (PIOU/PIOUS – 300 or 1200 bps, RSIU/RSIS as determined by the baud rate of the printer or call accounting device (Program 76 set RSIU/RSIS bps rate). 3. Set the printer or call accounting device to no parity/8-bits/one stop bit. 4. Use Program 60 to set the system for the required SMDR printer/call accounting device options (See the following section and the Strata CT Programming Manual). Note Only the PIOU/PIOUS with the lowest code in Program 03 (41, 42, or 43) or RSIU/ RSIS with Program 76-1 code X2 will provide the SMDR output. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-39 Peripheral Installation Basic Connection RSIU or RSIS or PIOU or PIOUS DB25 or DB9 Plug 3-pair Modular Cord Strata CT Modular Jack SMDR Modular Jack Printer or Call Accounting Device Data Format: • ASCII • 8-bits • No parity • 1-stop bit Toshiba PPTC1A-5M (25 pin), TTY-PC-CABLE (9-pin) RS232, Modular Adapter Basic Wiring PIOU, SMDR Jack Modular Pin No. H C PPTC1A-5M Adapter Modular Pin No. DB25 Pin No. RS-232 Lead Name 1 to 6 to 3 2 to 5 to 2 TD 3 to 4 to 6 DSR 4 to 3 to 20 DTR 5 to 2 to 8 CD 6 to 1 to 7 SG 4 Jumper to 5 RTS to CTS RD 4305 Figure 6-21 PIOU/PIOUS SMDR Cable Connections System Database Printout Using SMDR Port If a printer is connected to the SMDR port, customer program information stored in the Strata CT BCU RAM may be printed out for reference (see Figure 6-22). Program 97 ◆ Enables system program data to be printed via the SMDR port. See Program 97 record sheet. Notes 6-40 ● An SMDR printer must be connected to the SMDR port to use the printout option selected by Program 97. ● Call record data is lost when program data is printed out with Program 97. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Program Number Port Number 81 001-249 ## System Programming ## 40 33 32 25 24 17 16 9 8 1 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 144 137136 129128 121 ## END OF PRINT Exchange Line Numbers Lines 41 ~ 80 Lines 81 ~ 120 Exchange Line Numbers ## 1523 CT I&M Figure 6-22 PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU/RSIS SMDR Port Data Dump Example Voice Mail Options H C Strata CT systems can support a Toshiba Stratagy or customer-supplied voice mail system. Voice mail systems connect to standard telephone circuits (RSTU or PSTU). The number of circuits required by each device depends on the customer’s voice mail requirements, such as the number of voice mail users. To support voice mail, the Strata CT RCBTU must have a BRCS installed. Voice mail integration is provided by Strata in-band tones and/or on Strata CT the Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) output of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS SMDI port. The PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU must be set with Program 03, code 43 or for RSIU/RSIS Program 03, code 49 and Program 76-1 with code x4 to provide SMDI output. See the SMDI section for more details about SMDI installation and operation. Toshiba Stratagy & Stratagy DK Voice Messaging Systems Strata DK systems are designed to support the full range of features offered by the Toshiba Stratagy and/or other Voice Mail systems. It provides various call routing, message handling, and information management features, including: ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Auto Attendant Call Forward to Voice Mailbox Message Waiting Indication Voice Mail Control from Digital and Electronic Telephones System Monitoring Feature Integration A block diagram of voice mail-to-PSTU/RSTU connection is shown in Figure 6-23, “Voice Mail Block Diagram”. Note BRCS on the Processor to allow VM DTMF dialling. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-41 Peripheral Installation For installation procedures, see: ◆ Chapter 3 – Universal Slot PCBs for PSTU and RSTU Processor RRCS 4, 8, or 12 MDF Voice Mail Machine PSTU/RSTU3 (CKT 1~8) H 25-Pin Cable (8 circuits per PSTU/RSTU) Standard Telephone Circuit Tip & Ring (1 Pair PerVM Port) 4306 Figure 6-23 Voice Mail Block Diagram Toshiba Stratagy Programming C Some features of Strata CT system programming were designed for Toshiba Stratagy or Stratagy DK systems, and do not necessarily apply to customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems. These programming features are: Answer (A) Tone The Strata CT stations send an answer tone to Stratagy when the station answers a Stratagy call. Disconnect (D) Tone The Strata CT stations send a disconnect tone to Stratagy when the station hangs up while connected to Stratagy. (D Tone is also sent to release the Stratagy Auto Attendant port when an outside Exchange line caller hangs-up and the Exchange provides a Calling Party Control (CPC) or Auto Release (AR) disconnect signal per Program 15-0 and 15-3). Notes 6-42 ● D Tone will not operate in all areas, because some Exchanges fail to provide the CPC or AR signal on loop start lines. ● Both A and D Tones provide more efficient Stratagy port use. Always enable these options. Both options are enabled by accessing Program 31, and setting LED 15 On. ● The CPC or AR signal of some Exchanges is not reliable and may occur during a Exchange line voice connection, causing the call to disconnect. If this occurs, disable CPC /AR Hold and CPC/AR for Voice Mail calls on all Exchange lines with Programs 15-0 and 15-3. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Recall (B) Tone Stations send a recall (B) tone to Stratagy whenever Stratagy answers a transfer (camp-on) recall from stations that did not answer a Stratagy blind transfer. (The B tone notifies Stratagy that the call is a recall and not a new call, allowing Stratagy to respond with the appropriate greeting.) For this feature to operate, RSTU or PSTU voice mail ports must have LEDs 19 and 20 turned On in Program 31. See “General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming” on Page 6-43 below for more information. Customer-supplied Voice Mail Messaging Systems Strata CT systems are designed to support a wide range of customer-supplied voice mail messaging systems. Depending on the voice mail system used, some of the features available with Toshiba Stratagy (See “Toshiba Stratagy & Stratagy DK Voice Messaging Systems” on Page 6-41) may be available with the customer-supplied system. General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming Voice mail (VM) RSTU or PSTU port programming is accomplished using Programs 31 and 10-2. (See Strata CT Programming Manual for more details.) VM programming features are as follows:l H VM Groups C Message Waiting (MW) Set/Cancel This feature groups VM RSTU or PSTU ports together so that message waiting set/cancel signals appear to originate from the lowest port in the VM group. All VM ports connected to a particular VM machine should be set in the same VM group (Program 31, LEDs 05~08). The same ports set in the Program 31 VM group should also be set in the designated VM Distributed Hunt Group in Program *40. If the VM machine has the ability to dial a code and the appropriate station numbers to set or cancel the message waiting LEDs on digital and electronic telephones, you can use Program 10-2, LED 04 to instruct the VM machine to set or cancel a MW LED. See the Strata CT Programming Manual for more information. Note Only dial codes #63 and #64 are set in the VM device configuration; the VM device dials the station number automatically to set/cancel the MW LED. No Conference VM Prevents undesired three-party connections during VM call transfers. All VM ports should be set for No Conference (Program 31, LED 09). Privacy Override Deny Prevents stations from overriding (breaking in) in-progress VM calls (Program 31, LED 18). End-to-End Signalling Enables VM port DTMF operation. All VM ports should be set for end-to-end signalling (Program 31, LED 17). Note The BRCS must be installed on the Processor to enable End-to-End Signalling. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-43 Peripheral Installation Receive Auto Call Forward ID Codes Provides auto digits from call forwarded stations to direct callers to station mailboxes. All VM ports should be set to receive auto ID code (Program 31, LED 16). Voice Mail Program Checklist Prior to Programming See Toshiba Stratagy Voice Processing documentation for other parameter settings. Programming Strata CT for Voice Mail ◆ Program 92: Initialisation clears voice mail auto dial codes. ◆ Program 03: Verifies that a BRCS is installed to enable the VM device to send DTMF tones. Also sets PIOU, PIOUS (code 43) or RSIU/RSIS (code 49) to enable the SMDI port (see Program 76 if installing RSIU or RSIS SMDI port). H C ◆ Program 04: Assigns station Intercom or Directory numbers [DN] to VM ports (initialised numbers recommended). ◆ Program 05: First digit of special codes #63 and #64 (initialised numbers recommended). ◆ Program 10-1: If the system is first set for voice, program the VM device to dial the suffix “1” after station numbers. ◆ Program 10-2: If LED 04 On for set/cancel operation and LED 06 On for the VM to detect 80 millisecond tones. Also set DTMF Tone return or No DTMF return options (LED 11 and 20). ◆ ◆ Program 10-3: Sets SMDI options. ◆ Program 31: Turn LEDs 04, and 15~20 On, and LED 05, 06, 07 or 08 On for the PSTU/ RSTU, ports that are connected to the Toshiba Stratagy VM ports. Turn LED 09 On for VM Auto Attendant “Supervised Transfer” operation; turn LED 09 Off for VM Auto Attendant “blind transfer” operation and/or VM two Exchange-line tandem connection. Do not set these options for telephone station ports. Program 13: If the VM device is the message centre, set the lowest standard telephone port in the Program 31 VM group as the message centre. Note 6-44 A, D, and B Tones should be enabled only for VM devices that respond to these tones. ◆ Program *32: Sets lowest standard telephone port if the Program 31 VM group as message centre for stations using VM. ◆ Program 33: Sets the PSTU/RSTU, ports that are connected to the VM ports to a hunting sequence, starting with the lowest port hunting to the next highest port, etc. The last hunt should be to an attendant station. Only use Program 33 if you ar not using Program *40 to set up a VMDM group. ◆ Program *34: Turns Off LED 01 to disable camp-on BOV tone to a VM port. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation H C ◆ Program 35: LEDs 01 and 02 must be On for stations to receive the message waiting indication (flashing LED) from a VM device. This program also turns On LED 03 for standard telephone ports that must support standard telephone message waiting lamps. It is advisable to turn Busy Station Transfer (LED 20) On for all VM/Auto Attendant ports, and to turn Busy Station Ringing (LED 19) On for all stations that must never be detected as busy when called by the VM/Auto Attendant port. Also turn LED 03 Off to disable standard telephone MW signal to VM ports. ◆ ◆ Program 36: Sets Fixed Call Forward to VM [DN] per customer requirements. ◆ Program 39: Sets the VM-related buttons on the digital and electronic telephones that will be used to communicate with the VM device. ◆ Program *40: Sets VM standard ports into a Distributed Hunt Group (same ports set as Program 31 VM group). ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Program 71 (1-3): Sets DDI extensions to ring VM Auto Attendant Ports. ◆ Programs 16, 40, 41, 45~48 and 50~56: Verifies that outgoing Exchange line access is allowed on VM ports to allow the VM beeper notification feature to operate. Program 37: Sets the transfer recall timer for the VM ports to 11~999 seconds minimum to allow Call Forward-No Answer to work on VM transferred calls. Station users can individually set CF-NA ring time from 8~60 seconds. Program 71-4: Sets the DDI VM ID code (for Inband Integration only, not SMDI). Program 76: Sets RSIU or RSIS SMDI port. Programs 81~89: Verifies that the ringing assignments to the VM devices are set per customer requirements. Voice Mail System Installation 1. Ensure that the RSTU/PSTU PCB is installed in the system per Chapter 3 – Universal Slot PCBs. 2. Connect the VM system to the selected RSTU/PSTU standard telephone port. (See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring) 3. Program the Strata CT system for the required VM features. (See “Toshiba Stratagy & Stratagy DK Voice Messaging Systems” on Page 6-41, paragraph 3 and “General Voice Mail (Standard Telephone Port) Programming” on Page 6-43.) 4. Perform additional VM system programming as applicable (See customer-supplied installation/programming manuals). Note Some VM devices may ring trip when called; in this case, set the square-wave ring voltage jumper to L (low position) on the PSTU2 PCB connected to the VM device. This is not necessary on RSTU PCBs because they have a sine-wave ring generator. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-45 Peripheral Installation Auto Attendant Auto Attendant operates like an automatic station attendant or switchboard operator that quickly and efficiently distributes calls to stations selected by callers. Incoming calls are greeted by an external announcement device that offers callers a menu of station locations associated with a number, such as 3 for Sales, 4 for Customer Service, etc. Callers pick the destination just by dialling the single number associated with it. The call is then transferred to the station. Callers can also dial the intercom number directly. This feature is available from three separate sources. ◆ ◆ ◆ Strata CT built-in Auto Attendant Voice Mail device Auto Attendant External Auto Attendant Strata CT Built-In Auto Attendant (AA) A built-in Auto Attendant feature is programmed into the Strata CT system software. To enable the built-in AA to function, BRCS (-4, -8 or -12) DTMF tone receiver PCB (see Chapter 2 – Strata CT Installation for BRCS and RKYS installation instructions). The customer must provide digital announcement device(s), on which the greeting and menu that the callers hear are recorded. The digital announcement devices must connect to Strata CT standard telephone circuits. There is a series of programs (explained later) in the Strata CT Programming Manual Record Sheets, which are for the built-in AA feature exclusively, not the other two AA feature applications. Callers must use a DTMF (tone) telephone to select AA dialling options. The built-in AA feature offers flexibility in answering calls. Calls follow the basic sequences described below and illustrated in Figure 6-24, “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences”. H C Sequence A The call is answered directly after being transferred from the Auto Attendant. The caller calls in on Exchange lines assigned for built-in Auto Attendant, receives a greeting along with a menu of dialling options, and then dials an option of the intercom number. The call is then transferred to a station, which answers the call. Sequence B The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an optional secondary announcement, where it will receive a new announcement and the same or additional dialling options. Some customers may not configure their AA system with a secondary announcement; if so, their unanswered calls would follow sequence C or D. Sequence C The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed to an alternate station(s) assigned in system programming, ringing assignments. Sequence D The call is not answered after being transferred from the Auto Attendant and is routed back to the primary announcement. This is probably the least desirable of the four sequences, since the caller hears a repeat of the announcement he just received seconds earlier. 6-46 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Note In all of the above sequences, the call can first ring telephones selected in system programming for 12 or 24 seconds, and then be routed to the Auto Attendant if not answered by any of the ringing stations. This is called Auto Attendant delayed ring. Caller Dials Auto Attendant Exchange Line Auto Attendant Delayed Ring ? Yes Ring Stations Per Program 81~89 No No Primary Announcement Greets Caller, Offers Dialling Options H Station Answers Before Delay Timeout ? Yes Caller Dials Option Caller Is Transferred To Dialled Option Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed To Secondary Announcement Call Is Answered C Sequence: A Figure 6-24 B Talk Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed To Alternate Stations C Call Is Not Answered And Is Routed Back To The Primary Announcement D 1693 Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences Built-in Auto Attendant Programming See Figures 6-24 and 6-25 for a comprehensive overview of built-in Auto Attendant (AA). ◆ Program 78 (61, 62, and 63): Exchange lines are assigned for built-in AA with this program. There is no limit to the number of lines that can be assigned for AA, and each line can be set for any or all of the ringing modes (DAY, DAY2, and NIGHT). See Programs 81~89 record sheet notes in the Strata CT Programming Manual. ◆ Programs 81~89: Assign stations to ring if AA callers do not dial or AA calls are not answered. Also, if not answered by a station set to ring during Immediate Ringing (or delay 2 ring), incoming calls can be set to ring built-in AA announcement ports on a Delayed Ringing basis. ◆ Program 03: An BRCS (-4, -8 or -12) must be installed on the Strata CT BCU for the system to interpret DTMF tones generated by the Exchange. Use this program to tell the system that the common control unit is equipped with an BRCS. Important! RKYS must also be installed on all processors. The RKYS does not need a Program 03 (or any other) program assignment. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-47 Peripheral Installation H ◆ Program 25-1: If there are no BRCS circuits or announcement devices available for an incoming Exchange line built-in AA call, the call will transfer to alternative station(s) (Programs 81~89) after a time duration assigned with this program. ◆ Program 23: As many as four digital announcement devices for primary announcements, each requiring one standard telephone station port (Figure 6-25), can be assigned. Callers receive primary announcements (60 secs. maximum announcement time) – which consist of the greeting along with the delivery of menu prompts – when they first call (they may also be rerouted back to the announcement after reaching a busy or ring no answer station). ◆ Program 24: Transferred calls that are unanswered at stations can be routed to a secondary announcement device (60 secs. maximum announcement time), which typically first informs the caller that the option they dialled was unavailable and then presents them with either the same options offered by the primary announcement device or some additional ones (Figure 6-25). ◆ Program 09: Tells the system where to transfer built-in AA calls after the caller has dialed in response to the delivered menu options. ◆ Program 60-6: Enter a DISA security code to prevent users from making unauthorised external calls via the AA DISA access (Dial *) feature. ◆ Program 26: There will be times when transferred AA calls are not answered after camping-on to a busy station. This program tells the system when to end the camp-on and to route the call to another destination (it could be a secondary announcement device or alternative stations per program 10-3, LED 18). If a station has Call Forward set, the call forwards to the proper destination instead of routing per AA Program 10-3, LED 18. ◆ Program 10-3: ◆ LED 18: Some customers may choose to configure their AA without a secondary announcement device. In these arrangements, transferred calls that are unanswered can be routed for normal ringing to some alternative stations set in Programs 81, 84, and 87, or back to the primary announcement device. LED 18 should be On if the calls should be routed to stations assigned in Programs 81, 84, and 87. It should be Off for the primary or secondary announcement device option. If LED 18 is selected, see LEDs 16 and 17 for disconnect timing options. C ◆ LED 15: If LED15 is On (and Music-on-Hold (MOH) is installed) the CT sends MOH to callers when the AA routes a call to ring or camp-on a station. If LED 15 is Off the CT send ring-back-tone to the caller. ◆ LEDs 16 and 17: Set LEDs 16 and 17 to tell the system when to disconnect, as a safeguard, built-in AA calls that have not been answered by stations. This feature assures that the loop start Exchange line that the call was made on is free for other calls if the caller hangs up before the call is answered. The initialised disconnect setting is 40 seconds. The other timing options available are 150 secs. and 350 secs. Set LEDs 16 and 17 for the desired time as follows: 40 seconds: LED 16 = Off. LED 17 = Off. 150 seconds: LED 16 = Off. LED 17 = On. 350 seconds: LED 16 = On. LED 17 = Off. Ground start lines disconnect automatically with this timer. ◆ 6-48 Program 15: Selects Automatic Release (AR) on Voice Mail, AA or voice calls. This will provide automatic release (if the calling party disconnects) without waiting for the safeguard timer in Program 10-3. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Built-in Auto Attendant Installation The built-in Auto Attendant feature only requires the installation of a feature key and customer-supplied announcement devices to deliver announcements to callers. The feature does not require the installation of any other devices. ➤ To install the customer-supplied digital announcement devices Note 1. In Figure 6-25 and elsewhere in this manual, announcement devices are referred to as A1 and A2. A1 designates a primary announcement device, and A2 a secondary announcement device. The prime marks following the designation distinguishes the multiple announcers from each other. Ensure that the PCB that will connect with the device is installed per: Chapter 3 – Universal Slot PCBs for the PSTU/RSTU 2. Connect the devices to the selected circuit per wiring diagrams: 3. Ensure that the feature key is correctly installed per: ◆ Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring ◆ Chapter 2 – Strata CT Installation, see BRCS on the BCU and RKYS installation H 4. Program the system per the instructions in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on Page 6-47. 5. Record the message and dialling prompts on the announcement device per the device manufacturer's instructions. MDF C Strata CT RSTU or PSTU To Standard Telephone Circuit A1 Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2 Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1'' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2'' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A1''' Digital Announcer To Standard Telephone Circuit A2''' Digital Announcer 4308 See Programs 23 and 24 for Digital Announcement Assignements Primary Auto Attendant (AA) Announcements (A1, A1', A1'', A1''') Secondary AA Announcements (A2, A2', A2'', A2''') Figure 6-25 Announcement Device Block Diagram Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-49 Peripheral Installation Built-in Auto Attendant ACD Applications The CT built-in Auto Attendant can function with Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) groups in two ways (see Flowchart 6-1 and text below): ◆ The CT built-in Auto Attendant can function to answer calls and send them to selected ACD groups when the caller dials the digit assigned to an ACD group. ◆ A call that is waiting in an ACD queue can overflow to the built-in Auto Attendant to enable the caller to choose another destination. Note Both options can be used simultaneously or independently. See Chapter 7 – ACD Installation for ACD/Auto Attendant programming options. Incoming Call Auto Attendant Built-in H C Station ACD Group X ACD Group Y ACD Queue ACD Queue Agent Agent Overflow 1543 Flowchart 6-1 Auto Attendant/ACD Application Flowchart Digital Announcer Auto Disconnect The CT built-in AA automatically disconnects digital announcers immediately after the caller(s) dials a digit and are routed to a selected destination. Thus, the announcement device does not have to play to the end before it is released. This feature requires a digital announcer that can recognise a 100 milliseconds open circuit on the (PSTU/RSTU) loop and hang-up when it detects the open on the loop. 6-50 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Built-in Auto Attendant Block Diagram A detailed block diagram which includes call flow patterns and associated programs is provided in Flowchart 6-2. ACD Exchange Lines (Program 14-0) Incoming Exchange Call to Auto Attendant Is Auto Attendant Delay Ring Mode? Program 81 ~ 89 To Agent ACD Group Queue Auto Attendant Ring Control Using 1 Night Transfer (NT) Button per Program 78, 81 ~ 89 Answer Yes Talk Overflow Option to AA Programs 14-4, -5, and -6 No No Answer 0 A1 + DTMF Receiver Available? No (Caller Receives Ringback Tone Before A1 Answers) (Reserve A1 + DTMF Receiver) 1 Timeout Answer Ring Telephones Per Program (81-89) Talk H No Answer Program 25: Wait Timer (12-24 Sec) 1 Second Ringing Queue Wait A1 / DTMF Receiver Becomes Available Ring A1 A1' Caller Hangs Up 16-Second Time-Out Disconnect Exchange Line (Faulty A1) Announcement Ends and Disconnects 4 Second Delay Go to 5 A1'' A1''' Program 23 A1 ~ A1''' Assignment KSTU2 / PSTU / RSTU / PESU A1 Answers Within 16 Seconds A1 Answers and Plays Announcement C Ring Stations For 12 OR 24 Sec. Per Program 81 ~ 89 Caller Does Not Dial (60 secs. maximum; DTMF Receiver remains for 4 secs. after announcement disconnects. 2 Caller Dials and system Checks Program 09 Note A1 ~ A1''' — Primary Announcement Device(s) on next page Go to A on next page 1544 Flowchart 6-2 Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-51 Peripheral Installation A Caller Receives Music-On-Hold or Ring Back Tone per Program 10-3, LED 15 When Auto Attendant Routes Call Auto Attendant Routes Call (Program 09): Dial * Camp-On Beep 10 IPS Fast LED Flash LCD Camp-On Display Dial Busy or Ringing DN DISA Mode Internal Dial Tone Dial: Wrong or Vacant Number; or Dial a DND or Ringing Station ACD Group Camp-On Timer (Program 26) (011-999S) Go to Figure 6-2 Check Program 10-3 No Program 10-3 LED 18 (On) A1 + DTMF ReceiverAvailable? 15 Sec No Note 1 If the station has CF/NA set, the A2 In System? No 4 H 0 Answer Talk 16 Second No Answer 1 3 Programs 14-4, -5, and -6 Ring DN for 16 Seconds1 Busy Station Becomes Idle Time-Out Overflow To AA Option Dial Idle DN station will ring for the CF/NA time duration and then it will forward to the forwarded destination. The CF/NA destination station will ring 16 sec and then route to if not answered. A call will not forward a second time. Yes Yes No 5 (15 Second Time Out) A2 + DTMF ReceiverAvailable? (16 Second Wait for A2/DTMF Receiver Available) Yes Yes 1 Go to Answer C Yes Ring Station per Program (81, 84, 87) for 40/120/240 Sec. per Program 10-3 LEDs 16 and 17 1 Second Queue Wait Ring A2 Talk No Answer or Automatic Release Disconnect Exchange Line Note: A2 ~ A2''' — Secondary Announcement Device(s) A2 Answers Within 16 Seconds Flowchart 6-3 Time-out 16 Seconds (Faulty A2) A2 Answers and Plays Announcement Go to 2 A2''' A2'' A2' Program 24 A1 ~ A1''' Assignments to KSTU3 / RSTU / PSTU 4 Go to (60 Seconds Maximum; DTMF Receiver Remains 4 Seconds After Announcement Disconnects) 1545 Figure 6-2 Built-in Auto Attendant Flowchart (continued) Non-built-in Auto Attendant Alternatives to using the Strata CT built-in AA feature, are voice mail systems, such as Toshiba Stratagy or other supplier Voice Mail systems with an AA feature and non-voice mail AA as a stand-alone device. Non-built-in Auto Attendant Programming The Auto Attendant programs described in “Built-in Auto Attendant Basic Call Sequences” on Page 6-47 do not apply to the Non-integrated AA feature sources, but Strata CT Programs 03, 04, 10-1, 13, 16, 31, 33, 36, 37, 39, and 81~89 should be considered for proper operation. 6-52 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Peripheral Installation Non-built-in Auto Attendant Installation Non-integrated AA sources, such as voice mail devices and stand-alone units, connect to standard telephone circuits (ports). See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for more information. Multiple PIOU, PIOUS, Installation Up to three PIOU or PIOUS PCBs can be installed in a system to simultaneously provide: maintenance terminal (or modem) interface, Management Information System (MIS) for ACD interface, and RS-232 voice mail interface (Toshiba proprietary or SMDI). Each of these interfaces are provided by the modular jacks on separate PIOU, PIOUS PCBs. Interface assignments are made in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43). PIOU and PIOUS Paging, SMDR, relay control, alarm sensor, and door lock functions will be active only on the PIOU or PIOUS PCB which is assigned the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). If the RSIU/RSIS is installed, functions enabled in Program 76 will operate as programmed and the same functions programmed in Program 03 (Code 41, 42, and 43) will not operate. For more details regarding RSIU/RSIS/RMDS installation, see RSIU installation in Chapter 3 – Universal Slot PCBs and Figure 4-21 on Page 4-22. H RS-232 (DB-25 OR DB-9) Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord PIOU or PIOUS1 TTY Jack Maintenance Terminal, Personal Computer, Modem C SMDR2 Jack TTY-PC-CABLE or PPTC1A-3M Maintenance Interface Program 03 Code 41 RS-232 (DB-25 OR DB-9) Serial Port 3-Pair Modular Cord COM Port PIOU or PIOUS1 TTY Jack SMDR2 Jack ACD/MIS Personal Computer TTY-PC-CABLE or PPTC1A-3M MIS for ACD Interface Program 03 Code 42 1 Install PIOU or PIOUS PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slot in any cabinet(s). 2 SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). 3 If set, RSIU/RSIS Program 76 will override Program 03 code 41, 42, and 43. 4 Stratagy uses straight cables. Figure 6-26 Multiple PIOU/PIOUS (Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, RS-232 Voice Mail Integration) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 6-53 Peripheral Installation H C 6-54 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7 ACD Installation This chapter includes information on the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Management Information System (MIS) for: ◆ Strata CT systems (applies to all common control units) Included in this chapter are installation instructions. Note Only qualified service technicians and system programmers should install ACD/ MIS. ACD automatically routes incoming calls so they are equally distributed to a group of ACD Agents. Figure 7-1 shows an example of how a typical ACD call is handled. The Strata CT System provides many ACD functions and custom keys on for Toshiba DKT2500-series telephones. For instance, the ACD Supervisor can monitor calls and assist Agents through use of an LCD telephone, programmed especially for the Supervisor which shows ACD Agent and Group information. Telephone instructions are provided in the Strata CT ACD Supervisor Guide and Agent User Guide. H Incoming Call C Auto Attendant (Built-in or External) Station ACD Group X ACD Group Y ACD Queue (No Overflow Assignment) ACD Queue • • • • • Station PDN, or Attendant Console Another ACD Group Auto Attendant Announcement 1971 Figure 7-1 ACD Call Handling Example Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-1 ACD Installation Installation ACD for the Strata CT systems is provided through a feature key upgrade called RKYS. The RKYS is a subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features. See the “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades” on Page 2-38 for installation instructions. Multiple Serial Port Installation Remote Maintenance, MIS for ACD, and SMDI With CT, the RSIU PCBs can be installed alone or in addition to PIOU/PIOUS to provide: ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ H Maintenance Terminal (or modem) interface Management Information System (MIS) for ACD interface SMDI SMDR Related Programs Program 03 (Codes 41, 42, and 43): Assigns PIOU and PIOU interface options. SMDR, page outputs, SMDR, relay controls, alarm sensor, and door lock functions on PIOU or PIOUS will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). C ◆ ◆ Code 41: Enables Remote Maintenance. ◆ ◆ Code 43: Enables RS-232 Voice Mail Interface/SMDI. ◆ Program 76-1x3: Assigns the RSIU or RSIS port to provide MIS for ACD. Code 42: Enables MIS/SMIS PIOU or PIOUS Slot. The TTY port must have Code 42 set for its slot in Program 03 to support ACD/MIS. If the RSIU is to be used for ACD/MIS, the RSIU must be installed in the Strata DK Base Cabinet, slot 11 and programmed with Code 49 in Program 03. Notes ● Program 76 assignments override Code 42 if programmed for PIOU or PIOUS in Program 03. For more information on installation of the PIOU/PIOUS and the RSIU, see Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring and Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation. 7-2 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ACD Installation Wiring Announcements/music patterns are played and sent to callers at programmed time intervals while calls are waiting in an ACD queue. Announcement and music devices are connected to Strata CT station ports and are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 14-3. The ACD/MIS interface is provided by the TTY modular jack on a separate serial port (PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU or RSIS), see Figure 7-2. 25-pin PC serial COM port uses PPTC1A-3M 9-pin PC serial COM port (DB-9)1 6-pin modular jack Toshiba TTY-PC-CABLE MIS RS-232 port Personal Computer for: ACD Insight DK SMIS 3-pair modular cord (straight-wired, not cross-wired). 50 ft. max. for Insight DK PC parallel printer port H SRB00566 9353L9335 Sentinel key (off-white colour, comes with SMIS software version V1.0 or C Strata CT RS-232 jack: RSIU 2 RSIS 2 TTY jack: PIOU PIOUS 4277 1 Install PIOU or PIOUS PCBs in the last (highest numbered) slots in any cabinet(s). 2 Install RSIU in Slot 11 of Base Cabinet only. Figure 7-2 ACD Application Wiring Diagram Digital announcement devices can be connected to CT standard telephone ports only; music sources such as digital Music-on-Hold (MOH) devices, radio tuners, CD players, etc., can be connected to standard telephone ports, or to the processor PCB MOH jack. Refer to Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for wiring diagrams on connecting announcement/ music devices: ◆ Digital announcers and/or music sources to standard telephone PCB ports: RSTU and PSTU. Digital announcement devices and music sources can be assigned to any standard telephone port; they are not restricted to designated Background Music (BGM) source ports (see Program 14-3 for assignments). Announcement devices are designed to connect directly to standard telephone ports. Do not use an isolation transformer to connect digital announcers. Important! Most music sources (600 or 8 OHM) are not designed to be connected to telephone line circuits like the Strata CT standard telephone circuits. When connecting these devices to standard telephone circuits, an isolation transformer may be required between the music source and the standard telephone circuit. Figure 7-4 shows how to connect an isolation transformer. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-3 ACD Installation ◆ ➤ Music source to CT MOH input: The MOH source connected to the B_C_U MOH jack can be sent to ACD Groups selectively via Program 14-3. To connect a music source to the processor PCB MOH jack ➤ See Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation, “Music-on-Hold (MOH)/ Background Music (BGM) Options” on Page 6-3. ACD Installation Guidelines The following steps show how to install the Strata CT ACD feature. Step 1: Initialise the System If installing a new processor PCB or if changing ROMs on the processor PCB (RCTU or B_C_U), the processor PCB must be fully initialised by running Programs 91-9 and 03 per the programming procedures in the Strata CT Programming Manual. If the system has been previously initialised and installed, it is not necessary to re-initialise the processor PCB when installing the ACD feature unless the processor PCB ROMs or flash memory are changed to install ACD. If changing ROMs, DK Admin or DK Backup software is recommended for downloading/uploading previously programmed customer data. H Step 2: Install the Feature Key ➤ C To install the RKYS onto the Processor PCB ➤ Read the section titled “RKYS Feature Key Upgrades” on Page 2-38 for installation instructions. Important! It is not necessary to run any special programs (i.e., Program 03) when RKYS is installed. RKYS can be installed before or after system initialization, and, before or after the customer database is entered. The feature(s) provided by the RKYS are enabled immediately when RKYS is installed. However, configuration programs for Auto Attendant and ACD must be entered for the feature to operate. Step 3: Install Related PCBs 7-4 1. Install PIOU or PIOUS PCBs in the highest numbered slots in any cabinets. 2. Install the RSIU PCB in slot 11 of the Base Cabinet only. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ACD Installation Step 4: Connect COM Port Wires ➤ Connect Strata CT to the SMIS PC per Figure 7-2. SMDR, Page Outputs, Relay Controls, Alarm Sensor, and other miscellaneous options on the PIOU or PIOUS PCBs will be active on the installed PIOU/PIOUS that is programmed with the lowest Program 03 code (41, 42, or 43). Step 5: Install ACD/MIS Interface If installing a MIS personal computer, a PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU or RSIS must be installed (see Figure 7-2 for MIS RS-232 port installation). Step 6: Set the MIS Channel If there are more than 1,000 Agent calls in a heavy-traffic hour, the MIS channel must be set higher than 1200 bps. The next higher speed, 2400 bps, can handle up to 1,300 calls per hour. Strata CT allows 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps for the MIS channel. Note H Agent calls are defined as ACD incoming, PBX incoming/outgoing, and external/internal calls to and from the Agent’s [PhDN]. SMIS registers ACD and PBX calls: ◆ ◆ C RSIU only, 1200bps max with PIOU/PIOUS. An ACD call is a call that is sent (directly or transferred) to the ACD group. A PBX call is a call that is sent to the Agent’s ACD Call button [PhDN] or a call originated from an Agent’s ACD Call button [PhDN]. Based on a total system speed of 10,800 bps (9600 + 1200) for auxiliary serial channels and a requirement of one channel each for SMDI, TTY, SMDR, and MIS, the installation should use the lowest MIS channel speed for the expected amount of traffic. CAUTION! If the channel speed is not set high enough, the MIS buffer may overflow, causing loss of data to MIS. Step 7: Connect Announcement Devices Connect the digital announcement devices that are used for each ACD Group (queue) to the appropriate station ports. Digital announcers can be connected to any RSTU or PSTU standard telephone ports. See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for MDF wiring to appropriate standard telephone ports. ◆ Use Program 14-3, Code 1, 2, and 3 to assign digital announcers to standard telephone ports. Use Program 14-3, Code 5 and Program 14-5XX to configure the queue announcement pattern for each ACD Group. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-5 ACD Installation Step 8: Connect Music Sources Connect the music source for each ACD Group (queue) to the appropriate station port or to the processor PCB MOH jack. Music sources can be connected to RSTU or PSTU station ports or to the processor PCB MOH jack. See Figures 6-3, 6-4, 6-5 and “Alternate BGM Source Installation” on Page 6-9. See Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for details. Important! If connecting a music source to RSTU or PSTU standard telephone ports, an isolation transformer may be required as shown in Figure 6-4 to protect the music source from excessive current/voltage. Each ACD Group can have a separate music source or Groups can share music sources in any combination. Music source port assignments are made in Program 14-3, Code 4. Music source timers are set in Program 11-5 (1, 2, and 3). Step 9: Install ACD to Strata CT Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) Integration If ACD calls route to an ACD Group via the Strata CT built-in AA, install and program the AA per “Strata CT Built-In Auto Attendant (AA)” on Page 6-46. Auto Attendant “single digits” are assigned to ACD Groups in Program 09. H Step 10: Assign ACD to Toshiba Stratagy or Customer Supplied Voice Mail AA Integration C If a Toshiba Stratagy or Customer supplied Voice Mail AA must answer calls and transfer Exchange lines to ACD Groups, assign the Exchange lines to ring the Strata CT standard telephone ports connected to the Stratagy or Customer supplied Voice Mail AA in Programs 81~89. Also program the appropriate Strata CT station ports to interface with the Stratagy or VP ports in Program 31. Program the Stratagy or Customer supplied Voice Mail AA to Recall and dial #406XX to transfer calls to ACD Groups (where XX = the ACD Group Number: 01~16). 7-6 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ACD Installation ACD Line Operation/Programming Considerations ACD Programming All types of CT lines can be routed to ACD Groups (loop start, DDI/Tie). Lines can be assigned in programming to route directly to ACD Groups when they ring or dial into the Strata CT system. All line types can be programmed to transfer into an ACD Group from any telephone, attendant console, or built-in or external AA. Use the ACD programming guidelines and flowcharts provided in Chapter 6 of the Strata CT Programming Manual to configure the remaining ACD items per the customer’s requirements. The following paragraphs describe differences in the operation and programming of loop start lines versus DDI/Tie lines used with an ACD system. Direct Incoming Assignments to ACD Groups Loop Start Incoming Line Calls H Program 14-0: Used to make the line assignments to send calls directly to specific ACD Groups. If a loop start line is assigned to an ACD Group in Program 14-0, it routes per that ACD Group’s call routing assignments. ACD calls ring on Agent ACD Call [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign Exchange Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons to Agent telephones. ACD Exchange Line or Pooled Line Grp buttons can be assigned to overflow destination telephones. Note C Program 14-0 has priority over all other ringing assignments except Program 78 (61, 62, and 63). If a line is assigned to ring an ACD Group in Program 14-0 at the same time the line is assigned to ring the CT built-in AA in Program 78, the line routes to the AA. DDI/Tie Incoming Line Calls Program 71-1, 2, or 3: assigns DDI incoming digits to ACD Groups. Program *09 assigns Tie Line incoming digits to ACD groups. If the incoming digits (XXXX) dialled from a Tie or DDI line match the digits assigned to an ACD Group, the call routes per that ACD Group’s call routing assignments. ACD calls ring on Agent ACD Call [PhDN] buttons. Do not assign DDI/Tie Line buttons to Agent telephones. However, ACD DDI/Tie Line buttons can be assigned to overflow destination telephones. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-7 ACD Installation Transfer From Built-in Auto Attendant (AA) to ACD Group Loop Start Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring into the CT built-in AA in Program 78. Each ACD Group can be assigned a unique one or two-digit AA dialling prompt in Program 09. Incoming calls on these lines are answered by the AA. The caller then enters the one or two-digit number and is connected to a specific ACD Group. DDI/Tie ACD Line Calls Calls cannot be assigned to ring the CT built-in AA, so they cannot be transferred from the CT AA to an ACD Group. Transfer From External AA to an ACD Group The external AA (Stratagy or Customer supplied voice mail systems) can be programmed to transfer calls to specific ACD Groups by assigning one-digit dialling prompts to each Group. To transfer a call into an ACD Group from an external AA, the user must Recall and dial #406XX (XX = ACD Group number 01~16). H Loop Start Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring external AA ports in Program 81~89. The external AA can be programmed to transfer calls to particular ACD Groups by assigning one-digit dialling prompts to each Group. DDI Line Calls Calls can be assigned to ring directly into an external AA by assigning incoming digits to the AA ports in Programs 81-83. Internal station to station [DN] calls cannot be transferred to ACD Groups. C Overflow From an ACD Group Queue ACD Calls ACD calls can be routed to overflow to a [PDN], [SDN], [PhDN], to normal Exchange line ringing assignments, to another ACD Group, or to a Distributed Hunt [DH] Group (see Strata CT Programming Manual, Flowcharts 6-3~6-10). If the overflow [PhDN] or [PDN] is idle when overflow time occurs, an ACD call rings the overflow destination [DN]. If it is busy, the ACD call does not overflow but remains in the ACD queue until the overflow destination, an Agent telephone in the ACD Group, or a DH Group member telephone becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to become idle receives the call. In this case, DDI/Tie lines operate the same as ground, and loop start lines. 7-8 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ACD Installation Loop Start Lines Lines can overflow from an ACD queue to the CT Exchange line Normal Ringing assignments set in Programs 81, 84, 87 and *81, *84, and *87; to the CT built-in AA or to an attendant console. When the overflow time or point occurs, calls immediately exit the ACD Group queue and ring all stations assigned to ring in Programs 81, 84, or 87 and *81, *84, and *87 (no delay ringing assignment operates during overflow). Idle stations and [DNs] ring normally while busy stations and [DNs] have a muted ring. Auto Attendant If the overflow destination is the CT built-in AA, calls overflow immediately when overflow time occurs and are routed per the AA program assignments. If the AA is busy, the call still exits the ACD queue and queues onto the AA announcement port. Attendant Console If the overflow destination is the attendant console, calls immediately exit the queue and alert the console whether the console is idle or busy. This applies to overflow queue time out (Programs 11-1 and 14-4) and overflow point (see Programs 14-3, 14-5, and Flowcharts 6-8~6-10). H C DDI/Tie Lines Lines cannot overflow to the CT Exchange line Normal Ringing assignments set in Programs 81, 84, 87 and *81, *84, and *87, or to the CT built-in AA. If the overflow destination is assigned as either the CT Exchange line normal ringing or builtin AA, DDI/Tie lines route to the substitute destination [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. This applies to overflow queue time out and overflow point destinations assigned in Programs 14-4/11-1, and 14-5, respectively. If the overflow destination [DN] is busy when overflow time occurs, the ACD call does not overflow but remains in the ACD queue until the overflow destination [DN] or an Agent telephone in the ACD Group becomes idle. The first device (Agent telephone or overflow destination) to become idle receives the call. ACD Group Status After Shift Mode When an ACD Group is placed in the After Shift mode, calls are not sent to the ACD Group’s queue or Agents, but are routed to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6. The After Shift operation for each possible case is described below (also see Strata CT Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-5): ◆ If the After Shift destination is idle, all line types ring the idle destination. DDI/Tie and loop start lines operate the same. ◆ If the After Shift destination of an ACD Group is another ACD Group, and all Agents in the destination Group are busy on calls or in the After Call Work Time mode, the call is placed at the end of the destination ACD Group’s queue. If there are no Agents logged in for the After Shift Group, the call is sent to that Group’s After Shift destination. DDI/ Tie and ground/loop start lines operate the same. ◆ If the After Shift destination is a [DN], the [DN] rings. If the station is busy, DDI/Tie lines camp on to the [DN] while loop start lines busy override ring the port. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-9 ACD Installation ◆ If the After Shift destination is the CT Normal Ringing assignment, loop start lines ring stations assigned to the ACD lines in Programs 81~89 (including delayed ringing assignments). DDI/Tie lines do not ring stations in the Normal Ring assignments but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. ◆ If the After Shift destination is the CT AA, ground/loop start lines are answered by the AA and routed after the caller dials a digit prompted by the AA. DDI/Tie lines do not route to the AA, but ring or camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2. ◆ If the After Shift destination is the attendant console, calls ring or queue onto the console whether it is busy or idle. This applies to DDI/Tie and loop start lines. All Agents Unavailable Mode If all the Agents in an ACD Group become unavailable simultaneously, calls that would normally ring into the ACD Group or enter the Group’s queue are routed to either the Group’s After Shift destination, set in Program 14-6 or to the Group’s Overflow Point destination, set in Program 14-5 (see Strata CT Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-6). The option of where to send calls when all Agents are unavailable is set system-wide for all ACD Groups in Program 10-4, LED 04. All line types (loop start and DDI/Tie follow this operation. If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the After Shift destination set in Program 14-6, (Program 10-4, LED 04 “Off”), calls to a Group whose Agents are all unavailable are treated as if the ACD Group were in the After Shift mode. If the “All Agents Unavailable Operation” is set to route calls to the Overflow Point destination set in Program 14-5 (Program 10-4, LED 04 “On”), calls to a Group whose Agents are all unavailable are treated as if they overflowed from the Group’s queue even if the overflow destination is busy. If the “All Agents Unavailable” overflow destination is another ACD Group, calls route to an idle Agent, or are placed at the end of the overflow ACD Group’s queue. H C Agent Ring No Answer Call Treatment If an ACD call rings an Agent telephone for the time specified in Program 11-2 and the call is not answered, the call is routed to ring another idle Agent in the same ACD Group for that same time duration (see Strata CT Programming Manual, Flowchart 6-7). This continues until all idle Agents in that Group have been rung. If the call is not answered by an Agent, the call then routes to the destination assigned in Program 14-5. Two consecutive Ring No Answer (RNA) calls to the same Agent automatically places that Agent’s telephone in the Unavailable mode. The RNA operation for possible cases is described below: 7-10 ◆ If the RNA destination is an idle [DN], it rings when RNA occurs. If the RNA [DN] is busy when RNA occurs, DDI/Tie calls camp on to the [DN] and loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ring assignments). ◆ If the RNA destination is an ACD Group, the call rings an idle Agent in that Group when RNA occurs. If all Agents in the RNA destination ACD Group are busy when RNA occurs, DDI/Tie lines route to the destination assigned in Program *14-2 and loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ringing assignments). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ACD Installation ◆ If the RNA destination is the CT Normal Ringing assignment, DDI/Tie/ lines route to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and loop start lines route to the Normal Ringing assignments in Programs 81~89 and *81, *84, and *87 (including delay ring assignments). If the RNA destination is busy when RNA occurs, DDI/Tie lines camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and loop start lines mute ring the busy [DN]. ◆ If the RNA destination is the CT built-in AA, DDI/Tie lines route to the [DN] assigned in Program *14-2 and loop start lines route per the AA program assignments. If the AA is busy when RNA occurs, DDI/Tie lines camp on to the [DN] assigned in Program *142 and loop start lines queue onto the AA announcement port. ◆ If the RNA destination is the CT attendant console, RNA calls ring or queue on the console whether it is busy or idle. This applies to loop, Tie or DDI lines. ACD SMDR Printout Examples H Auto Attendant, DDI, and Tie line ACD calls can be identified on SMDR printouts. Several SMDR printout examples noting ACD information are provided. (See Figures 7-3 through 7-10). However, Toshiba recommends using Insight DK to track ACD call data rather than SMDR. Insight DK is designed to track ACD/PBX agent calls. Loop start line ACD calls can only be identified by line and station numbers. The ACD tag is not applied. For detailed ACD call record reporting, Toshiba recommends using Insight DK. The Work Unit count data, which is entered from the Agent telephone while on an ACD call, is printed in the account code field of the SMDR output data (last 15 columns). Note If multiple Work Unit entries are entered on the same ACD call, SMDR only sends data for the last entry. MIS receives all entries made. C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-11 ACD Installation Identifies ACD call (not Group number) Call answered by Agent Time Ring before Queue + Queue Time DDI Seizure + Digits Received Time 009 ACD 009 204 14:30 00:02;03 00;04 14:31 00:00;26 204 Agent Telephone Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time Agent Telephone [PDN] DDI Line Number 2023 Figure 7-3 DDI Call to ACD Queue Example ACD Call goes to Queue then rings Agent – Agent Answers H 003 ACD 003 204 14:00 00:02;38 00;05 14:01 00:01;23 Time Agent answers call Queue + Ring Agent Time Ring Time, before First Announcement Answers Duration 204 (Program 11-4 = 4 seconds) Agent Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent Talk Time Duration Time call is disconnected Agent Telephone [PDN] Exchange Line Number C 00:05 02:38 01:23 Total time call is connected to system is 4 minutes, 6 seconds 03:66 2024 Figure 7-4 Loop Start Incoming Call Example DDI ACD Call to ready Agent at Station 204 009 ACD 009 204 10:53 00:00;16 00;06 10:53 00:00;40 204 Time Telephone (204) answers Line 9 Queue and/or Ring Telephone Time Duration of Incoming Seizure + digits dialled Primary Directory Number [PDN] of Called Telephone Talk Time Duration Time call is disconnected Talking Telephone [PDN] DDI Line Number 1999 Figure 7-5 7-12 DDI ACD Call to Available Agent Example Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ACD Installation 007 MSS 007 203 10:36 00:00;26 00;03 10:37 00:01;12 203 Identifies DISA or Built-in AA call Time call was transferred Call connected to DISA or AA Time Duration Ring before DISA or AA Answer Time Duration Caller dials 203, DISA or AA transfers to 203 Call connected to 203 Time Duration Time 203 hung-up and call disconnected [DN] connected to Line 007 Line Number Note: DISA callers cannot dial into an ACD Group. Auto Attendant Transfers Call to ACD Group 007 MSS 10:38 00:00;26 ACD 2080 Figure 7-6 Incoming Built-in AA or DISA Call (non-ACD call) Example 203 Transfer Time 203 Talk Time Duration 203 Ring before Answer Time Duration Indicates Call Transfer to ACD Group H A→ 003 203 13:10 00:00;10 00;03 ACD 204 B→ 003 ACD 204 13:10 00:00;06 13:10 00:00;26 [PDN] of telephone that C→ 003 204 answers the ACD transferred call 204 Ring before Answer Time or Queue Time 204 Talk Time 204 Discconnect Time C A→ [DN] 203 Transfer Line 003 to ACD Group 01 (Dialling + B→ [DN] 204 Answers Line 003 (Agent logged in and ready on 204) C→ [DN] 204 Hangs up ) 2081 Figure 7-7 Transfer Exchange Line to ACD Group Example 003 204 14:13 00:01;05 00;10 Ring Duration Time before Agent answers 6 – 09 2 Rings 10 –13 3 Rings 14 –17 4 Rings etc. Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time [PDN] of Agent Telephone ACD Exchange Line Number 2082 Figure 7-8 Direct Loop Start Line Call to ACD Agent (no Queue Time) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-13 ACD Installation Direct ACD call with Caller ID Number, answered by ACD Queue Announcer 4414. Call stays in queue until Agent button, [PhDN] 500 on Station 4403 becomes available. Agent answers call on button [PhDN] 500, line 1 prints, services call and hangs up, line 2 prints. Indicates DDI Line 018D 018 ACD 4403 Agent [PDN] ACD GRP Announcer Port 4414 500 01:32 01:32 00:00;13 00:00;17 00;14 Button [PhDN] on station 4403 Line Number 4403 *7145833700** Caller ID Number Prints On SMDR After Agent Answers Station 4403 [PDN] Direct ACD call with DDI, does not enter queue and is answered by Agent Station 4403 on [PhDN] 500. The information below prints on SMDR when the Agent hangs up. button Indicates DDI Line 018D 4403 500 02:05 00:00;06 00;19 *7145833700** Button [PhDN] Caller ID Number Prints On SMDR After Agent Hangs Up Line Number Station 4403 [PDN] Direct Caller ID Number call goes to queue and caller hangs up while in queue; the information below prints on SMDR. H Indicates DDI LINE 018D Line Number ACD 4414 02:34 00:00;03 00;17 ACD Queue Announcer [PDN] *7145833333** Caller ID Number Prints When Caller Hangs Up Lost or Abandoned Calls DDI/Caller ID Number Storage Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent: Abandoned call is stored on Agent telephone. C Direct ACD call does not go to queue but rings Agent. Agent does not answer and call goes to Ring No Answer (RNA) destination telephone: Abandoned call DDI/Caller ID Number is stored on RNA destination telephone. Direct ACD call rings to ACD Group. Caller hangs up before ACD announcer answers: Abandoned Call DDI/Caller ID Number is stored on telephone owner of ACD line which received the call (Program *52 assignment). Direct ACD call is answered by ACD queue announcer: Abandoned call DDI/Caller ID Number information is printed on SMDR as shown directly above. 2083 CT I&M Figure 7-9 ACD Printout Example Delay Ring to Built-in Auto Attendant — Dial ACD Group “1” Digit Time caller dials “1” Auto Attendant Announce Time Duration Ring Duration Time before AA answer Indicate AA sent call to ACD Group 003 MSS 003 ACD 003 204 Figure 7-10 7-14 14:47 00:00;10 00;16 14:47 00:00;03 14:48 00:00;42 ACD Work Unit Entry appears in Acct Code Field 204 Agent or Overflow Destination Telephone Primary Directory Number [PDN] Agent ring before Answer Time Duration Agent Talk Time Duration Call Disconnect Time Exchange Line Number Delay Ring to Built-in AA Example Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ACD Installation Insight DK The Insite DK Lite, Insight DK™ and Insight DK Plus are full-featured ACD MIS tools for call centre supervisors, providing user-defined supervisor displays, user-defined historical reports, electronic wall board connections, and inView LAN-based status display messaging. Insite DK Lite, Insight DK and DK Plus are Windows-based MIS software programs that work with PCs running Microsoft ® Windows® 2000, Windows 98, Windows 95 (Vers. 4.00.950A, B, or C), or Windows NT® with Service Pack 3. Strata CT Requirements The RKYS3/RKYS4 must be installed on the Strata CT processor PCB card in order for the Insight CT to work. Reference Information For refernce information, refer to the Insight DK Installtaion & Programming Guide for software installation and operating instructions. Wall boards H Insight DK ver 3.0 supports the following wallboards: Shorekarn Messagemaker 2 x 16 Shorekarn Messagemaker 2 x 21 Shorekarn Messagemaker 2 x 21 y ; ; y Line Driver C An RS-232 short-haul modem or Line Driver is needed to boost transmission for PCs located more than 21 metres from the Strata CT system. A suitable Line driver is made by RS Components, model number 857-102. See Figure 7-11. 2544 Figure 7-11 RS-232 Short-haul Line Driver Line Drivers must be used in pairs. Figure 7-12 shows the connections between the two line drivers. + RCV + Pair 1 XMT G Twisted Pair Cable Pair 2 + RCV - XMT + G 2547 Figure 7-12 Twisted PAir Connections Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 7-15 ACD Installation H C 7-16 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding 8 This chapter describes the procedures to diagnose faults in the Key Service Unit (KSU) in the Strata CT systems. Faults are classified and then cleared by replacing the malfunctioning unit and by performing operational tests in the sequences by prescribed by the fault clearing flowcharts in “Fault Isolation Flowcharts” on Page 8-7. Fault Classification H A Fault Classification Flowchart is provided to ensure that fault clearing is pursued in a logical sequence (Flowchart 8-1 on Page 8-8). The flowcharts assume that the fault was discovered and reported by a digital or electronic telephone user. All faults, therefore, are classified according to the way they would appear at the digital or electronic telephone. Fault Clearing Procedures Before attempting to clear any fault, ensure that it is in the system and not caused by associated external equipment, such as wiring, MOH source, etc. C Important! Many system features are assigned, enabled or disabled using software entries as described in the Strata CT Programming Manual. It is very important to verify that the system programming is correct and functional before troubleshooting the hardware. Initialise the system (Programs 91-9 and 03) before testing new systems or when changing the KSU, or Strata CT processor PCBs. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-1 Fault Finding Five symbols are used in the flowcharts, which are identified in Figure 8-13. The flowcharts are sequentially arranged to permit rapid fault localisation within the system. All fault clearing must begin with the Fault Classification Flowchart, which is arranged in the correct fault locating sequence. Marking points of a flowchart sequence. Important notes affecting the fault clearing procedure. Question to be answered YES or NO. Progression TO or FROM another flowchart location. Letters and numbers denote the exact entrance or exit points. H Statement of a required action. 1887 Figure 8-13 C Flowchart Symbols CAUTION! When handling PCBs, do not: Drop a PCB. Stack one PCB on top of another. Handle a PCB without discharging any static electricity from your person by touching the grounded cabinet. Touch the PCB contacts with your fingers. Important! If the fault is not cleared by substituting a PCB, reinstall the original PCB in the KSU/cabinet before trying another PCB. Parts Return 1. Pack the part in a suitable container (original box is highly recommended). Use antistatic containers for all PCBs and feature cartridges. Use plastic bags for digital or electronic telephones, KSU/cabinet, etc. CAUTION! 8-2 To avoid damage, never write on the part itself. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding 2. Describe the nature of the defect on an information tag. Attach the tag to the front of the unit with string (not wire) so the tag can remain attached during the testing and repair. Note Return tags are available from Toshiba Information Systems UK Ltd. Processor PCB Fault Isolation The Strata CT processor PCB (B_C_U) circuits may contain a “soft” fault due to an extremely high level of static electricity and/or improper or no System Initialisation. If the processor is found defective during the fault finding procedures, attempt to clear a “soft” fault before returning the processor PCB for repair. ➤ To clear a “soft” fault 1. Initialise the system, then re-program the system as necessary to test for the fault. 2. If the fault returns again, tag the defective processor PCB and return it for repair. Fault Isolation Procedure H 1. Test the power supply (see “Testing the System’s Power Supply” on Page 2-6). Test AC power and ground per system installation section. 2. Verify that both the BATT jumper plugs on the processor PCB, are in the On position. 3. If there are feature keys, verify that they are correctly installed: ◆ Strata CT: verify correct installation of the BRCS or RKYS options on the processor PCB per the Installation chapter. C 4. For the Strata CT, make sure the system power is Off. Then install an processor PCB in the appropriate slot of the Base Cabinet: Strata CT: If B2CBU, B3CBU or B5CBU is installed, install its partner card, B2CAU or B3CAU in the “Bl01” slot of the Base Cabinet. 5. If B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU or B5CAU/B5CBU is installed, connect them together with the two ribbon cables supplied per Chapter 2 – Strata CT Installation. 6. Verify that all PCBs are installed in proper slots per the Configuration chapter for the system. 7. Turn system power On; backup the customer database using DK Admin or DK Backup. For Strata CT, verify that the heartbeat LED flashes on B1CAU, B2CAU, B3CAU or B5CAU (B2CBU, B3CBU or B5CBU do not have heartbeat LEDs). 8. Run System Initialisation Program 91-9 (two times) per Program 91-9. 9. Run Program 03, for all option PCBs installed per Program 03. 10. Run the processor RAM tests with Program 00 (Part 2). 11. Enter the customer database (manually or with DK Admin or DK Backup) and retest for faults. 12. After performing the above steps, tag the defective PCB(s), Power Supply, or KSU, and return for repair. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-3 Fault Finding Station Cable Continuity Check Voltmeter Test Use a voltmeter to check cable continuity between the Strata CT cabinet, digital or electronic telephone, DSS console, and the attendant console. Make tests at the modular block. Refer to Tables 8-1 and 8-2. ➤ H To perform the voltmeter test Table 8-1 1. Refer to Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring for appropriate MDF wiring diagrams. 2. Disconnect the digital or electronic telephone, DSS console, PDIU-DS, HDCB, or DDCB. 3. Using a DC voltmeter, measure between the wires of the two pairs to verify the readings shown in Table 8-1 for digital telephone ports. Refer to Table 8-2 for electronic telephone ports. The reading will be a plus or minus depending on meter lead placement. 4. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. See “Power Supply (BPSU672F) Removal” on Page 2-8 and “Power Supply Replacement” on Page 2-8. 5. For the MDF-to-telephone (digital or electronic) cable, use an ohmmeter to make a more precise check. Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Voltmeter From C 1. 2. To Voltage Pair Wire Colour Pair Wire Colour 1 T Green1 2 T Black 0 1 R Red 2 T Black 242 1 T Green 2 R Yellow 242 1 R Red 2 R Yellow 0 1 T Green 1 R Red 242 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 242 The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. Nominal voltage—within limits of ±26.3 ~ ±27.8VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter lead placements. 8-4 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding Table 8-2 Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Voltmeter From Pair H C To Pair Wire Colour Voltage Wire Colour 1 T Green1 2 T Black 242 1 R Red 2 T Black 242 1 T Green 2 R Yellow 242 1 R Red 2 R Yellow 242 1 T Green 1 R Red 0 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 0 3 T White 3 R Blue 0 3 T White 1 R Red 0 3 R Blue 1 R Red 0 3 T White 1 T Green 0 3 R Blue 1 T Green 0 3 T White 2 T Black 0 3 R Blue 2 T Black 0 3 T White 2 R Yellow 0 3 R Blue 2 R Yellow 0 1. The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. 2. Nominal voltage—within limits of 26.3 ~ ± lead placements. ±27.8VDC while under AC power, polarity depending on voltmeter Ohmmeter Test Check the continuity of the cable run between the KSU/cabinet and digital or electronic telephone with an ohmmeter. ➤ To perform the ohmmeter test 1. Disconnect the DSS console, electronic or digital telephone. 2. At the MDF, remove the bridging clips. 3. At the MDF, place shorting jumper wires between the T and R of pair #1 (green-red), the T and R of pair #2 (black-yellow) and the T and R of OCA pair #3 (blue-white), for PEKU/PESU only. (For MDF pin numbers, see Chapter 4 – Universal Slot PCB Wiring.) 4. At the modular block, measure the resistance between all wire combinations. The proper readings are shown in Table 8-3 for digital telephones, DDSSs, DDCBs and Table 8-4 for electronic telephones and HDSSs. 5. An improper reading indicates an open, crossed or shorted wire. See “Power Supply (BPSU672F) Removal” on Page 2-8 and “Power Supply Replacement” on Page 2-8. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-5 Fault Finding Cable Installation Test If cable voltmeter and ohmmeter tests are within limits, digital telephones, DDCBs, or DDSS consoles may not operate. ➤ To perform the cable installation test Table 8-3 1. Cable runs for the above digital devices must be free of cable splits (single or double). Test for and eliminate all cable splits. 2. Cable bridge taps – Digital telephones will not operate if cable runs contain any type (short or long) of cable bridge. Test for and eliminate all cable bridges. 3. When installing the station cable, do not run parallel to and within 3 ft. of an AC power line. AC power lines should cross at right (90°) angles only. In particular, avoid running station wire pairs near devices that generate electrical noise, such as neon or fluorescent light fixtures. Station Cable Continuity Check for Digital Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter From Pair H To Pair Wire Colour Voltage Wire Colour 1 T Green1 2 T Black open 1 R Red 2 T Black open 1 T Green 2 R Yellow open 1 R Red 2 R Yellow open 1 T Green 1 R Red 40 ohms2 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 40 ohms2 C 8-6 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding Table 8-4 Station Cable Continuity Check for Electronic Telephone Cables using Ohmmeter From H C To Voltage Pair Wire Colour Pair Wire Colour 1 T Green1 2 T Black 1 R Red 2 T Black open 1 T Green 2 R Yellow open 1 R Red 2 R Yellow open 1 T Green 1 R Red 40 ohms2 2 T Black 2 R Yellow 40 ohms2 3 T White 3 R Blue 40 ohms2 3 T White 1 R Red open 3 R Blue 1 R Red open 3 T White 1 T Green open 3 R Blue 1 T Green open 3 T White 2 T Black open 3 R Blue 2 T Black open 3 T White 2 R Yellow open open 1. The green-red, black-yellow and white-blue measurements should be within 10% of each other. 2. This is the maximum allowable reading for all digital and electronic telephone cable runs except if connecting an HDSS console to circuits 7 and 8 of a PEKU, then the maximum cable restriction is 20 ohms, not 40 ohms. Fault Isolation Flowcharts The following troubleshooting flowcharts are available to aid in fault isolation. Toshiba recommends reading the previous text in this chapter before proceeding to Flowchart 8-1 on Page 8-8 to begin fault isolation. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-7 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-1 Fault Classification START Please read Chapters 1 and 2 before proceeding. Is the system completely non-operational? 1-1 Yes Go to Flowchart 8-2 No Is it a station no dial tone fault? H Yes Go to Flowchart 8-3 No Is it an Exchange line no dial tone fault? C Yes Go to Flowchart 8-4 Is it a remote maintenance fault? Yes Go to Flowchart 8-8 No Is the fault classified on this page? Yes Go to appropriate Flowchart 8-1~8-8 No Call your technical support group. 1879 CT I&M No Is a DSS console nonoperational? Yes Go to Flowchart 8-5 Yes Go to Flowchart 9-6 Yes Go to Flowchart 8-7 No Is it a voice mail/auto attd fault? No Is it an SMDR fault? No 1-1 8-8 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-2 Catastrophic Faults START Go to Flowchart 8-1 No Is the system completely non-operational? Yes 2-1 Test the Power Supply as described in the Installation Chapter. Also perform Hardware Fault Isolation per this chapter. 2-2 H Was the fault isolated by completing the system hardware check? No Yes 2-3 Tag the defective unit(s) and return for repair. END 2-5 C Re-initialise the system (Programs 91-9 and 03) and re-check fault using default program data (do not enter customer database). 2-4 Reprogram customer database, one program at a time, and check to see if fault re-occurs. 2-6 Yes 2-7 Does the fault re-occur after entering customer database? Was the fault cleared after re-initialising the system? No Yes No END 2-8 Call your technical support group. 1880 CT I&M Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-9 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-3 START Station Dial Tone Faults Check station wiring per the Station Cable Continuity Check in this chapter. 3-1 Repair if necessary. Is the fault cleared? YES END No 3-2 Replaceable Station PCBs: Strata CT: PEKU,PESU, PSTU, RSTU, RDSU/RSTS Is the faulty station on a replaceable station PCB? Yes Replace the PCB and retest 3-8 No H No 3-3 Are the faulty station(s) only in the Expansion cabinet? C YES 3-5 Is the fault cleared? Yes 3-4 Change the Expansion cabinet and retest or check the cabinet power supply per the RPSU280 power supply test. Then replace the cabinet. Replace the defective unit and return it to the repair center END No 3-7 3-6 Replace the Base or test the Strata CT common control PCB per the Fault Isolation section. Initialise the system (Prog: 91-9 and 03). Is the fault cleared? Yes Go to 3-4 Retest. No Is the fault cleared? Yes No Call your technical support group. 1881 Go to 3-4 8-10 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-4 Exchange Line Dial Tone Faults START 1. Check Exchange line wiring per Chapter 4. 2. Test Exchange line using a standard telephone or butt set (or equivalent piece of test equipment) at the NTP. Repair as necessary. Is the fault cleared? 4-1 Yes END No Change the PCB and retest. 4-3 4-2 4-4 Locate the faulty Exchange lines Yes No H No Is the fault cleared? 4-7 Yes 4-5 C Are the faulty Exchange lines only in the Base or Expansion Cabinet? Replace the defective unit and return it to the repair center. Yes END No 4-10 4-9 Change the expansion unit and retest. 4-6 Change the Base cabinet or test the Strata CT common control PCB per the Faulty Isolation section and initialise the system (Prog. 91-9 and 03). Retest. Is the fault cleared? Is the fault cleared? Yes Go to 4-5 No No Call your technical support group. 1882 CT I&M Yes Go to 4-5 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-11 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-5 DSS Console Faults START DSS console type? DDSS 5-0 Is the correct PCB slot code entered in Program 03? HDSS On PEKU connected to HDSS, set SW1 to the DSS position. Enter correct PCB slot code using Program 03; then turn power OFF (for 5 seconds) and then ON. No 5-1 Yes 5-2 5-3 Refer to Chapters 4 and verify wiring: Go to 5-0 Is the fault cleared? • For DDSS, circuit 8 of the base unit or PDKU. • For HDSS, circuit 7 and 8 of PEKU (PESU does not support HDSS). No Go to 5-3 Yes END Correct as necessary. 5-4 H Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Test DSS cable with cable continuity checks in this chapter. C Correct as necessary. 5-5 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Call your technical support group. 1883 CT I&M 8-12 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-6 Voice Mail/(External) Auto Attendant Faults 6-1 START This chart assumes the VM/AA device has no faults. Is VM/AA integration completely non-operational? Check that the BRCS is installed correctly and programmed with Code 92, 93 & 94 in Prog. 03. Yes Is the fault cleared? Yes END No No 6-2 H Check that VM/AA ports are connected to standard telephone station ports correctly. (Refer to KSTU2/RSTU3. PSTU & PESU wiring diagrams in Chapter 4.) Read “Voice Mail Options” in Chapter 6 and refer to the Programming Manual for correct VM options: Programs 15-0 and 15-3 (Auto release), and 31 (LEDs: 04, 05, 09, 15-20) This explains system hardware and programming options related to VM and external auto attendant. Correct if necessary. 6-4 Correct Hardware/System Programming as necessary. Is the fault cleared? 6-3 C Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Yes No Check that the VM I.D. codes (656 and 657) are stored correctly in users’ digital or electronic telephones. Use operating procedures in the manual for instructions. END Using a standard DTMF telephone, check all standard telephone circuits (RSTU2/RSTU3, PSTU). Replace defective PCB if necessary. 6-5 Is the fault cleared? Other VM/AA related programs: • 10-2, LED 11 – No DTMF tones • 13 – Message centre • 33 – Station hunting • 35 – Busy station transfer/ringing • 36 – Fixed call forward • 37 – Ring transfer recall time Yes END No 6-6 Call your technical support group. 1884 CT I&M Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-13 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-7 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Faults START 7-4 Read the SMDR installation instructions before proceeding with this chart. This chart assumes the SMDR device has no faults. No SMDR data or garbled data is detected at the PIOU/PIOUS SMDR port. No Verify that the PIOU/PIOUS baud rate SW1 switch is in the correct position (300 bps or 1200 bps) to match the SMDR device baud rate. (Refer to PIOU/PIOUS installation in Chapter 3.) If using RSIU/RSIS verify Program 76-1 for port assignment. Verify baud rate in Program 76-2. Yes Change as required. 7-5 7-1 No other faults are classified. Call your technical support group for assistance. No SMDR data records are sent correctly but not when the customer requires. Yes 7-2 H Set SMDR options in Program 60: Threshold time, long distance calls only, etc. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Verify that the SMDR device communication parameters are set for: 8-data bits, no-parity, 1-stop bit, 300 or 1200 bps. Change as required. 7-6 7-3 C Call your technical support group. No Is the fault cleared? Yes Is the fault cleared? Yes END No 7-7 7-8 END • The SMDR port is the bottom modular jack (TTY is on top) of PIOU/PIOUS. • SMDR can be any jack on RSIU or RSIS. See Program 76-1 & 2. The modular cord connecting to the SMDR port must be 6-wires. Check that the SMDR device is wired correctly to the RSIU/RSIS/PIOU/PIOUS SMDR port. (Refer to PIOU or PIOUS wiring instructions in Chapter 4.) Fix as required. Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Change the PIOU/ PIOUS PCB. 7-9 Is the fault cleared? Yes END No Call your technical support group. 1885 CT I&M 8-14 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Fault Finding Flowchart 8-8 Remote Maintenance Faults START If a digital or electronic telephone is in the Programming mode, it is not possible to enter the Remote Maintenance mode. This chart assumes that the remote terminal and modem have no fault and that Remote Maintenance does not operate. Check that the baud rate switch (SW2, push-button switch on PIOU/PIOUS) is set to match the remote terminal baud rate (300 bps LED ON, 1200 bps LED OFF) . Check that the RSIU, RMDS, IMDU, RSSU, PIOU or PIOUS is installed correctly. If using RSIU/RSIS/RMDS, check that Program 76 settings match DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and modem or remote terminal/modem. Check that communication parameters of remote terminal are set to match the PIOU or PIOUS TTY port or IMDU (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit). 8-1 H C External modem connected to the PIOU/PIOUS TTY port 8-2 Is Remote Maintenance connection via external modem on TTY port or IMDU modem? 8-4 Check that the communication parameters of the remote terminal are set to match the IMDU (7-data bits, even parity, 1-stop bit). Check that the PIOU/PIOUS SW3 switch is in the TTY position. For RSIU/RSIS check Program 76-1 and verify the port is programmed as 1 for TTY. Check that the PIOU/PIOUS SW3 switch is in the MODEM position. • Enable the IMDU by turning LED 14 ON in Program 77-1. • If required, assign Exchange lines for DISA or to ring IMDU in system Program 78, Code 51~ 53. • When calling IMDU via DISA or ring transfer, dial #19. If calling RMDS or IMDU via DDI lines, call the station number assigned in Program 71, 72 and 73. Correct as necessary. 8-3 Is the fault cleared? IMDU modem installed on PIOU or PIOUS Correct above if necessary or replace IMDU or PIOU(S). YES END 8-5 NO Check that the modem or terminal connected to the TTY port is wired correctly per the PIOU/PIOUS, RSIU/RSIS MDF wiring in Chapter 4. Correct above if necessary or replace PIOU or PIOUS. • The TTY port is the top modular jack (SMDR is bottom) of the PIOU/PIOUS. • The modular cord connecting the TTY port to the terminal or external modem must be 6-wires. • TTY can be any jack on RSIU/RSIS - see Progam 76. Is the fault cleared? Call your technical support group. 1886 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 8-15 Fault Finding H C 8-16 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration 9 Installing Computer Telephony Integration This chapter gives you information about installing Toshiba's Computer Telephony Integration, (CTI), software. Currently, it includes procedures for using a Personal Computer Interface Unit (PCIU) for Telephony Application Programming Interface (TAPI) running under both Microsoft Windows 2000 Workstation, Windows NT, Windows 9X, Windows 3.1 and Windows 3.11 for Workgroups. H C About Strata CT and TAPI The Telephony Specification was jointly developed and copyrighted by Intel and Microsoft. It consists of both TAPI, used by applications, and the Telephony Service Provider interface (TSPI), implemented by manufacturer of the Telecommunications terminal/system. Toshiba provides the TAPI connection through a Strata DKT2000 & 2500-series telephone with a modified data Interface Unit. The Personal Computer Interface unit (PCIU) for TAPI integrates into the bottom base of a 2000 & 2500-series telephone. Installation instructions for the hardware are contained in the Strata DK280 I&M (July 1996) Manual Chapter 6 paragraph 9. Windows Telephony is a component of Windows Open Services Architecture. This architecture provides telephony services when connected to many different telephone switches. Therefore, an application needs to know only the definition of the API (Application Program Interface) and not its implementation. The Strata CT TAPI Service Provider (CT TSPI) comes with each PCIU. This device, along with this software module, allows a Windows-based PC to interconnect with the phone system for receiving and making calls. Any TAPI-compliant PC software becomes compatible with Strata CT systems. Toshiba's TSPI is configured using the Telephony icon installed as part of TAPI in the Microsoft Windows Control Panel. The disk set also contains a "middleware" software known as StrataLink. This application enables other Windows-based software to also work with Strata CT systems. This is achieved by using another standardised mechanism called "DDE", (Dynamic Data Exchange). StrataLink is further explained in Section 3 called "Using StrataLink for CTI Connections". Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-1 Computer Telephony Integration Requirements To use TAPI with the DKT Service provider, you must have an IBM-compatible PC with 16 MB RAM (164MB on Windows 2000), running: ◆ Windows '95 or NT4, Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 ◆ Microsoft TAPI installed. (Most TAPI applications automatically install TAPI as part of the normal installation process). Note Toshiba currently do not support the Installation of StrataLink or the Toshiba Driver on NT4 Server. StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider for Windows 95 & NT Step 1: Remove Previously installed DKT TAPI Service Provider Applications 1. H Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. C Figure 9-1 9-2 Start Bar 2. Click on the Start Button, Settings, then Control Panel. 3. Highlight the Toshiba DKT TSPI. Click Remove. 4. A confirmation box asks if you want to remove the driver. Click Yes. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration H Figure 9-2 Control Panel Figure 9-3 Selecting the Toshiba Driver C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-3 Computer Telephony Integration Install TSPI and/or StrataLink Packages 1. From the Windows' Start button, select Run. 2. Enter A:\Setup.exe, then follow the Installation Wizard instructions. Figure 9-4 Installing StrataLink and Telephony Driver 3. H When the Package Selection menu appears, select the appropriate option to install either software package or both software packages (recommended). C Figure 9-5 9-4 Selecting Install Options 4. When the Automatic Start-up menu appears, make sure that "Add StrataLink to the Start-up Group" is checked. 5. Follow the remaining Installation Wizard instructions to complete the installation. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Figure 9-6 H Step 2: Including StrataLink in Startup Group Initialise StrataLink and the TAPI Service Provider To initialise StrataLink and TAPI Service Provider 1. Press the Windows Start button, select Programs, StrataLink. 2. Click "Enable TAPI". C Figure 9-7 StrataLink Main Screen The light above this box will be red at first, then yellow as the TAPI Service Provider is initialised and finally green when initialisation is complete.Press Driver Set-up to configure the TAPI Service Provider. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-5 Computer Telephony Integration 3. Press Driver Set-up to configure the TAPI Service Provider. 4. Select the Com Port that will be used to make the connection to the desktop telephone. 5. You may type a name in the Phone Name box. This name appears in the application on the PC. Figure 9-8 H Configuring the Toshiba Driver 6. Select phone type: 10- or 20- key. 7. Select the switch type from the drop-down menu. 8. Disable “Reverse Screen Pop” to turn soft keys on. Enable to turn soft keys off. Note C 9. Current UK software will only support 3 or 4 digit extension numbers. Select a button. 10. Choose a function from the list. 2696 Figure 9-9 Configuring the driver to match the keyset programming 11. Name the button to match the name on the telephone. Repeat for each button to be used (see table over page). 9-6 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Note StrataLink uses the label to create the customising Trigger Rules. Unique button names allow rules that apply individually to that button. Buttons with the same name will have the same rule applied. For example, the two PDN buttons will follow any rule If {Call Ringing} on PDN the {Pop GoldMine}". All other buttons will not respond to this rule. 12. Click OK. Toshiba recommends the following assignements: CT Button H Primary Line/Intercom Button SDN Secondary Appearance PhDn Primary Line CO Line CO Line Speed Spees Dial All Others Feature Key Pooled Line Key CO Line Notes For Working On NT/Windows 2000 1. C Use PDN/Intercom "Telephony Services" must be running for TAPI and StrataLink to work. This can be checked by double clicking on the "Services" icon in Control Panel. 1a. Choose the Telephony services from the list box. The Startup column should be set to Automatic to allow Windows NT to automatically start Telephony Services when an Application, like StrataLink, attempts to use Telephony. 1b. To change the Startup up to automatic press the Startup button. 1c. Choose Automatic for the Startup types. 1d. Press OK. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-7 Computer Telephony Integration TSPI Description Purpose The following technical material can be used by software engineers and programmers developing third party TAPI applications for use with Toshiba telephone systems. Introduction Microsoft "Windows" Telephony is a component of Windows Open Services Architecture. This architecture provides for the operation of telephony services when connected to many different telephone switches. Therefore, an application needs to know only the definition of the API and not its implementation. The telephony model supplies a DLL component, called TAPI32.DLL. (TAPI.DLL on a 16 bit OS) this component resides between the Telephony API called by applications and the Telephony SPI implemented for the specific switch to which the PC is connected. The software applications call TAPI functions that are managed by TAPI.DLL and routed to the Service Provider interface (e.g. Toshiba's DKT SPI) for execution. The relationship between these components is shown in Figure 9-10. H C Figure 9-10 The Telephony API model and Strata CT The Telephone Applications Programming Interface (TAPI) was a joint development of Microsoft and Intel to provide a standard method of connecting Windows based PCs to all types of telephone systems. The standard allows software developers to create applications without having to worry about how the telephone network interface functions. This interface provides three levels of service: Basic, Supplementary and extended Levels of Service. 9-8 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Levels of Service Basic Basic Services are centred around Plain Old Telephony Service (POTS) including a set of re-defined call states and information messages which pass events to the applications. Features of POTS include answering calls, making calls, numbering plans to support dialling and the ability to translate numbers based upon type and location of the user. Supplementary Supplementary Services provide additional features commonly found in most PBXs. These include call features such as Call Transferring, Forwarding, Conferencing, Hold, Park and Pickup. Additional services are defined for interfacing Media Services such as providing interfaces for fax, modems, voice response and tone detection/generation. Release 2.0 of the TAPI specification includes third party call control services for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and future Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM), type services. Extended H C Extended Services provide a method to access features and services beyond the Basic or Supplementary Services. TAPI provides for the passing of messages directly between the telephone system and the application. TAPI only passes these messages directly to either end and does not take action or make interpretations of them. The application, therefore is responsible for the complete interaction of the feature or service provided. Interfaces The Windows Open System Architecture provides two interfaces for Telephony Devices. The TAPI interface provides for the control of calls using a well defined interface and the audio connection is handled in what Microsoft calls a Media Stream. To allow for a standard interface for playing and recording messages, interfacing fax, modem or other devices, a separate application interface is used. The AV API is a common interface that can provide these services in an open manner that can be controlled using the TAPI interface. Strata CT's TSPI Model For the application's developer, the Microsoft standard provides for two device classes: the line device and the phone device. Any physical telephonic device recognised by TAPI fits into one of these two classes and can be treated in a consistent and reliable manner. Strata CT TSPI only supports the line device class. The phone class is for telephone devices controlled by the application. Line Device Model The Strata CT TSPI models its interface as a single-line device with multiple addresses, each having no more than one call appearance. The specific capabilities of the line device and each of the addresses are explained under the function description for lineGetDevCaps and lineGetAddressCaps. Phone Device Model At present, the DKT TSPI does not support the phone device model. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-9 Computer Telephony Integration The DKT TSPI Call State Flow The Call State Flow diagram for the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider V2.36 or above is shown in Figure 9-11 below. Figure 9-11 Call State Flow H System Messages An application receives information in two ways; solicited and unsolicited. Solicited information is requested by the application through a function call such as lineGetDevCaps or lineGetAddressCaps. Unsolicited information arrives in the form of messages. Often, the two mechanisms are used together, as when application receives a LINE_CALLSTATE message, after which it checks the information contained in the LINECALLINFO structure by calling lineGetCallInfo. C Strata DKT TSPI supports the following messages providing unsolicited information. LINE_CALL STATE Sent to an application to notify it about changes in a call's state. LINE_LINEDEVSTATE Sent to the application to notify it about changes in the line status. This message indicates which status item has changed. LINE_ADDRESSSTATE The Service Provider follows with this call-back message giving changes to the state of any address. LINE_CALLINFO A call-back message that notifies of additional information about the call. 9-10 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration LINE_REPLY Messages generated for all asynchronous requests. Toshiba DKT TSPI always uses lineMakeCall in this asynchronous manner. LINE_NEWCALL A message to notify the application of a new call event arriving. Start-up and Shutdown of TAPI lineInitialize An application registers a TAPI connection by calling this function. This function is not passed through to the TSPI but handled by TAPI.DLL. One of the main purposes is to establish a pointer to the application's call-back function to allow unsolicited messages to be registered. Two pieces of information are returned to the application: an application handle and the number of available line devices. Strata CT TSPI supports multiple line devices. H C LineShutdown When the application is done, this command releases the resources and the TAPI environment is disconnected. LineNegotiateAPI Version This function is used to negotiate the API version number to be used. The application provides the range of versions it is compatible with and TAPI.DLL in turn negotiates with the TSPI to determine which version range it supports. LineOpen This function opens the specified device ID for the purpose of monitoring or control by the application. Opening the line returns the handle for the device. The application can then use this handle to answer inbound calls, make outbound calls, or monitor call activities on the line for logging purposes. The application should query the capabilities of the line, (using lineGetDevCaps) before opening the line device. Upon opening the line, a serial port will be allocated and initialised. LineSetStatusMessages This operation allows an application to specify which notification messages the services provider should generate for events related to the status changes for the specified line or any of its addresses. LineGetStatusMessages This function queries the TSPI for current status messages. LineClose This function closes the specified open line device after aborting all outstanding calls and asynchronous operations on the device. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-11 Computer Telephony Integration Receiving Information LineGetDevCaps This function queries a specified line device to determine its telephony capabilities. It is important for an application to call this function before opening the line device. This allows the application to determine which of possible several line devices to use. Returns the supplementary and extended capabilities of a given line device as a data structure of type lineDevCaps: Field Name Setting dwProviderInfoOffset The memory area referenced by these fields will contain the NULLterminated string describing the service provider. The Strata CT service provider is "Toshiba DKT TSPI" dwSwitchInfoSize This memory area is not used by the Toshiba DKT TSPI. dwProviderInfoSize dwSwitchInfoOffset dwPermanentLineID H C dwLineNameSize This field will contain the permanent device ID, as found in TELEPHON.INI dwLineNameOffset This memory area contains the name of the device as defined in Set-up of the driver installed dwStringFormat STRINGFORMAT_ASCH dwAddressModes LINEADDRESSMODE_ADDRESSID dwNumAddresses This field reports the number of addresses found for this device. This is defined in Set-up of the driver installed dwBearerModes 0 dwMaxRate 0 dwMediaModes LINEMEDIAMODE_INTERACTIVEVOICE dwGenerateToneModes dwGenerateToneMaxNumFreq dwGenerateDigitModes dwMonitorToneMaxNunFreq dwMonitorToneMaxNumEntries dwMonitorDigitModes dwGatherDigitsMinTimeout dwGatherDigitsMaxTimeout Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI LINEDIGITMODE_DTMF Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwMedCtlDigitMaxListSize dwMedCtlMediaMaxList Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwMedCtlToneMaxListSize dwMedCtlCallStateMaxListSize dwDevCapFlags 9-12 0 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Field Name Setting dwMaxNumActiveCalls 1 dwAnswerMode LINEANSWERSTATE_DROP dwRingModes 0 LINEDEVSTATE_OTHER LINEDEVSTATE_CONNECTED dwLineStates LINEDEVSTATE_DISCONNECTED LINEDEVSTATE_OPEN LINEDEVSTATE_CLOSE LINEDEVSTATE_NUMCALLS LINEDEVSTATE_REINIT LINEDEVSTATE_TRANSLATECHANGE dwUUIAcceptSize dwUUIAnswerSize H dwUUIMakeCallSize dwUUIDropSize Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwUUISendUserUserInfoSize dwUUICallInfoSize MinDialParams MaxDialParams C These will indicate the dial speed, duration and dial pause duration set by the phone system and are not changeable at the device level DefaultDialParams dwNumTerminals Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwTerminalCapsSize dwTerminalCapsOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwTerminalTextEntrySize dwTerminalTextOffset dwDevSpecificSize dwDevSpecificOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI LineGetAddressCaps This function queries the specified address on the specific line device to determine its telephony capabilities. The Toshiba DKT TSPI returns two sets of values depending whether the line type defined in Set-up of the driver was set for Prime Line/Intercom or any of the other types listed. This function fills the data structure of type LineAddressCaps: Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-13 Computer Telephony Integration Field Name Setting dwLineDeviceID The device ID of the line with which the address is associated dwAddressSize A NULL-terminated string reflecting the name of the key on the station. This is defined during Set-up of the driver dwDevSpecificOffset dwDEVSpecificSize dwDevSpecificOffset dwAddressSharing Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI LINE ADDRESSSHARING_PRIVATE LINEADDRESSSTATE_OTHER | dwAddressStates LINEADDRESSSTATE_INUSEZERO | LINEADDRESSSTATE_INUSEONE | LINEADDRESSSTATE_NUMCALLS | LINEADDRESSSTATE_FORWARD (PDN or INT only) LINECALLINFOSTATE_OTHER | H LINECALLINFOSTATE_APPSPECIFIC | dwCallInfoStates LINECALLINFOSTATE_NUMOWNERINCR | LINECALLINFOSTATE_NUMOWNERDECR | LINECALLINFOSTATE_NUMMONITORS | LINECALLINFOSTATE_DIALPARAMS C dwCallerIDFlags LINECALLPARTYID_UNAVAIL dwCalledIDFlags LINECALLPARTYID_UNAVAIL dwConnectedIDFlags LINECALLPARTYID_UNAVAIL dwRedirectionIDFlags LINECALLPARTYID_UNAVAIL dwRedirectingIDFlags LINECALLPARTYID_UNAVAIL LINECALLSTATE_IDLE | LINECALLSTATE_OFFERING | LINECALLSTATE_DIALTONE | LINECALLSTATE_RINGBACK | LINECALLSTATE_BUSY | dwCallStates LINECALLSTATE_CONNECTED | LINECALLSTATE_PROCEEDING | LINECALLSTATE_ONHOLD | LINECALLSTATE_CONFERENCED | LINECALLSTATE_ONHOLDPENDCONF | LINECALLSTATE_ONHOLDPENDTRANSFER | LINECALLSTATE_UNKNOWN dwDialToneModes 9-14 LINEDIALTONEMODE_UNAVAIL Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Field Name Setting dwBusyModes LINEBUSYMODES_UNAVAIL dwSpecialInfo LINESPECIALINFO_UNAVAIL dwDisconnectModes LINEDISCONNECTMODE_UNKNOWN dwMaxNumActiveCalls 1 dwMaxNumOnHoldCalls 1 dwMaxNumOnHoldPendingCal ls 1 dwMaxNumConference 4 dwMAXNumTransConf 1 LINEADDRCAPFLAGS_BLOCKIDDEFAULT | LINEADDRCAPFLAGS_DIALLED | dwAddrCapFlags LINEADDRCAPFLAGS_ORIGOFFHOOK | LINEADDRCAPFLAGS_AUTORECONNECT | LINEADDRCAPFLAGS_PARTIALDIAL | H LINEADDRCAPFLAGS_PICKUPCALLWAIT LINECALLFEATURE_ADDTOCONF | LINECALLFEATURE_ANSWER | LINECALLFEATURE_BLINDTRANSFER (R3 only) | C LINECALLFEATURE_COMPLETETRANSF | LINECALLFEATURE_DIAL | dwCallFeatures LINECALLFEATURE_DROP | LINECALLFEATURE_HOLD | LINECALLFEATURE_PARK | LINECALLFEATURE_PREPARETOADDCONF | LINECALLFEATURE_SETUPCONF | LINECALLFEATURE_SETUPTRANSFER LINECALLFEATURE_UNHOLD dwRemoveFromConfCaps dwRemoveFromConfState dwTransferModes dwParkModes LINERMOVEFROMCONF_NONE Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI LINETRANSFERMODE_TRANSFER | LINETRANSFERMODE_CONFERENCE LINEPARKMODE_NONDIRECTED LINEFORWARDMODE_UNCOND | dwForwardModes LINEFORWARDMODE_BUSY | LINEFORWARDMODE_NOANSW | LINEFORWARDMODE_BUSYNA | Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-15 Computer Telephony Integration Field Name Setting dwMaxForwardEntries 1 dwMaxSpecificEntries 1 dwMinFwdNumRings 3 dwMaxFwdNumRings 3 dwMaxCallCompletions dwCallCompletionConds Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwCallCompletionModes dwNumCompletionMessages dwCompletionMsgTextEntrySiz e Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwCompletionMsgTextSize dwCompletionMsgTextOffset lineGetAddressStatus This function queries the specified address for its current status. The current status is returned using the data structure lineAddressStatus: H C Field Name Setting dwNumInUse 1 if there is a call associated with the address, 0 otherwise dwNumActiveCalls 1 if there is a call in any state other than ONHOLD at the address, 0 otherwise. dwNumOnHoldCalls 1 if there is a call holding at the address, 0 otherwise dwNumOnHoldPendingCalls 1 if there is a call in either the ONHOLDPENDINGCONF state or the ONHOLDTENDTRANSFER state, 0 otherwise. dwAddressFeatures If there is no call associated with the given address, this field will contain the value - LINEADDRFEATURE_MAKECALL. Otherwise it will be 0. lineGetCallInfo This function returns detailed information about the specified call. The information is returned in a data structure of the type LineCallInfo: Field name Setting dwLineDeviceID The number of the line device being addressed. dwAddressID The address ID for the call associated dwBearerMode LINEBEARERMODE_VOICE dwRate 0 dwMediaMode LINEMEDIAMODE_INTERACTIVEVOICE dwAppSpecific Retains the value passed in lineSetAppSpecific. 9-16 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Field name Setting dwCallID Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwRelatedCallID Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwCallParamFlags If this call was initiated with lineMakeCall, this field will be the same as the dwCallParamFlags passed into that function via the LINECALLPARAMS structure. Otherwise, it will be 0. dwCallStates dwMonitorDigitModes dwMonitorMediaModes Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI DialParams dwOrigin dwReason H dwCompletionID Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwNumOwners 1 dwNumMonitors 0 dwCountryCode dwTrunk Always xffffffff (Unknown) dwCallerIDFlags C dwCallerIDSize dwCallerIDOffset Provides Caller ID number when provided by the public network. Internal calls give caller ID number if LCD Name is off and Caller ID name if the LCD name feature is on. dwCalledIDFlags dwCalledIDSize dwCalledIDOffset The DDI number received or Strata CT alphanumeric tag are provided. dwConnectedIDFlags Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwConnectedIDSize dwConnectedIDOffest Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwRedirectionIDFlags Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwRedirectionIDSize dwRedirectionIDOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwRedirectingIDFlags Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwRedirectingIDSize dwRedirectingIDOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwAppNameSize dwAppNameOffset Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-17 Computer Telephony Integration Field name Setting dwDisplayableAddressSize dwDisplayableAddressOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwCalledPartySize dwCalledPartyOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwCommentSize dwCommentOffset H dwDisplaySize dwDisplayOffset If the call being referenced is the active call on the line, these fields will contain the contents of the two line LCD display currently being shown. dwUserUserInfoSize dwUserUserInfoOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwHighLevelCompSize dwHighLevelCompOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwLowLevelCompSize dwLowLevelCompOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwChargingInfoSize dwChargingInfoOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI lineGetCallStatus This function returns the current status of the specified call as a data structure of type lineCallStatus: C Field Name Setting dwCallState This field will reflect the actual state of the call. dwCallStateMode This field will reflect the actual mode of the state listed above. dwCallPrivelege This reflects the privelege granted to the call. dwCallFeatures This field will indicate all of the features allowable, given the current state of the call. dwDevSpecificSize dwDevSpecificOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI lineGetID This function returns a device ID for the specified device class associated with the selected line, address or call. Toshiba DKT TSPI uses this function to identify the real device ID when the line device was opened using LINE_MAPPER as a device ID. This function call can also be used to obtain the device ID of the phone or media (e.g. mci, waveform, mci midi, wave, fax, etc.) associated with a call, address or line. The result is returned in a data structure VARSTRING pointed to by IpDeviceID: 9-18 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Field Name Setting dwStringFormat STRINGFORMAT_BINARY dwStringSize dwStringOffset 4 A DWORD containing the ID for the line device specified lineGetLineDevStatus This operation queries the specified open line device for its current status. If successful it returns the current status of the specified open line device using a data structure LineDevStatus. Field Name H Setting dwNumOpens The number of instances this application opened, normally 1. dwOpenMediaModes LINEMEDIAMODE_INTERACTIVEVOICE dwNumActiveCalls The number of calls ringing and/or connected dwNumOnHoldCalls The number of calls that are on hold. dwNumOnHoldPendCalls The number of calls pending in the ONHOLDPENDCONF or the ONHOLDPENDTRANSFER states. dwLineFeatures LINEFEATURE_MAKECALL if no active call exists, otherwise 0. dwNumCallCompletions C dwRingMode Always 0. dwSignalLevel Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwBatteryLevel Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwRoamMode LINEROAMMODE_UNAVAIL dwDevStatusFlags The current status of the device. dwTerminalModesSize dwTerminalModesOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI dwDevSpecificSize dwDevSpecificOffset Not supported by Toshiba DKT TSPI lineGetAddressID This function is used to map a phone number assigned to a line device back to is dwAddressID in the range of 0 to the number of addresses minus 1 returned in the line's device capabilities. LineMakeCall allows the application to make a call by specifying a line handle and address on the line. The address can be specified either as dwAddressID, as a phone number, or as a device specific name or identifier. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-19 Computer Telephony Integration Basic Call Control lineMakeCall This function places a call on the specified line to the specified address. The application has the option to specify an originating address on the specified line. The TSPI models the addresses based upon the line type when Set-up was used to define the driver. If the line is busy when a call attempt is made, the currently active call will be disconnected. If no destination address is provided, a new call will be created and the line will transition to the LINECALLSTATE_DIALTONE state. The lineDial function can be used at this point to dial the destination address. LINECALLPARAM (default) Field Name H C Setting dwBearerMode LINEBEARERMODE_VOICE dwMinRate dwMaxRate 0 (3.1kHz) 0 dwMediaMode LINEMEDIAMODE_INTERACTIVEVOICE dwCallParamFlags 0 dwAddressMode LINEADDRESSMODE_ADDRESSID dwAddressID anyavailable DialParams 0,0,0,0 dwOrigAddressSize dwOrigAddressOffset 0 dwDisplayableAddressSize dwDisplayableAddressOffset 0 dwCalledPartySize dwCalledPartyOffset 0 dwCommentSize dwCommentOffset 0 dwUserUserInfoSize dwUserUserInfoOffset 0 dwHighLevelCompSize dwHighLevelCompOffset 0 dwLowLevelCompSize dwLowLevelCompOffset 0 dwDevSpecificSize 0 dwDevSpecificOffset 9-20 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration lineDial This function dials the specified dialable number. Use this operation in all situations where you need to send address information to the switch on an existing call; such as dialling the address of the party to transfer a call etc. lineAnswer This function accepts the specified OFFERED call. The optional user-to-user information is ignored. lineDrop This function drops or disconnects the specified call or abandons a call attempt in progress. When this function returns, the call will be in the IDLE state. The optional user-to-user information is ignored. Because the DKT TSPI can drop calls only to which it is connected, this feature is allowed for calls in the CONNECTED state only. In addition, the service provider keeps track of whether a given call is owned by a TAPI application, in order to avoid dropping calls initiated or answered by other applications. If the call is considered to be owned by a TAPI application, it must be either initiated, answered or placed on hold by a TAPI application. H LineDeallocateCall This function releases resources used to keep track of a given call. This function can only be called while the state is idle. Holding Calls C lineHold This function places the specified call on hard hold. This can be used when in either LINECALLSTATE_CONNECTED or LINE CALLSTATE_PROCEEDING states. The application can place a call on hold even if it did not originate or answer that call. lineUnhold This function retrieves the specified held call. This feature is only valid when the call is in the LINECALLSTATE_ONHOLD state. Transferring Calls TAPI provides two mechanisms for call transfer: blind transfer or consultation transfer. ◆ In blind transfer, an existing call is transferred to a specified destination address in one phase using lineBlind transfer. ◆ In a consultation transfer, the existing call is first prepared for transfer to another address using lineSetup Transfer. This places the existing call on consultation hold, and identifies the call as the target for the next transfer-completion request. This command also allocates a consultation call that can be used to establish the consultation call with the party to which the call will be transferred. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-21 Computer Telephony Integration The application can dial the extension of the destination party on the consultation call using lineDial, or it can drop and deallocate the consultation call and instead activate an existing held call (lineUnhold). Finally, the application completes the transfer of the call on transfer hold to the destination party by using lineComplete Transfer. At this point, both call appearances revert to the IDLE state. lineBlind Transfer This function performs a single-step transfer of the specified call to the specified destination address. The IpszDestAddress is interpreted in the same manner as lineMakeCall function. lineSetup Transfer This function initiates the transfer of the specified call. It establishes a consultation call, IphdConsultCall, on which the party can be dialled that can become the destination of the transfer. The original call transitions to the ONHOLDPENDTRANSFER state. lineComplete Transfer This function completes the transfer of the specified call to the party, or enter a three-way conference, connected in the consultation call. H Conferencing A conference call must begin as regular two-party call. Additional parties can be added, one at a time. Calling lineSetupConference prepares a given call for the addition of another party, and this action establishes the conference call. This operation takes the original two-party call as input, allocates a conference call, connects the original call to the conference, and allocates a consultation call whose handle is returned to the application. The application can then use lineDial on the consultation call to establish a connection to the next party to be added. lineDrop can be used to abandon this call attempt. The third party is added with the function lineAddToConference, which specifies both the conference call and the consultation call. To add additional parties to an existing conference call, the application uses linePrepareAddToConference. When calling this function, the application supplies the handle of an existing conference call. The function allocates a consultation call that can later be added to the conference call and returns a consultation call handle to the application. This conference call is then placed on conference hold. Once the consultation call exists, it can be added to the existing conference call with lineAddToConference. Once a call becomes a member of the conference call, the member's call state reverts to CONFERENCED while the conference call's state becomes CONNECTED. The call handle to the conference call and all the added parties remain called as individual calls. C lineSetupConference This function sets up a conference call for the addition of the third party. The function allocates a consultation call for connecting to the party that is to be added to the call and returns a newly created conference call with call state of ONHOLDPENDCONF. lineAddToConference This function adds a consultation call, specified by hdConsultCall, to an existing conference call, specified by hdConfCall. 9-22 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration linePrepareAddToConference This function prepares an existing conference call for the addition of another party. It creates a new, temporary consultation call which can subsequently be added to the conference with the lineAddToConference. Call Parking linePark Parks a given call at another address. lineUnpark Retrieves a parked call. Call Forwarding H line Forward Set or cancel call forwarding requests. Call Pickup C linePickup Pick up a call that is alerting at another station. Miscellaneous Functions lineConfigDialog This function displays a configuration dialogue for the DKT TSPI device. The configurable options are the minimum number of digits necessary for an outside number and the access code that should be used to obtain an outside line. These two parameters are used when a complete destination address is supplied with lineMakeCall to determine whether the destination is internal or external. Any changes made will take place immediately; the service provider allows changes to be made while the line is open. lineSetAppSpecific This operation sets the application-specific field of the specified call's LINECALLINFO structure. Its usage is entirely defined by the application and uninterrupted by the Telephony API or the service provider. When the field is changed, the service provider sends a LINE_CALLINFO message with an indication that the dwAppSpecific field has changed. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-23 Computer Telephony Integration Commands and Messages Not Supported H C LineSecureCall lineRemoveFromConference LineSwapHold lineSetMediaControl LineSetCallParams lineMonitorDigits LineMonitorMedia lineGatherDigits LineMonitorTone lineGenerateTone LineGenerateDigits lineRedirect LineAccept lineUncompleteCall LineCompleteCall lineDevSpecific LineDevSepcificFeature LINE_MONITORMEDIA LineSetTerminal LINE_MONITORTONE LINE_MONITORDIGITS LINE_DEVSPECIFIC LINE_CALLDEVSPECIFIC LINE_DEVSPECIFICFEATURE LINE_CALLDEVSPECIFICFEATURE Extended Services lineNegotiateExtVersion The following two extended services are available when an application negotiates for a revision level 1 extended service. Snapshot Data Structure (Application) The snapshot data structure is provided for applications that want to provide an image of the DKT 2000 & 2500 phone within the PC Application Program along with their TAPI interface. The Toshiba Service Provider will send a message each time an update occurs in the LED or LCD display that looks like a snapshot of the phone which can be used to provide the identical display in the PC as seen on the phone. The following chart is a description of the meaning of the ongoing displays when calls are being handled by the Strata CT. For example, an incoming call will cause a series of messages to change the LED flash rate each second to either 10Hz or OFF until the call is answered. The LCD and LED events are available to applications who negotiate with the service provider for extension version 1.0 (lineNegotiateExtVersion). After successfully negotiating this version, the service provider will send the LINE_LINEDEVSTATE notification message with the dwParam1 set to LINEDEVSTATE_DEVSPECIFIC each time the information changes. To retrieve this snapshot view of the DKT's current LED/LCD state, call lineGetLineDevStatus. The service provider will fill in the dwDevSpecific section of LINEDEVSTATUS structure with a DKTSNAPSHOT structure. This structure is defined as follows: 9-24 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration #pragma pack (1) #define MAX_LABEL 30 #define MAX_KEYS 20 #define DISPLAY 16 enum EledFlashRate enumELed Colour enum EkeyType {EFlashON = 1, EFlash1Hz, EFlash2Hz, EFlash10Hz, EFlashIUse, EFlash4Hz, EFlashOff}; {ERed = 0, EGreen}; (INVALIDKEY = 0, ECO_Line, EDND, EFeature_Key, EFlash, EHot_Line, EIntercom, EMessage_Waiting, EMultiLine_Hunt, EPrime_Line, EPrivate_Line, ERelease, ESecondary_Appearance, ESecondary_Private_Line, ESpeed_Dial, ESpeed_Dial_Pause, EData, EData_Release}; typedef struct_tagFLEXKEY { //Current LED Flash Rate EledFlashRate eFlashRate; //Current LED Colour H C ELedColour eColour; //Key Type EKeyType eType; //Label assigned to key char szLabel[MAX_LABEL+1]; }FLEXKEY, *PFLEXKEY; typedef struct_tagDKTSNAPSHOT { //10 or 20 button int nNumKeys; Flex Key Array FLEXKEY FlexKeys[MAX_KEYS]; //Speaker LED Status Colour (Red or off) EledFlashRate eSpeaker; //MIC LED Status Colour (Red or off) EledFlashRate eMic; //Msg LED Status Colour (Red or off) ELed FlashRate eMsg; //Upper line of the display char szUpperLine[DISPLAY+1]; //Lower line of the display char szLowerLine[DISPLAY+1]; }DKTSNAPSHOT, *PDKTSNAPSHOT; #pragma pack (0) Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-25 Computer Telephony Integration DKT Key Access If an application program needs to operate as the DKT phone connected to the PC, the driver supports a dialling code feature system. By using the "lineMakeCall" function any key on the DKT 2000 & 2500 phone can be activated. Dialling instructions are indicated by "!" followed by a two digit code which represents telephone key operations. The following table defines the dialling code for each key function. Single Action Keys H C 9-26 Single Action Keys Dual Action Keys Key Name Code Key Name Code Key Name ON OFF Flex Key 01 !05 Digit 1 !24 Hook Switch !07 !15 Flex Key 02 !13 Digit 2 !32 Mic !45 !48 Flex Key 03 !21 Digit 3 !40 Spkr !44 !46 Flex Key 04 !29 Digit 4 !25 Conf/Trns !22 !23 Flex Key 05 !37 Digit 5 !33 Vol Up !28 !50 Flex Key 06 !00 Digit 6 !41 Vol Dn !36 !38 Flex Key 07 !01 Digit 7 !26 Scroll !47 !49 Dial !36 !37 Flex Key 08 !02 Digit 8 !34 Flex Key 09 !03 Digit 9 !42 Flex Key 10 !04 Digit 0 !35 Flex Key 11 !08 Digit* !27 Flex Key 12 !09 Digit # !43 Flex Key 13 !10 Msg !30 Flex Key 14 !11 Redial !14 Flex Key 15 !12 Hold !06 Flex Key 16 !16 Mode !31 Flex Key 17 !17 Page !39 Flex Key 18 !18 Flex Key 19 !19 Flex Key 20 !20 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Using StrataLink for CTI Connections Many Microsoft "Windows"-based Computer Telephony software products either do not have a TAPI compliant version of their product, or need the additional capabilities of a "middleware" software to control how the application functions with Strata CT call handling. Two examples are given below. ◆ Elan Software's Goldmine® 95 V3.0 ◆ Symantec's ACT! V3.0. H StrataLink can also be made to work with other contact managers using DDE, this is easily achieved by adding Rules and Actions in the StrataLink application. It can also be made to integrate with other "back office" business software application that have their own scripting languages. Both scenarios would require some specialist knowledge of the scripting language and DDE, such types of integration can not be supported by Toshiba Information Systems, but we are willing to help by talking to systems integrators to assist where possible. StrataLink will work with Toshiba's V2.36 TSPI or above. Both will be packaged together and will ship with each PCIU. The installation procedure will provide options for installing the TSPI, StrataLink, or both. StrataLink communicates with these software applications using Microsoft Windows Open System Architecture capabilities for Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). StrataLink accepts a DDE exchange to provide for outbound dialling and creates DDE instructions which in turn create actions within the linked application. The program is designed to work with Toshiba's TAPI Service Provider to receive events from the telephone system and collect information for the application. It also provides dialling instructions which ensure the number sent to the telephone system matches the local dialling plan. Figure 9-12 shows how StrataLink is used with Windows applications to provide telephone services with your desktop PC. C Figure 9-12 Computer Telephony Connection Using Toshiba’s StrataLink Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-27 Computer Telephony Integration StrataLink Functions StrataLink has three basic functions. It: ◆ Accepts events from the telephone, applies filtering rules and conditions and causes actions to take place in the application. ◆ Provides for outbound calling and call control from the application. ◆ Provides tools for testing the interface and debugging or monitoring the call events. Processes Telephone Events Using Windows TAPI, StrataLink accepts the Strata CT commands and provides a selection of "Actions" based upon call events, called Triggers. Each Trigger can have one or more conditions applied to it to control how, when, or if the Action is to be performed. Each Action has a limited set of parameters that can be changed to customise the application for the user. A list of Trigger events can be selected for the Action desired. Provides Outbound Calling and Call Control The Computer Telephony Software creates events for controlling the telephone. The events are controlled using DDE exchanges originating from the application and received by StrataLink. In some programs, the application software must be configured for this operation. H Test, Debugs, and Monitors StrataLink provides several important testing and debugging functions. These tools enable the installer to verify whether the link is functional and by using the TAPI link, to view the details of the information being passed. Without these tools, the troubleshooting or verifying operation is reduced to guessing. C Software Application Initiated Events Dialling Preferences Most application programs when attempting to dial using a DDE command are not able to specify the line appearance for the call. A line appearance must be specified for: ◆ Intercom Calls - dialling numbers with less than five digits. ◆ Local Calls - calls that match the local area code specified of calls with only six or seven digits. ◆ Long Distance Calls - any call with 10 or more digits. StrataLink provides an easy-to-use dialogue box (Figure 9-13) available in the Main Menu's Set-up sub-Menu to set your dialling preferences. Local Calls Application programs may dial the area code of the telephone number even if it is a local call. Thus, by setting the Local Area Code field, StrataLink detects these calls, strips off the Area Code of the telephone number, and dials using the 'Local' appearance. For example, if your Local Area Code is '0171' and the application attempts to dial '0171-515-1234', the program converts the number to '515-1234' before dialling. 9-28 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Long Distance Calls Application programs may not insert a '0' before a long distance call. By using the option 'Add 0+ if Missing', StrataLink can automatically detect and correct this. For example, if the application attempts to dial a long distance call like '171-555-1234' (and your Local Area Code is '0181'), this option converts the number to '0171-555-1234' before dialling. Application Program DDE Commands All applications mentioned in this bulletin can send the appropriate DDE commands to StrataLink. Some application programs (for example GoldMine) must be configured to use these DDE commands. StrataLink, wherever necessary, offers more than one format for each command. (See your program's Application Notes for applicable commands.) The following are some examples: H C Figure 9-13 Dialling preference Screen Dial Dial a telephone number on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not specified, the appropriate default appearance (Intercom, Local, or Long Distance) is used. [Dial, 'Phone Number', 'appearance'] ..... or [DialNumber ('Intercom or Trunk ID', 'Outside Phone Number')] Answer Answer a Ringing Call on the specified line appearance. If the line appearance is not specified, the current appearance is used. [Answer, <appearance>] ..... or [Answer Call ()] Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-29 Computer Telephony Integration Hang-up Hang-up on an active call. [Hang-up] ..... or [DropCall ()] Telephone System Events Trigger Rules and Conditions The Trigger Rules are established by the installer or user so that specific Actions can be performed when an event occurs. The Triggering event can be any number of things (e.g. Call Ringing, Call Connected or Call Cleared). The existing Trigger Rules can be displayed (Figure 9-14), edited, deleted or new rules added to meet the needs of the application. These functions are important when setting up the desktop PC. Multiple rules can be created at the same time. H C Figure 9-14 Trigger Rules Screen Add/ Change a Trigger Rule When adding or changing a rule, the following fields are displayed on the Add/ Change Trigger Rule Screen (Figure 9-15): 9-30 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Figure 9-15 Add/Change Trigger Rule Screen Filters H C When the triggering event occurs, it may need to pass specific filters or conditions before the Action is performed. Filters currently available include: ◆ Caller ID - required/not required. If there is no Caller ID associated with a call, you may not want to have an Action performed. The most common example is 'Screen Pop' where you must select 'any Number' to stop an Action. To trigger an event anytime a call rings, regardless of whether Caller ID is present, you must select 'none Required'. ◆ Trigger Delay - a short delay, expressed in tenths of a second, that will occur prior to the action. The delay is needed to send Caller ID information for supervised transfer calls. ◆ Appearance - the Trigger can be used on any line or a specific line. If the same Trigger applies to some lines but not to others, the rule must be entered for each line to which the rule applies. Conditions Conditions (i.e. Phone State) include performing the action 'if not talking' or 'trunk number is available'. You may not want to have an Action performed while you are talking on a call. Again, the most common example is 'Screen Pop' where you must select 'If Not Talking' to prevent an Action from occurring until you have finished with the call. Actions and Parameters Actions are set-up by the installer to perform a specific function (e.g. Screen Pop Goldmine, Pop ACT, or Beep My Pager). These Actions can then be used as part of a Trigger Rule and performed when a specific event occurs. The existing Actions can be displayed (Figure 9-16), edited, deleted or new Actions added. Important! Deleting or adding Actions without instruction from Toshiba is not recommended. Editing Actions should always be in accordance with the program's Application Notes. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-31 Computer Telephony Integration Figure 9-16 Add/Change Actions Screen Add/ Edit Action When adding or editing an Action, the following fields are displayed on the Add/ Edit Action Screen (Figure 9-17): H Important! Do not change these items without specific instructions in the program's Application Notes. C Figure 9-17 Add/Edit Actions Screen Action Name Every event Action has a 'Name' which you should set to describe the result the Action is trying to cause, like 'Beep My Pager'. This name is used in the Trigger Rules. Type Select from the pull-down menu the type of Action to be performed. Each Action has one or more parameters that must be provided by the user/ installer. These parameters often contain 'tokens' which enable the inclusion of real-time information (e.g. Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.) in the parameter. The choices are as follows: 9-32 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration DDE Execute Sends a specific DDE command to the program you specify. This Action is very flexible and can be used to communicate with many different types of programs for a variety of purposes (e.g. Screen Pop). DDE Execute String parameters include: ◆ App Name - This should be set to the DDE name of the application to receive the DDE event. ◆ App Topic - This should be set to the DDE 'Topic' for the application to receive the DDE event. ◆ DDE Execute String - This is the command to be executed by the application receiving this DDE event. Typically this command includes token(s) so that realtime information is included in the command string. Show Test Params Button When you set-up an Action, it is always a good idea to make sure the Action works correctly. The Test button will pop-up a Test Action screen for this purpose. Using this screen, you can simulate parameters (e.g. Calling Phone Number and Calling Name) and press the Test button to execute the Action with the test parameters. Parameters can be changed for the specific test. H Tokens Some parameters contain Token(s) that enable the inclusion of real-time information (like the Caller Phone Number, Date, Time, etc.). The tokens are: Table 9-1 C Tokens Token Function Token Function &D Date: &E Called Phone Number &P Caller Phone Number &F Called Name &N Caller Name &A TAPI Appearance Number &H Caller Phone Number Hyphanated: 714-555-1234 &B &I Caller Phone Number Hyphanated: (714)-555-1234 &G &T Time of Day: HH:MM Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 TAPI Appearance Name TAPI Call ID 9-33 Computer Telephony Integration Example Actions Using Tokens The following are some examples of how Actions can be set-up: (These are only examples for information and Toshiba Information Systems do not support these software applications.) Table 9-2 Token Usage Examples Pop Goldmine ‘95 - Screen Pop Elan Software’s Goldmine ‘95 Action Type DDE Executive App Topic DATA App Name GOLDMINE DDE Executive String [CALLERID (“&I”, “&N”, “2”)] Pop TeleMagic - Screen Pop TeleMagic software from TeleMagic, Inc. Action Type H Pop TeleMagic Index Level Leave this blank Index Name “TelePhone#” Search String &P Beep My Pager - ‘Golden Page’ software from Golden Gate Software While the telephone is ringing, this Action displays a message with the caller’s Caller ID on a pager so that the person can decide whether to pickup the call. C Action Type DDE Execute App Name SENDPAGE App Topic SYSTEM DDE Executive String PAGE,MYPAGER,“Call From: &H,&N”,1 Pop Day Timer Organizer - Screen pop Day-Timer Organizer (Day Timer Technologies) Action Type DDE Executive App Name DTO_AxxConnect App Topic SYSTEM DDE Executive String [CallRinging (“&G”, “&P”, “&N”, “2”)] For Day Time Organizer call logging and screen-pop to work correcctly, you should also enable a Trigger Rule to send a Call Cleared message whenever a Call Clears. Action Type 9-34 DDE Executive App Name DTO_AxxConnect App Topic SYSTEM DDE Executive String [CallCleared (“&G”, “&P”, “&N”, “2”)] Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration TeleMagic Link (TeleMagic is not supported by Toshiba Information Systems. The details below are provided for informational purposes only.) The TeleMagic program (from TeleMagic, Inc.) communicates with StrataLink via a special link called TeleMagic. The TeleMagic Link appears automatically each time StrataLink is accessed and provides a means to set-up and monitor the communication between the two. Important! For this link to operate, the TeleMagic program must be loaded and operational If you select the Auto Activate Link option, StrataLink automatically attempts to establish the TeleMagic link periodically (every 30 seconds or so) until the link is established. Once the Link is established, the Link Active light changes from Red to Green, and dialling and Screen-Pop can function. For Screen-Pop to work, the appropriate Trigger Rules must be setup. H Status light; Red - Not Active/TSPI missing. Yellow - Resetting. Green - Active and working C Figure 9-18 TeleMagic Link Menu Pop TeleMagic Sends a 'Pop' or 'LookUp' command to TeleMagic with the configuration you specify. This is used to Screen-Pop the TeleMagic contact manager when a call rings in. Pop TeleMagic parameters are: ◆ Index Level - Tells TeleMagic the level on which to perform the search (e.g. 1,2,3 etc.). Leaving this parameter blank causes the search to occur on the level in present use. ◆ Index Name - Selects the TeleMagic index to be used for the search. For Screen Pop this is typically 'TelePhone #', but since the Indexes within TeleMagic are programmable this could be set to any appropriate index. The TeleMagic Link must be operational before you can make this selection. ◆ Search String - This should be set to whatever string should be searched for using the above two parameters. For Screen Pop this is typically the Calling Phone number which would be the token &P. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-35 Computer Telephony Integration Testing TSPI Link The TAPI dialogue box (Figure 9-19) provides a method for verifying the TAPI Driver is setup and operational. To check the driver, select an appearance (e.g. Intercom) and click on each of the Pickup, Dial and Hang-up keys individually. To complete the test, you should repeat this procedure for each line appearance. To access the set-up screen for the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider, click on the Driver Set-up button. The Configure Keys section of the screen should be programmed properly as they will be interrogated and used as the Appearances by StrataLink. Whenever you make configuration changes to the TAPI Service Provider, it is recommended that you exit and restart StrataLink. Status light; Red - Not Active/TSPI missing. Yellow - Resetting. H Figure 9-19 TAPI Test Screen C Debugging Provides two tools for monitoring communication activity to and from StrataLink. This is especially useful when you are setting-up and testing Actions and Trigger Rules. Show Calls The Show Calls menu opens an Active Call Queue screen showing all telephone calls presently known to StrataLink. This window can be kept open while other activities and functions are performed. Figure 9-20 9-36 Active Calls Queue Screen Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Show Events The Show Events menu opens a Debug Events screen which shows real-time events as they occur. The Display option on this window allows you to choose which event you will monitor. This window can be kept open while other activities and functions are performed. H Figure 9-21 C Debug Events Screen Using Goldmine ‘95 with StrataLink Goldmine '95 for Microsoft "Windows" is a powerful contact management PC application that adds important functions to your telephone system. It works well with a Strata CT system when used with StrataLink as a TAPI compatible middleware to provide database lookup and "screen-pop" features. When using Goldmine '95, understanding its capabilities and limitations are important for proper use. The purpose of this bulletin is to assist you in understanding how to install, set options, and use Goldmine '95 as a TAPI application with the Strata CT system. This application's bulletin provides ideas for linking Goldmine '95 to the Strata CT system, but always consult your Goldmine manuals when customising Goldmine for your application. This bulletin only supplies ideas and set-up parameters to create an interface for linking the telephone network information with the Goldmine database. For more in-depth information on the features, capabilities and settings for Goldmine you should consult the supplier or manufacturer of the software. Linking Goldmine '95 to the Toshiba StrataLink The Goldmine '95 contact management software package, used with the StrataLink utility, can efficiently integrate with the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider. For outgoing calls, Goldmine '95 receives the dial string sent by Goldmine '95 and relays the number to the StrataLink/ TAPI Service Provider. For incoming calls, TAPI messages are sent to StrataLink from the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider. StrataLink applies the conditions and filters to this event and creates an action with Goldmine '95 which causes Goldmine '95 to locate the phone database number and display any matching entries, commonly referred to as a "screen-pop". Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-37 Computer Telephony Integration Figure 9-22 Overview of how StrataLink works Goldmine ‘95 Goldmine '95 Installation Guidelines Getting Started H ◆ Install the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider by inserting Disk #1 in the floppy drive and use Windows, Run ... and enter A:\SETUP. Follow the instructions provided by the Install Wizard. (See Section 1 of this document.) ◆ Install Goldmine '95 by following the installation instructions in the Goldmine '95 User Guide. Enabling the Interface C To provide a full desktop dialling and screen-pop interface between the Toshiba StrataLink and Goldmine 95: ◆ In the directory where Goldmine is installed (default is "C:\Goldmine"), add the following two lines with a text editor or word processor to each of the INI files. The INI files are named after each user. For example, user "Jerry" would have a USER.INI file named "JERRY.INI". [Modem] DDEDial=Dial,STRATLNK,[Dial,"%s",""] Note In Goldmine 5.0 or later make sure this line is the only line under the [Modem} section. ◆ If the phone set-up uses a trunk access code to dial outside the Strata DK system, then the trunk access code can be included, as shown below, using Dial 9 as the access code. [Modem] [DDEDial=Dial,STRATLNK,[Dial,"9, %s",""] 9-38 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Note A Comma was added as a pause to ensure dial tone is returned prior to dialling. This is not needed if Dial 9 accesses LCR. ◆ If the user wants all calls to be placed using a specific line, for example, a telemarketing application in which the user is assigned a specific line for all their calls, then the following string can be used to assign that line to a specific button on the phone: [Modem] [DDEDial=Dial,STRATLNK,[Dial,"9, %s","x"] Note Were "x" is the number of the key that the call is to be made on. Key numbers on the DKT start at "0" from the bottom left key to "19" at the top right of the keystrip. Changing or adding actions in StrataLink The actions available from the selection menu have been tested to work with the Goldmine 95 software. When you change or add new actions, make sure that you fully understand GoldMine's DDE capabilities, because they are made at your own risk. Toshiba Technical Support only supports the predefined actions. H C Figure 9-23 POP action for Goldmine The DDE execute string, [CALLERID("&P","&N","2")], can be changed to control how the screens work in Goldmine when a call arrives. The most common option in the third parameter is defined as "0", in the example above. This setting displays only the current record of the current call. Goldmine has four available options for this string which are: "0"Displays an incoming call dialogue box as the call arrives. Additional actions are needed to find the additional records in Goldmine. "1"Displays a new record on the screen in addition to any open records currently displayed. "2"Displays only the current record of the call being processed at the moment. "4"Displays a list of all contact records when a specific contact cannot be found. You can also select an existing record, update the record, or make an additional entry to the record. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-39 Computer Telephony Integration Adding screen-pops in StrataLink Normally, StrataLink needs a Caller ID number to process calls. Using the Caller ID number to delay an action is the preferred method if the user is talking on another line. The action "pop the next record" occurs if the current call is terminated or placed on hold. Note H Figure 9-24 A time delay can be used, if needed, for your application and for selected line buttons. Trigger Rules for Goldmine The two Trigger Rules shown above enable a screen-pop for two situations: when a call arrives and the user is not busy on another call {Call Ringing}; and, when a call is connected {Call Connected}. The user can handle multiple calls. If your first call is placed on hold, the second call is identified. You can chose to return to the first (held) call or to answer the second call. C Figure 9-25 Call Ringing Trigger If you choose to return to the first call, the second rule causes the "Pop Goldmine" action to occur again, bringing back the record for that caller. This is a very powerful tool for users handling numerous calls. 9-40 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Figure 9-26 Call Connected Trigger Beneficial Options Available in Goldmine 95 H C Goldmine has many capabilities for customising the application for the user. The following is not intended to provide a complete description of these capabilities and the installer should rely upon the Goldmine manuals for specific details. Dialling All Numbers as a complete number Your application may have to dial all calls using the complete national/ international number. Goldmine uses the Dialling Preferences of Windows 95 to determine the home area code, and it automatically strips these digits from the dialled number before dialling. To resolve this issue two methods are available: ◆ Change the area code in Windows Dialling Preferences to an unused code. With this adjustment, Goldmine can send all numbers as 11 or less digits. This could create a problem if other programs, such as a fax application, use the same setting. In this case the area code would have to be entered correctly. ◆ Create additional prefixes and suffixes to customise the dialling of your number by using the PREDIAL.INI file in Goldmine. Details can be found in the Goldmine Reference Manual under Customising Goldmine. ◆ Create a plan to dial all digits when the Windows Dialling Preferences area code is preset by using a text editor to edit the PREDIAL.INI file. For our example we are using area code 121. Input the following parameter into the PREDIAL.INI file: [Prefix] 121=0-121 Goldmine allows you to add functions to the File Menu or the Main Menu Bar in Windows. To add these customised functions, you have to add the new item to your USER.INI file. The DDE interface between StrataLink and Goldmine is used to create functions that provide these additional controls of your Strata CT calls. Note The "USER.INI" file name is the user name of the last person who logged on. For example, JERRY.INI, for the user Jerry. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-41 Computer Telephony Integration In the example below, you can see how the new functions for handling calls are added. Type these lines in the [File Menu] section of your USER.INI file using a text editor if it exists. If it does not, you have to add the section by typing [FileMenu], and add the new functions below the [FileMenu] line. [FileMenu] Opt1=Hangup, STRATLNK,[Hangup]Disconnect the current call Opt2=Answer,STRATLNK,[AnswerCall()]Answer the ringing line Opt3=ACD Calls,STRATLNK,[Answer,4]Answer only the specified line. In this case, the calls on the ACD Button. You can define the icons on the Windows tool bar to include Goldmine functions, and place the icons on the tool bar using the "drag and drop" feature on the insert item feature. Defining a tool bar icon ◆ Right-click on an empty space on any tool bar, and a pop-up menu is displayed. From the pop-up menu, select Record Macro. H ◆ Click on the File Menu, then select Hang-up, Answer, or ACD Calls. ◆ Click the Stop Recording macro button (square icon) and place the icon on a tool bar. Repeat the steps for each icon to be defined Placing icons on the tool bar C ◆ Right-click on any blank space on the tool bar, then select Insert Item. ◆ Choose the icon to be inserted on the toolbar. ◆ Right-click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the icon onto the tool bar. Repeat this process for adding icons. Any icon can be moved using this same right-click and drag process. The following Goldmine Main Window is an example of the customised tool bars which have all of the standard icons for accessing Phone1, Phone2, Phone3, Fax, Start Timer, Incoming Call Timer, Insert a Note, and the three icons defined on the prior page. 2435 Figure 9-27 9-42 Goldmine Toolbar Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration All macro icons are identified by the numerical graphic on its button, but when the mouse is held over the button, a description of the macro and the functions of the button appear in a bubble. Using ACT! 3.0 with StrataLink ACT! 3.0 provides a TAPI compliant interface that can be linked with StrataLink to provide an extremely powerful application working with a Strata CT system. This combination of using TAPI and StrataLink overcomes many limitations of ACT! 3.0. This includes handling multiple calls, having screens "pop" when calls are connected, and automatically opening the search to all records for each "screen pop" action. When using ACT!, it is important to understand its capabilities and limitations so it can be used properly. The purpose of this bulletin is to assist you in understanding how to install, set options, and use ACT! as a TAPI application with the Strata CT system. This application's bulletin provides ideas for linking ACT! 3.0 to the Strata CT system, but always consult your ACT! manuals when customising ACT! for your application. This bulletin only supplies ideas and set-up parameters to create an interface for linking the telephone network information with the ACT! database. For more in-depth information on the features, capabilities and settings for ACT! you should consult the supplier or manufacturer of the software. H C Linking ACT! 3.0 with StrataLink Act! 3.0 contact management software package, in conjunction with the StrataLink utility, can tightly integrate with the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider. For outgoing calls, ACT! uses its TAPI interface to dial the number to the TAPI Service Provider. For incoming calls, TAPI messages are sent to StrataLink from the Toshiba TAPI Service Provider. StrataLink applies the conditions and filters to this event, which causes ACT! to lookup the phone number in the database. Any matching entries are displayed in a "Screen Pop". Figure 9-28 Overview of how Act! works with StrataLink and TAPI A number of considerations should always be applied whenever calls are being controlled with CTI applications such as ACT! The method that the application handles the search routine can impact whether the screen will match the call. ACT! sequentially selects records, reducing the number from which to choose with each selection. This can be a problem if calls are transferred to the CTI enabled phone. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-43 Computer Telephony Integration When calls are transferred from one phone to another, the first call to the CTI phone is an "Intercom Consultation Call". The Caller ID for this call is the internal station number of the transferring station. If this station were a number such as extension 214, then the first Caller ID attempted in ACT! will be for an Area Code 214, and all records selected will be from this Area Code. When the call is finally transferred, then the Caller ID will be sent a second time with the number from the outside caller. If this number is not within the 214 Area Code, ACT! will not find a match. To fix this problem, use the Strata CT System Administration capabilities to create LCD names on phones used for call transfers. By creating an LCD name that contains a name, (or a name and number if no space character appears between the name and number), this causes TAPI to send a Caller ID name only and not a number. This stops StrataLink from sending the "screen pop" event on the intercom call and only sends it when the outside call is finally transferred to the station. Please note that ACT! software has the following limitations: ◆ "EVERYONE" must be selected to handle multiple calls. ◆ ACT! treats all line buttons equally. ◆ ACT! does not provide information on held calls; it only provides automatic screen pops for Call Ringing events. StrataLink addresses many of these issues and provides capabilities to flexibly control these events. H Installing ACT! 3.0 Step 1: C Install the Toshiba StrataLink/TAPI Service Provider Insert the first diskette of the two diskettes set in Drive A: select Run ... from either File main menu of Windows 3.1x or under the Start button for Windows 95 and enter A:Setup. The installation Wizard will direct you in installing the software. Toshiba recommends that StrataLink be included in the start-up process of the PC. This will have StrataLink always working on the desktop and the user only needs to start ACT! to be operational. Step 2: Install ACT! 3.0 Use the software installation instructions provided by Symantec, Inc. Step 3: ACT! Settings To set-up ACT! 3.0 for use with StrataLink 1. From the main menu, select Edit, Preferences. 2. Select the Dialler tab. Then check Use dialler. 3. Under Dialler settings, select Toshiba DKT TSPI as the modem. 4. Choose a Location. Location refers to the Windows Location Parameters established in Telephony Set-up. These are used to determine PBX dial codes to be inserted prior to dialling the number. 5. 9-44 Make sure that Lookup Caller using Caller ID must be OFF (not checked). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration 6. (optional) Other items can be selected based upon the preferences for the desktop. You can: ◆ hide the dialler (set it to disappear) when the call is done or remain until manually cleared; ◆ set the timer to automatically start a timer for calls; ◆ set a preference for outbound line (button) selection. H C Figure 9-29 Step 4: ACT! Preference Screen Open Strata Link StrataLink needs to be initialised for controlling ACT! for incoming calls. This is done by creating a set of Trigger Rules for operation. The following rules are a guide for creating a set of rules that will work for your application. Figure 9-30 ACT! Trigger Rules Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-45 Computer Telephony Integration The above rules are written for any line button on the phone. The first rule creates a "Pop" screen whenever a new call begins ringing, and a Caller ID number has been received, and I am "Not Talking" on the phone. The second rule creates a "Pop" whenever I connect to that call and the call has a Caller ID number associated with the call. The last two rules open the search to "Everyone" when a call is placed on Hold or "Disconnected. These last actions are needed for ACT! since the search routine narrows its record search to those that meet the criteria. These rules generally lead the search to one record group, and any additional selections must be within this group. To automatically search all records to allow a call to be placed on Hold and move to a second or third caller, the search should be opened to all records in the file. CAUTION! Use caution when employing Call Hold and Call Clearing trigger rules. If multiple phones have the same line appearances, calls placed on hold and disconnected from each one of the other phones will trigger the event in this CTI-enabled location. The action "Lookup Everyone" should not cause a problem. ACT! Screen Pop Actions H The following Actions have been predefined to work with ACT! 3.0 to control the screen to match the Caller ID received. Toshiba does not expect the user to understand the details of the interface between ACT! and StrataLink. These actions are provided to ensure that information is entered correctly in a given system when problems might occur. C Figure 9-31 9-46 StrataLink Action for “Popping” ACT! Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration Figure 9-32 StrataLink Action for “Clearing” ACT! Using StrataLink with Access ‘97 H C Access ‘97 is a general development tool for producing database applications. It can be used to create a contact management application. This application can then be used in conjunction with StrataLink. The production of a contact management database requires knowledge of Microsoft’s Visual Basic for Applications (VBA), Microsoft Access’ exposed object model and the Jet Data Access Object (DAO) and is beyond the scope of this document. This application's bulletin provides ideas for linking Access '97 to the Strata CT system, but always consult your Access manuals when customising Access for your application. This bulletin only supplies ideas and set-up parameters to create an interface for linking the telephone network information with the Access database. For more in-depth information on the features, capabilities and settings for Access you should consult the supplier or manufacturer of the software. Note Please see CTI Technical Buletin CT1000 ‘StrataLink with Microsoft Access (version 95 and over) Overview’. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-47 Computer Telephony Integration Handling Outgoing Calls Telephone numbers can be stored in the database with CT Access Codes or without. If the access code for the number is not stored with the telephone number, then the access code can be added by the application or by Stratalink. To have StrataLink add the access code, StrataLink Preferences must be configured from the "Preferences" item in the "Setup" menu. To dial the telephone number, Microsoft Access must use the StrataLink ‘Dial’ action. An example of how to do this is below. On Error GoTo Err_StrataLinkdial lngStrataLinkChannel = Application.DDEInitiate("stratlnk", "System") On Error GoTo 0 Application.DDEExecute lngStrataLinkChannel, "[Dial, " & """" & strtodial & """]" Application.DDETerminate lngStrataLinkChannel Err_StrataLinkdial: Exit Sub H Handling Incoming Calls Simple Cases For simple applications, the DDE command itself can be used to perform the incoming function. In this case either use the RunSQL DDE command or the OpenForm (with filter) DDE command. Stratalink ships with an example of a RunSQL action. For OpenForm use the filter parameter to make the form go to the first record with the correct phone number. [OpenForm "Form Name",,,"[Contact.PhoneNumber]=&P"] C 9-48 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Computer Telephony Integration More Complex Cases There is easy way to run VBA code from a DDE command to Microsoft Access. A VBA function can be called by sending the information to an OpenForm and catching this in the Form_Open event as below. The action below opens the "StrataLink Ringing" Form invisibly and runs its Form_Open function with the extra parameters of &P, &A, seperated by a space. [OpenForm "StrataLink Ringing", , , , ,0, "&P &A" ] The form_open function should use the arguments sent (&P and &A) to perform custom actions. Notice the hidden form will close itself after it has dealt with the DDE request H C Private Sub Form_Open(Cancel As Integer) 'Deal with the ringing request 'Get the arguements supplied by StrataLink Dim strArgs As String If (IsNull(Me.OpenArgs)) Then Cancel = True Exit Sub End If strArgs = Me.OpenArgs ‘Parse the arguments and remove quote marks intLine = GetLineFromArgs(strArgs) strCallingParty = Trim(GetCallingPartyFromArgs(strArgs)) ‘bring access to the front AppActivate "Microsoft Access" ……. ‘Do something useful with the arguments …… 'Close ourself Application.DoCmd.Close acForm, Me.Name, acSaveNo End Sub Using StrataLink to Answer a Ringing Call If responding to a ringing DDE event, ensure DDE communication back to StrataLink is performed last (after opening any filtered forms etc.). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-49 Computer Telephony Integration Using StratLink with Outlook 97/98/2000 Microsoft Outlook is an application that can offer a unified in-tray. It is particularly powerful for contact management and telephony applications when used in conjunction with Microsoft Exchange. The use of Microsoft Exchange, Outlook and Toshiba’s TSPI/StrataLink products is beyond the scope of this document, however this document will describe simple incoming and outgoing call handling using Outlook and Toshiba’s TSPI/StrataLink. This application's bulletin provides ideas for linking Outlook to the Strata CT system, but always consult your Outlook manuals when customising Outlook for your application. This bulletin only supplies ideas and set-up parameters to create an interface for linking the telephone network information with the Outline database. For more in-depth information on the features, capabilities and settings for Outlook you should consult the supplier or manufacturer of the software. Handling Outgoing Calls Telephone Number Format Outlook is a TAPI aware application, and can dial a telephone number directly through the Toshiba TSPI driver. The telephone numbers must be stored in the following format; H +country code (area code) rest of number The phone number for Toshiba Information Systems (UK) Ltd is 01932 841600. The country code for the UK is 44. The Toshiba Information Systems (UK) Ltd phone number in the above format is; C +44 (01932) 841600 You may also use the form + country code number e.g +44 01932841600 9-50 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Handling Incoming Calls Computer Telephony Integration Configuring Outlook To set up outgoing dialling choose "Dial Options" from the "General Tab" of the "Options" item in the "Tools" Menu. Select "Toshiba CT TSPI " from the drop down list as shown below. Figure 9-33 H Toshiba CT TSPI of Dial Options Menu Confirm the dialling properties are correct from the "Dialling Properties" button. The TSPI set-up screen can be reached from the Line Properties button. Handling Incoming Calls C An additional middleware application must be developed that maps StrataLink triggers or TAPI events to Microsoft Outlook Active X capabilities. This middleware application will need to be developed by a software developer. The developer will need a suitable development environment and knowledge of the Microsoft Outlook Active X object hierarchy. Toshiba Information Systems (UK) Ltd can supply the ‘Tlink’ for this purpose. Dealing with Incoming CLI The incoming CLI must be mapped from the StrataLink/TSPI format to the format Outlook uses (See “Telephone Number Format” on Page 9-50). There are two forms of CLI that StrataLink/TSPI uses. There is a CLI format for national numbers and a format for international numbers. National numbers begin with the area code, followed by the rest of the number. When mapping, from national numbers, consideration should be given to the area code length (4-6 including the leading 0 in the UK). The number should have ‘+44’ added to the front for the UK country code. International numbers begin with 00, followed by the country code and then by the rest of the number. When mapping from international numbers, the 00 should be replaced by ‘+’. The country code and area code length should be determined. The country code can vary between 1 and 3 digits, and the area code is dependent on the country code. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 9-51 Computer Telephony Integration Handling Incoming Calls H C 9-52 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces ISDN Interfaces 10 This chapter covers information on the ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and Basic Rate Interfaces (BRI). PRI Overview ◆ H For PRI services, the Strata CT uses an RPTU PCB to connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Each RPTU provides 30 B channels. The RPTU PCB is shown in Figure 10-1 on Page 10-5. BRI S/T Overview ◆ For BRI S/T services, the Strata CT uses an RBSU PCB. The RBSU provides two BRI S/T circuits to connect to the PSTN BRI NT. On the station-side it can connect to: ◆ S-type ISDN telephones and terminal equipment C ◆ S-type terminal adapters Each device can support voice and/or RS-232 switched-circuit data. The station-side BRI S/T circuits are point-to-multipoint. A subassembly (RBSS) can be attached to the RBSU for two additional BRIs for NTtype station-side connections only. The RBSU PCB and the RBSS subassembly are shown in Figure 10-7 on Page 10-12 and Figure 10-8 on Page 10-13 respectively. The combination of RBSU and RBSS uses only one slot to provide up to four NT or 2 TE ccts. The RBSS does not support TE operation. Note In Strata CT, each installed RBSU circuit provides a 2B + D connection and uses a system capacity of two station ports and two Exchange lines regardless of the circuit application. Note The installation of an RBSS increases this usage by 2 station ports but does not increase the usage of any exchange line ports. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-1 ISDN Interfaces System Capacity of ISDN Circuits The capacities of ISDN lines and stations for all CT systems are shown in Table 10-1. Table 10-1 Maximum Number of RPTU PCBs, Lines Processor Max. PCBs Max. B Channels (Lines) B1CAU 2 32 B2CAU/BU, B3CAU/BU 4 120 B5CAU/BU 7 200 H C 10-2 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Interface Unit System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: 30 B channels Interfaces with: ISDN PRI Older Version(s): none The Strata CT system supports the RPTU according to the common control unit resident within the system. The RPTU’s LEDs indicate a continuous status of its operation. They are shown in Figure 10-2. Table 10-4 on Page 10-6 lists the functions for each LED. RPTU Overview H C The RPTU provides 30 B channels and 1 D channel. Each RPTU can also use its own D-channel for control. The RPTU’s in-service bit rate is 2.048 mbps (± 4.6 ppm), but during a maintenance session, the rate may vary ± 32 ppm. Extracting the LAYER-1 clock from the ISDN PRI service provider is the most common method used to synchronise the RPTU PCB and the CT time switch to the public switched telephone network. One RPTU or RBSU, must extract the clock from the ISDN provider. The selected unit is designated as the “Primary” timing source in system Program *42-1. In remote cabinet applications, the Primary clock source PCB must be installed in the Base Cabinet (main location). For more information, refer to “Timing and Synchronisation” on Page 10-22. Strata CT Slot Assignments Up to seven RPTU PCBs can be installed in a Strata CT system providing up to 200 PRI lines (B-channels). If RPTU (PRI) PCBs are installed in the same Strata CT, the maximum combined PCBs cannot exceed the numbers provided in Table 10-1. The PCBs must be placed in designated slots in each of the Strata CT cabinets. The next highest slot adjacent to the RPTU slot must be vacant. Program 03 defines which cabinet slots contain RPTU PCBs. The maximum number of cards and lines is listed in Table 10-2. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-3 ISDN Interfaces Strata CT Slot Assignments Table 10-2 RPTU PCB Cabinet Slot Configuration PRI Lines Needed Slots Needed RPTU PCBs Needed1 RPTU cabinet slot placement1 Base Cabinet 1~30 2 1st 31~40 2 2nd 61~90 2 3rd S103-RPTU S104-vacant S105-RPTU S106-vacant S107-RPTU S108-vacant Second through fifth cabinets H 91~120 2 1st 121~150 2 2nd 151~180 1. 2 3rd S_01-RPTU S_02-vacant S_03-RPTU S_04-vacan S_05-RPTU S_06-vacant RPTU PCBs do not have to be installed in the order shown in this table. Example: If only one RPTU is needed, it can be installed in any RPTU slot shown in the table so long as the slot is supported by the installed processor. C RPTU Installation Before installing a RPTU PCB into a CT system, a number of system programs should be run. This enables the RPTU to function immediately upon insertion. It is recommended that you run these programs in the order listed in the Strata CT Programming Manual (refer to the ISDN section) before beginning installation. ➤ 10-4 To install an RPTU PCB 1. Turn the CT system power Off. 2. Insert the RPTU (component side facing right) into the appropriate slot (see “Slot Assignments” on “Strata CT Slot Assignments” on Page 10-3) and apply firm, even pressure to ensure proper seating of connectors. 3. After installing the RPTU, gently pull the PCB outward. If the connectors are properly seated, a slight resistance is felt. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Note Table 10-3 For cabling information and requirements, refer to “Cabling” on Page 10-7. RPTU Switches, Jumpers and Connectors Switches/Jumpers/Connector SW2 (Reset switch)1 1. Description Resets or initialises the RPTU firmware. Press this switch to correct an out-of-service condition, or just prior to connecting to the Network PRI. J1 8-pin Modular Connector (RJ45) Connects the RPTU to the PRI ISDN line. J2 6-pin Modular Connector (RJ11) Connects the RPTU to a terminal or PC to monitor D-channel data. If this switch on the Primary Clock source RPTU is pressed (Program *42-1), the clock source will automatically revert to the Secondary Clock source PCB (Program *42-2 and Program *42-1 will have to be reprogrammed.) RESET SW2 J2 RS-232C RPTU1A (front) CD1 LOS RST BSU TS CD2 H FSYC AIS RAB LEDs Backplane Connector RPTU1 C J1 ISDN (PRI) RPTU1A V .1 2543 CT I&M Figure 10-1 RPTU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-5 ISDN Interfaces Reset Switch (resets the firmware) RS232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor (RJ12) Not Used FSYC AIS RAB LOS RST BSY TS LEDs RJ45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector (to CSU) H 2747 Figure 10-2 Table 10-4 RPTU LEDs and Connectors LED Functions LED C FSYC AIS Alarm Indication Signal On:Receiving an alarm from the Exchange. Off:Circuit is working properly. RAB Remote Alarm On:Receiving a remote alarm from the Exchange. Off:Circuit is working properly. LOS Loss of Signal On:I/C signal cannot be detected. Off:Circuit is working properly. RST Reset On:CPU is resetting the software. Off:Circuit is working properly. BSY Busy On:One or more B-channels are busy. Off:All B-channels are idle. TS 10-6 Functions Frame Synchronisation On:Frame alignment is lost. Off:Frame alignment is working properly. Timing Signal On:Circuit is secondary timing source. Off:Circuit is not used for system timing. Flashing:Circuit is primary timing source. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Cabling To meet Part 15 of EMC Rules, ISDN PRI equipment must be connected using CAT5, Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) cabling between the NTE and the RPTU. CAT5 STP protects against cross talk, Radio Frequency Interference (RFI), and/or Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). STP protects ISDN signal data while being transmitted through the cable and keeps the cable itself from emitting EMI and RFI. Important! To avoid ground loops, connect only the RPTU end of the shielded cable to earth. The NTE earth should not be connected to the cable shield. A detailed pinout diagram for the RJ45 jacks and the modular cords/adaptors is shown in Figure 10-3 on Page 10-7. Toshiba will ship a 5 metre shielded patch cord terminated with BS EN28877 connectors with each RPTUIF. Cable Installation The RPTU PCB is shipped with a Toshiba RPRI cable kit for connection of the RPTU to a CSU. Install the kit as shown in Figure 10-4. H ISDN PRI Network Jack RJ45 RPTU D A E C 2752 CT I&M RJ45 Contact No. Figure 10-3 TE 1 RX 2 RX 3 Shield 4 TX 5 TX 6 Shield 7 Not Used 8 Not Used Detailed Pinouts for ISDN PRI Cabling Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-7 ISDN Interfaces Ferrite Core Install the Ferrite core provided with the RPRI cable kit as shown in Figure 10-4. This core is needed to comply with EMC requirements. RPTU Front View ISDN PRI Jack CAT5 Shielded Cable Tie wrap Ferrite Core ZCAT3035-1330 2754 Note: The Ferrite core must be as close as possible to the RPTU. H C One turn Figure 10-4 Ferrite Core Installation RBSU/RBSS Interface Units System: Strata CT Circuits per PCB: 2 circuits (2B + D each circuit) Interfaces with: ISDN BRI TE when connected to the Public Network or a BRI S-type, NT or TA devices when connecting to ISDN station equipment Older Version(s): none The Strata CT system supports the RBSU/RBSS interface unit according to the common control unit resident in the system. (refere to Table 10-1) RBSU/RBSS switches, jumpers, and connectors are shown in Figure 10-7 on Page 10-12 and Figure 10-8 on Page 10-13 and described in Table 10-5. LEDs on the RBSU/RBSS show a continuous status of BRI operation. Refer to Table 10-6 on Page 10-15 for a list of each LED’s status. 10-8 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Overview The RBSU and RBSS PCBs provide the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) circuits for Strata CT. The RBSU is the main plug-in PCB that plugs into the Strata CT cabinet slots. The RBSS is an optional PCB that plugs onto the RBSU. Each PCB provides two ISDN BRI circuits. Each BRI circuit provides 2 B-channels + 1D channel for voice/data/video applications. An REBUIA PCB is a piggy-back PCB that plugs onto the RBSU and provides basic functions for RBSU/RBSS circuits so it must always be installed on the RBSU. This card is not supplied on RBSU. The RBSU circuits are four-wire S/T type circuits and connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) BRI lines using an Network Terminator unit (NT1); or, on the station side, they can connect to ISDN Terminal Equipment (TE) or Terminal Adapters (TA) as shown in Figure 10-5. TE devices include any ISDN device (telephone, fax, computer) that connects directly to S/T ISDN BRI circuits. TA devices match the protocol of non-ISDN devices (telephone, fax, computer) to the protocol of S/T ISDN BRI circuits. The RBSU circuits can be configured two ways: H C ◆ ◆ As BRI – TE circuits which connect to Telephone Network BRI lines using a NT1. As BRI – NT circuits which connect to ISDN TEs or TAs. These devices must be S-type station devices. Important! In Strata CT, each BRI circuit consumes two line numbers and two station port when configured as line-side or station side on the RBSU. Circuits installed on the RBSS use only station ports. The RBSU connection options (BRI line or ISDN TE-1/TA devices) are selected in Strata CT customer database programming and option switches located on the RBSU. The RBSU circuits that connect to the ISDN network side requires a NT1 interface box to convert the two-wire, U-interface BRI line from the telephone network to the four-wire, Tinterface of the RBSU circuit. The network BRI line connection is a point-to-point connection, which means that the network BRI line can only be connected to one RBSU circuit via the NT1 (T-reference point). RBSS circuits connect directly to S-type ISDN devices only. They do not support BRI-TE telephone network BRI line connections. The RBSU, and/or RBSS circuits that connect to the CT station side, (BRI-NT, S-reference point) allows direct connection of multiple ISDN (TE-1 or TA) devices. The S point of the RBSU/RBSS supports the Toshiba CT passive bus, also known as point-to-multipoint connection. The terminal-side (S-point) of the RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit can have parallel connections of up to two TE-1s or TAs maximum. When multiple TE-1 and TA devices are installed on a single RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit, the devices must share, or contend for, that circuit’s two B-channels. That is to say, a maximum of two simultaneous voice and/or data calls are allowed between both devices connected to the same BRI circuit. The contention rule for the two BRI B-channels is first come, first served. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-9 ISDN Interfaces BRI-NT (4-wire) RBSU ST ref points . .. 1 TE1 or TA 8 BRI-TE (4-wire) BRI (2-wire) RX NT1 RBSU/RBSS ISDN RX/TX TX TE1 or TA S T U S, T, and U are ISDN reference points. TE = S-type Terminal Equipment TA = S-type Terminal Adaptor Figure 10-5 RBSU/RBSS Interfaces between the S/T Reference Points Capacity and Cabinet Slot Information H The RBSU/RBSS can be installed in any Strata CT slot except the programming telephone PDKU or PEKU slot. On Strata CT, each RBSU contains two circuits and each circuit reduces the system capacity by two station ports and two Exchange lines (one port/line per B-channel). Therefore, if the RBSU PCB is installed, the station port and Exchange line count will increment by four ports and four lines at the RBSU cabinet slot. If the RBSU/RBSS is installed in a Strata CT slot, the station port and Exchange line count will increment by eight station ports and eight lines at the RBSU/RBSS cabinet slot. RBSU and RBSS PCBs can be installed in any combination so long as the number of RBSU PCBs is the same or greater than the number of RBSS PCBs. C PS-1 Line Power Option The RBSU provides an optional line power supply, R40S1A, that will supply line power to TE devices. This power option only applies to RBSU or RBSS circuits that are configured in the NT mode. See Figure 10-10 to install the R40S1A. Each of the four circuits on RBSU/RBSS can be connected to share the R40S1A using option switches on the PCBs (see Table 10-5). Before using the R40S1A as a line power source, make sure the TE devices do not require more power than the R40S1A can supply and the TE is compatible with the ISDN PS-1 power arrangement. Figure 10-6 shows the power limits of the R40S1A. 10-10 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces 3031 RJ-45 Pin Nos. on RBSU or RBSS NT circuit TE TE Device Power sink Pin 3 RX - Pin 3 Pin 6 RX - Pin 6 Pin 4 TX + Pin 4 Pin 5 TX + Pin 5 RBSU R40S PS-1 Power Source RJ-45 Pin Nos. on TE device H R40S Power Limits: Voltage: 33.3 VDC to 38.85 VDC maximum Current: 100mA maximum (25mA maximum per each RBSU/RBSS circuit) Figure 10-6 Power Limits of the Backup Power Supply C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-11 ISDN Interfaces RBSU/RBSS Installation Step 1: Run Related Programs ➤ Run all ISDN programs related to RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits prior to installation of the PCBs. This enables the circuits to operate immediately upon insertion. ISDN BRI programs are explained in the Strata CT Programming Manual under the ISDN tab. Step 2: Set Option Switches/Jumpers ➤ Set all option switches and jumpers on theRBSU, and RBSS PCBs before plugging the RBSS onto the RBSU or inserting the RBSU into the system. RBSU/RBSS switch/ jumper information and locations are shown in Figures 10-7, 10-8 and Table 10-5. RBSU1A RBSU1 BSY TS LOS FS P7 P2 P4 SW7 BSY TS LOS FS H SW6 SW9 SW8 J2 SW3 TB3 SW2 P6 J1 P5 SW5 SW4 SW1 C P3 J3 P9 P8 PFT contacts TB1 TB2 R B S U 1 A - C M V. 1 2789 Figure 10-7 10-12 RBSU PCB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces RBSS RBSS1A-CM V.1 J4 BSY TS LOS FS J2 J7 BSY TS LOS FS J6 SW2 SW5 SW6 SW1 SW3 SW4 J3 J5 F 2788 H Figure 10-8 Table 10-5 PCB C RBSS PCB RBSU/RBSS Option Switches, Jumpers, and Connectors Circuit Type Option Switch Type All SW 1 1 Circuit Description TE NT Push-button N/A N/A SW 2 Jumper X X Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. 1 SW 3 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 1 SW 4, 5 Jumper N/A On RBSU Resets firmware on all circuits of RBSU/ RBSS. Drops calls off the RBSU/RBSS. Does not clear TE1 Values. Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 2 SW 6 Jumper X X Causes the circuit to operate as TE or NT1. 2 SW 7 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 2 SW 8, 9 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 1 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 3 (NT only) SW 3, 4 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 2 Slide On Off Switches a 100-ohm resistor in/out of the circuit. 4 (NT only) SW 5, 6 Jumper N/A On Switches PS-1 in/out of the circuit. RBSS 1. Also requires Program *60 to set TE or NT. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-13 ISDN Interfaces Step 3: Install the RBSS Note If one or two additional BRI-NT circuits are required, install the RBSS (see Figure 10-9). 1. Align the four connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the REBS1A. 2. Plug the RBSS onto the RBSU. Step 4: Install the R40S1A Note If the TA demands power from the BUS, install the R40S (optional PCB) (see Figure 10-9). 1. Align the two connectors carefully while observing the “UP” arrows on the R40S1A. 2. Plug the R40S1A onto the RBSU. RBSU H REBU (pre installed on RBSU1 not used on RBSU2) Optional RBSS1A UP UP C UP UP Two-circuit Subassembly 2761 UP Optional PS-1 Power Supply UP R40S1A-CM V.1 R40S1A Figure 10-9 Location of RBSU Plug-on PCBs Step 5: Install RBSU/RBSS PCBs into Cabinet After setting the switches and jumpers and installing the plug-on PCBs as described in the preceding paragraphs, the RBSU/RBSS PCBs can be installed in the appropriate cabinet slots. After the RBSU/RBSS is installed in the Strata CT cabinet, the status LEDs and connecting jacks are positioned as shown in Figure 10-9. 10-14 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Table 10-6 RBSU/RBSS LED Indications LED BSY TS LOS FS Indication Circuit Busy On – Either B-channel is in use. Off – B-channels are idle. Timing Source Blinking On/Off – The RBSU is extracting the clock from the BRI line and is the Primary synchronisation circuit for ISDN. On – The RBSU is the secondary (backup) synchronisation circuit for the ISDN. Off – The RBSU is not used for ISDN or T1 synchronisation. Loss of Signal On – Clock timing cannot be detected from the line. Off – Normal condition. Frame Alignment Alarm On – Frame alignment cannot be established. Off – Frame alignment is established. Modular Jack Pin Configurations H C BRI (S/T) Circuit Jack (TE or NT Mode) The RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit jack is a shielded RJ45 (8-pin modular) with Transmit (Tx) and Receive (Rx) pin numbers as shown in Figure 10-9. The Tx and Rx pin numbers change when the BRI circuit is configured with RBSU/RBSS option switches for TE or NT (Table 10-5). If the R40S1A is installed on the RBSU, the PS-1 voltage is carried on the Tx/Rx wires with polarity. (See Table 10-7). The position of the BRI and RBSU/RBSS circuit jacks are shown in Figure 10-10 Table 10-7 RJ45 Pins in the 8-pin Modular Jack Pin No. TE Side NT Side PS1/R40S Polarity 1 N/C N/C N/C 2 N/C N/C N/C 3 Tx Rx + 4 Rx Tx + 5 Rx Tx - 6 Tx Rx - 7 N/C N/C N/C 8 N/C N/C N/C 87654321 3048 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Front View of RJ45 Jack Cavity Note: The RJ45 pins are numbered as shown above. 10-15 ISDN Interfaces Monitor Jack The RBSU/RBSS monitor jack is an RJ11 (6-pin modular). This jack provides an RS-232 output that enables you to monitor the RBSU/RBSS BRI circuit D-channel, layer-2 and layer-3 data. The monitor jack pin configuration and communication parameters are the same as RPTU which are shown in Figure 10-19 on Page 10-26. Figures 10-22 and 10-23 on Pages 10-29 and 10-30, respectively, show examples of the RBSU monitor jack output. Figure 10-21 shows the location of the RBSU monitor jack. RBSU/RBSS Premise Wiring Guidelines Earthing Terminal Screws TB3 is a screw terminal that can be used to connect an earth wire to the RBSU PCB (see Figure 10-10 for the location). This earth enables the RBSU/RBSS to meet Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements. As of Release 4.1, RBSU complies with EMC requirements without earthing TB3 on the RBSU, so it is not necessary to connect an earth wire to TB3. BRI Wire Type Recommendations CAT5 wire is recommended for ISDN BRI customer-premises wiring. While the ISDN BRI signal works for some distance over almost any wire that is suitable for analog voice service, better wire enables longer runs. CAT5 provides better 100-ohm impedance matching (at little extra cost) between the RBSU/RBSS circuit and the station Terminal Equipment. Normally the CAT5 wiring does not have to be shielded when used for ISDN BRI premises wiring. However, the RJ45 jacks on the RBSU/RBSS BRI circuits are shielded and provide a ground shield in the event that shielded modular plugs and cable are used. H Note C 10-16 If using shielded cable and plugs, cable runs should only be grounded at the CT RBSU/RBSS, RJ45 jacks. To prevent ground loops, do not ground both ends of shielded cable runs. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces RBSU CCT2 BSY TS LOS FS CCT1 BSY TS LOS FS RBSS BSY TS LOS FS BSY TS LOS FS CCT4 CCT3 4th Circuit 2nd Circuit RJ45 8-pin (shielded) Modular Connector 3rd Circuit TB3 (FG) 1st Circuit Reset Switch (resets RBSU Firmware) RS232C Connector for Call-Data Monitor TB1 and TB2 (PFT) 2795 H C Figure 10-10 RBSU/RBSS Location of LEDs and Connector Locations RBSU/RBSS BRI Cable Jacks and Connectors In the U.K., the standard connector for ISDN equipment is the eight-pin RJ jack. Patch cables have eight-pole plugs at both ends. The same pinout applies to both ends of an ISDN cable, which is the practice of the data world. This means that a flat untwisted cable with an RJ modular plug at both ends will have the locking tab of the plug on one end, “up;” and on the other end, “down,” as shown in Figure 10-11. A cord of up to 10 meters connects the ISDN BRI RJ45 wall jack to the desktop TE. Locking Tab Four-pair wire RJ-45 Eight-pole Plug 3039 CT I&M Figure 10-11 Modular ISDN Data Cable Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-17 ISDN Interfaces Table 10-8 RJ45 Jack – ISDN Standard Interface Modular Connector Pinout (RBSU-NT mode) Pin Colour 1 2 Name Function T2 (not used) R2 (not used) 3 White/Blue R3 RX+ 4 Blue/White R1 TX+ 5 White/Green T1 TX- 6 Green/White T3 RX- 7 T4 (not used) 8 R4 (not used) Notes Pins are numbered left to right when looking into the jack cavity with the locking tab ● down. H Connecting RBSU to Network Side (TE-Mode) The RBSU only, not the RBSS, circuits can be connected to the network side of a BRI line. The RBSU circuits must be configured in the TE-mode (refer to option switches in Table 105 on Page 10-13 and Program *60). In the U.K., the BRI line from the ISDN service provider is a two-wire U-type BRI line. This line connects to the RBSU TE circuit via NT1 as shown in Figure 10-12. The NT1 is necessary to convert the network BRI, two-wire, U interface to the RBSU BRI, four-wire, T interface. The connection between the NT1 and the RBSU TE circuit is a point-to-point connection, so the NT1 can connect to only one RBSU BRI TE circuit. A 100-ohm Terminating Resistor (TR) is required on each end of the point-to-point connection. The TR must be switched into the RBSU TE circuit (refer to option switches in Table 10-5 on Page 10-13) and off at the NT1 or vice-versa. Most NT devices have TR option switches, but you can use those supplied on the card. Refer to the NT manufacturers documentation for the maximum loop length between the NT1 and the network jack. The maximum loop length between the NT and the RBSU circuit is 400 metres using CW1308 or 800 metres using CW1700/1750 or equiv. C 10-18 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces RJ45 Pinout (NT - S/T jack) RJ45 Pinout (RBSU - BRI jack) BRI (four-wire) BRI (two-wire) 3 TX RX 3 RBSU TE-Circuit 6 TX RX 6 NT Switch in 100-ohm TR using RBSU option switch. 4 RX TX 4 Switch in 100-ohm TR. 5 RX TX 5 4 RX/TX 3343 U T Note: T and U are ISDN standard reference points. Network BRI-line RJ-11 Jack 5 RX/TX Local AC Power Demarcation Point Figure 10-12 RBSU to NT Point-to-point Connection H C Connecting RBSU/RBSS Station Devices (NT-Mode) S-type TAs and TE-1s can be connected to the station side of RBSU, and RBSS circuits. TA and TE devices must be powered by local AC power using AC adapter supplied with the TA or TE device. The RBSU/RBSS circuits must be configured in the NT mode when connected to TA and TE devices (refer to option switches in Table 10-5 on Page 10-13 and Program *60). The TA enables you to connect non-ISDN voice and data devices to ISDN BRI circuits. The TA matches the protocol of existing interfaces (R-reference point) to the ISDN S/T protocol. TA devices include asynchronous circuit-switched adapters that convert RS-232 async data (like data from a PC COM port) to B-channel 64 kbps sync. TAs also enable you to connect standard telephones and non-ISDN fax machines to receive and make calls over ISDN circuits. TEs include any user device (telephone, fax, PC video conference board) that is designed to plug directly into the ISDN (S/T) interface without the use of a TA. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-19 ISDN Interfaces RBSU NT Circuit Insert 100-ohm TR using RBSU and RBSS option switches. RJ45 Pinout RJ45 Pinout 3 3 6 6 4 4 5 5 S-type, TE-1 or TA with 100-ohm TR or just a 100-ohm terminating resistor across each pair on a RJ-45 jack. 3344 BRI (four-wire) 3 6 4 5 To local AC Power S-type, TE-1s or TAs without 100-ohm terminating resistors (maximum eight TE-1s or TAs per RBSU/RBSS circuit). To local AC Power H Figure 10-13 RBSU/RBSS NT Circuit Pinout on Passive Bus As a parallel bus, the RBSU/RBSS BRI-NT passive bus will accept TE-1 and TA devices scattered on the bus; however, the locations of the TE and TA devices on the S bus is limited by timing considerations. Specifically, the round trip propagation delay of a signal from the RBSU/RBSS circuit to one device must be within four microseconds of the delay from the other device on the bus. That is to say, layer-1 frames from the RBSU/RBSS must be received within a two microsecond window. This says nothing about how large the delay can be. In fact, it can be much larger, as long as the differences remain small. To control electrical characteristics, a 100-ohm terminating resistor (TR) is required at the end of the passive bus. One resistor should be across the Tx pair and one across the Rx pair at either end of the passive bus. Branch-type passive bus configurations, shown in Figures 10-14~10-16, may only require a TR on the RBSU/RBSS NT circuit side and not on the TE or TA device side of the bus. The RBSU, and RBSS circuits provide an option switch that allows the 100-ohm TR to be switched into the circuit on the CT side of the bus (see Table 10-5 on Page 10-13). Most TE1 and TA devices also provide option switches to connect 100-ohm terminating resistors as shown in Figure 10-12. If the TE or TA devices do not provide TRs, they may be permanently wired in place on a RJ45 jack at the far end of the bus. Only one terminating resistor on each pair should be on the far (TE) end of the passive bus - do not switch in TRs on more than one TE-1 or TA device on the passive bus. C Important! 10-20 The correct placement of TRs on the Passive Bus is critical to ISDN BRI circuit operation (see the following RBSU/RBSS Passive Bus configurations section). Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Wiring Point to point Maximum number of sockets =1 Maximum number of terminals connected = 1 400m (CW1308) / 800m (CW 1700 or 1750) Socket with terminating resistor Top of RBSU Unit Pin number 1 Pin number 8 CT I&M fig 14 Grey RJ45 socket Figure 10-14 Point to Point Wiring Wiring Short Passive Bus Maximum number of sockets = 12 Maximum number of terminals connected = 8 H 100m (CW1308) / 150m (CW 1700 or 1750) Socket with terminating resistor C Top of RBSU Unit Pin number 1 Pin number 8 CT I&M fig 15 Grey RJ45 socket Figure 10-15 Short Passive Bus Wiring Wiring Extended Passive Bus Maximum number of sockets = 12 Maximum number of terminals connected = 4 250m (CW1308) / 400m (CW 1700 or 1750) Socket with terminating resistor Top of RBSU Unit Pin number 1 Pin number 8 CT I&M fig 16 Grey RJ45 socket 45m (CW1308) / 70m (CW 1700 or 1750) Figure 10-16 Extended Passive Bus Wiring Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-21 ISDN Interfaces Timing and Synchronisation The Digital Network is connected by timing clocks that synchronise the network and have various degrees of precision (stratum levels). There are four stratum levels – 1 is the highest and 4 is the lowest. They are associated with the following sources: ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ Stratum – 1: Public Telephone Network clock Stratum – 2: #4 ESS Toll Switches Stratum – 3: #5 ESS Exchange Lines Stratum – 4: Digital PBXs In the Strata CT, one PRI and BRI PCB can be programmed to extract the Stratum clock signal. It uses the signal as the CT system Primary clock reference. The clock provider should be a reliable source, such as a Telco or common carrier. All other PRI and BRI lines connected to the Strata CT will be synchronised to the same clock provider. If the PRI and BRI are not synchronised to the same clock provider, the Strata CT could experience “slip” problems. Timing reference assignments for PRI and BRI are made with the Program *42 series. The timing or synchronisation program determines how the Strata CT digital voice or data transmission path is synchronised with the far-end digital path. For proper PRI and BRI operation, the equipment at each end of the line must be synchronised. The CT processor time switch is synchronised as the slave to the PRI and BRI line (Line 1 in Figure 10-17). The Strata CT PRI and BRI in any slot number can be assigned as the Primary reference (Program *42-1, DATA=1 for this PRI and BRI). If a malfunction occurs and Primary reference synchronisation is lost, the Strata CT automatically switches modes and synchronises to the Secondary reference, provided that there is another PRI, BRI, or T1 installed in the CT system. The Secondary reference PCB is assigned in Program *42-2. H C 10-22 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Strata CT Processor PCB * Primary/Secondary reference PCBs are assigned in Programs 42-1/ 42-2 and can be an RPTU or RBSU. Synchronisation Circuit Clock H SS1 Electronic Telephone PEKU Standard Telephone RSTU 4773 Synchronisation Circuit Line 1 Prg *42-1-1 Digital Voice Path Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) PRI and BRI Secondary Reference PCB* SS2 Synchronisation Circuit Line 2 Prg *42-2-2 BT or other provider PRI and BRI Stratum-1 Clock Source Digital Voice Path Clock synchronised properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Other RPTU or RBSU SS3 Synchronisation Circuit Digital Voice Path C * Primary Reference PCB* PDKU Strata CT Digital Transmission Voice Path Digital Telephone * Time Switch Line 3 Prg *41-1[blank] Prg *42-1[blank] Other PRI and BRI provider Other Clock Source Clock not synchronised properly with Stratum-1 Clock Source Figure 10-17 Primary and Secondary References Figure 10-17 shows the Primary reference PCB. The clock signal from Line 1 passes through the PCB Software Switch (SS1) and the synchronisation circuit of the RCTU PCB. The RCTU clock passes the clock source through the time switch and synchronises the Strata CT digital transmission voice or data path. The Secondary reference is activated if the Primary reference fails. The Strata CT automatically switches over to the Secondary reference PCB by opening its synchronisation circuit (SS1) and closing the synchronisation circuit (SS2). When this occurs, the digital voice or data path of the Strata CT is synchronised to the Line 2 clock source. If the path is not synchronised to the Stratum – 1 clock source, calls connected through that path experience “slipping” in the digital voice or data path (channels). Figure 10-17 shows an unsynchronised signal from Line 3. The unsynchronised signal produces a clicking or popping sound that is heard by the people connected through this path or causes data errors on data transmissions. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-23 ISDN Interfaces RPTU Performance Monitoring The performance of the RPTU can be monitored using the Data Dump Mode. This requires: ◆ ◆ RSIU, RSIS, PIOU, PIOUS or TSIU PCB TTY port. ASCII terminal or PC with communications software (such as ProComm or Hyperterminal). ◆ IMDU or RMDS modem or Hayes compatible modem for remote monitoring. The RPTU monitoring feature provides a download of PRI errors detected as shown in Figure 10-18. This data can be stored to a file and/or printed when using a PC with communications software. There are no time parameters for the error report, so the time between error-count increments must be monitored manually. The counter is reset after 15 registrations and begins again from zero. Basically the error count of any error category should not increase within 24-hour periods. ➤ To dump the data (PRI ERROR DISPLAY) from a terminal or PC (local or remote) 1. H C ➤ Establish communications between the CT TTY port and the terminal or PC using a communications software. 2. Enter the security code, and press Enter (or Return). 3. At the >MODE prompt, type DUMP (must be all caps), and press Enter (or Return). The >D prompt displays on your screen. 4. At the >D prompt, type PRIERR and press Enter (or Return). The display (see Figure 10-18) shows all RPTU PCBs (PRI NO=1~PRI NO=8), even if the associated RPTU (1~8) is not installed. The ERROR counter can only be reset by turning the CT Off and On. To exit the dump mode 10-24 ➤ At the >D prompt, type QUIT, press Enter (or Return); the >MODE prompt displays. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces DK VERSION 1.0 >CODE OK >MODE DUMP D DASS ##DASS ERROR DISPLAY## FRAME ALIGNMENT ERROR 06/25/00 THU 09:51:06 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 CONTROL SLIP 06/25/00 THU 09:50:19 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:50:26 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:50:32 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:50:38 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:50:44 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:50:51 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:50:57 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:51:06 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:51:09 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 CLOCK SOURCE LOST 06/25/00 THU 09:50:18 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:50:18 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 06/25/00 THU 09:51:04 SLOT NO. 12 CCT NO. 1 H TBSU TTY Remote Prog Fault Error Message C Action Synchro Bit Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 1024 synchronisation bit errors. Bipolar Violation Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 6.55 x 104 bipolar violations. Slip Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 slips. CRC Error Increments each time the RPTU detects 256 CRC-6 errors. The RPTU must be in the ESF mode. Figure 10-18 RPTU Performance Monitor Printout Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-25 ISDN Interfaces PRI/BRI Call Monitoring The CT ISDN circuit cards provide an RS-232 monitor function that enables you to monitor the ISDN D-channel call progress layer two and three messages (setup, connect, and release). This data can be monitored live, saved to a file, and/or printed using a PC with communication software. The hardware connections and communication parameters for the ISDN monitor port are shown in Figure 10-19. Once this connection is setup and established, call monitoring data continues to be sent (on the fly) as PRI and BRI calls are originated or received. Two sample printouts from the RPTU monitor are provided. Figure 10-19 shows typical ISDN PRI start-up and synchronisation sequences that occur at connection and power on. Figure 10-20 shows typical ISDN PRI outgoing call setup and release sequences. BRI monitor data is similar to PRI monitor data. The communication parameters for all call-monitor jacks are 9600 bps, 8, 1, none. CT PRI or BRI PCB Monitor Jack PC with communication software, such as ProComm™ Call-monitor jack PC DB9 or DB25 Com port H Dealer-supplied 6-wire telephone modular cord (cross-pinned) C RD TD DSR DTR DCD SG Toshiba PPTC9 or PPTC25F 1 2 3 4 5 6 Call-monitor jack (RJ-12) pin numbering 4696 Note The RPTU and the RBSU ISDN interface PCBs each have a call-monitor jack. The pin numbering and communication parameters are the same for each call-monitor jack. The call-monitor jack on each PCB provides data only for the circuits of the PCB on which it appears. Figure 10-19 Call-monitor Jack for the RPTU and RBSU 10-26 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces H C /*-------------------------*/ Copyright(C) 1997 TOSHIBA Corporation All rights reserved RPTU Ver.1S (4.22) [Reset] /*-------------------------*/ <U1>00;00'018 S L3_DL_DIS <U1>00;00'019 DL: disconnected enabled. <U1>00;00'020 S L3_LOSS_DIS <U1>00;00'991 Rcv. RAI (F2) <U1>00;00'992 s err ind(err) <U1>00;01'280 Act. (F1) <U1>00;01'282 s rem ind(nrm) <U1>00;01'819 R L3_FNC_TE <U1>00;01'820 R L3_PRI_ENA <U1>00;01'827 S L3_FAE_ENA <U1>00;01'830 S L3_SLP_ENA <U1>00;01'940 R L3_BSY_OFF <U1>00;04'908 R L3_DL_CON <U1>00;04'912 DL: connecting link level. <U1>00;04'912 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]SABME P <U1>00;04'918 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]UA F <U1>00;04'925 DL: data transfer state. <U1>00;04'926 S L3_DL_CON <U1>00;14'880 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]000 <U1>00;14'890 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]000 <U1>00;14'894 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]000 <U1>00;14'896 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]000 Setup PRI Figure 10-20 PRI Start-up and Synchronisation Sequences Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-27 ISDN Interfaces <U1>01;33'957 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]004 <U1>01;33'963 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]005 <U1>01;35'143 R L3_BSY_ON <U1>01;35'184 R DL_DAT <U1>01;35'189 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]004 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = SETUP(05) 04 03 80 90 A3 18 03 A9 83 85 .......... <U1>01;35'197 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 <U1>01;35'210 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]004 [N(R)]006 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = SETUP ACK(0D) 18 03 A9 83 85 ..... <U1>01;35'217 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]005 <U1>01;35'219 S DL_DAT_IND <U1>01;35'457 R L3_TSW_CON <U1>01;37'843 R DL_DAT <U1>01;37'849 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = INFO(7B) 70 06 81 30 33 38 35 33 p..03853 <U1>01;37'856 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 <U1>01;39'801 R DL_DAT <U1>01;39'806 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]007 [N(R)]005 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = INFO(7B) 70 06 81 32 34 33 30 39 p..24309 <U1>01;39'813 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]008 <U1>01;44'257 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]005 [N(R)]008 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CALL PROC(02) <U1>01;44'261 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]006 [N(R)]008 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = ALERT(01) 28 06 2A 38 36 2A 58 23 (.*86*X# <U1>01;44'268 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]006 <U1>01;44'269 S DL_DAT_IND <U1>01;44'276 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]007 <U1>01;44'277 S DL_DAT_IND <U1>01;44'575 R L3_PAD_TX <U1>01;44'576 R L3_TSW_CON <U1>01;49'522 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]007 [N(R)]008 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = CONN(07) <U1>01;49'532 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]008 <U1>01;49'533 S DL_DAT_IND <U1>01;49'739 R DL_DAT <U1>01;49'744 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]008 [N(R)]008 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = CONN ACK(0F) <U1>01;49'751 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]009 <U1>01;53'770 R DL_DAT <U1>01;53'771 R L3_TSW_DIS <U1>01;53'776 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]009 [N(R)]008 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = DISC(45) 08 02 80 90 .... <U1>01;53'783 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]010 <U1>01;53'860 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]008 [N(R)]010 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 8003 MT = REL(4D) 08 02 82 90 28 0C 2A 41 41 2A 43 4C 45 41 52 45 ....(.*AA*CLEARE 44 23 D# <U1>01;53'869 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]009 <U1>01;53'870 S DL_DAT_IND <U1>01;54'204 R DL_DAT <U1>01;54'205 R L3_BSY_OFF <U1>01;54'210 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]010 [N(R)]009 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 02 0003 MT = REL COMP(5A) 08 02 82 90 .... <U1>01;54'218 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]011 <U1>02;04'166 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR P [N(R)]009 <U1>02;04'172 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]000 [FRAME]RR F [N(R)]011 H C Indicates non ‘etsi’ cct. This is not ISDN 30e Outgoing Rel and Con PRI Figure 10-21 PRI Outgoing Call Connect and Release 10-28 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces BRI Call Monitor The call-monitor jack located on the RBSU enables you to use a PC or ASCII terminal to monitor the BRI, D-channel call setup, layer-2 and layer-3 data (refer to Figure 10-19 on Page 10-26 for information about connecting the monitor jack). Figures 10-22 and 10-23 provide examples of BRI call setup message information that is available from the RBSU call-monitor jack. H C <U1>26;49'392 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]UA F <U1>26;49'394 S L3_DL_CON 000 <U1>26;49'425 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]000 [N(R)]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 03 MT = SETUP(05) A1 04 03 80 90 A3 18 01 89 70 0C 80 39 30 33 38 .........p..9038 35 33 32 34 33 30 39 5324309 <U1>26;49'443 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]001 <U1>26;49'446 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>26;50'047 R L3_BSY_ON 000 <U1>26;50'087 R DL_DAT 000 <U1>26;50'088 R L3_PAD_TX 000 <U1>26;50'090 R L3_TSW_CON 000 <U1>26;50'106 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]000 [N(R)]001 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 83 MT = CALL PROC(02) 18 01 89 28 08 4C 49 4E 45 20 20 20 39 ...(.LINE 9 <U1>26;50'215 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]001 <U2>26;55'466 Pend. Act. (G2) <U2>26;55'470 s err ind(err) 000 <U2>26;55'470 S TERM NOT EXT 000 <U1>26;55'858 R L3_PAD_TX 000 <U1>26;55'861 R L3_TSW_CON 000 <U1>26;55'936 R DL_DAT 000 <U1>26;55'944 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]001 [N(R)]001 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 83 MT = ALERT(01) 18 01 89 28 06 2A 38 36 2A 58 23 ...(.*86*X# <U1>26;56'061 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]002 <U1>26;56'892 R L3_PAD_TX 000 <U1>26;56'894 R L3_TSW_CON 000 <U1>26;56'933 R DL_DAT 000 <U1>26;56'939 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]002 [N(R)]001 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 83 MT = CONN(07) 18 01 89 ... <U1>26;56'963 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]001 [N(R)]003 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 03 MT = CONN ACK(0F) <U1>26;56'977 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]002 <U1>26;56'979 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>27;04'475 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]002 [N(R)]003 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 03 MT = DISC(45) 08 02 80 90 .... <U1>27;04'494 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]003 <U1>27;04'497 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>27;04'754 R L3_TSW_DIS 000 <U1>27;04'756 R DL_DAT 000 <U1>27;04'763 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]003 [N(R)]003 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 83 MT = REL(4D) 08 02 80 90 .... <U1>27;04'791 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]003 [N(R)]004 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 03 MT = REL COMP(5A) 08 02 80 90 .... <U1>27;04'812 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]004 <U1>27;04'815 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>27;04'944 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]DISC P <U1>27;04'961 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]UA F <U1>27;04'966 S L3_DL_DIS 000 <U1>27;05'055 R L3_BSY_OFF 000 Outgoing Call Setup BRI Figure 10-22 Outgoing Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-29 ISDN Interfaces <U2>29;02'587 Pend. Deact(G4) <U2>29;02'602 Deact. (G1) <U1>29;09'135 R L3_BSY_ON 000 <U1>29;09'213 R DL_UDAT(brd) 015 <U1>29;09'236 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]127 [FRAME]U-INFO PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 07 MT = SETUP(05) A1 04 03 90 90 A3 18 01 89 1E 02 8A 81 6C 0C 00 .............l.. 83 30 33 38 35 33 32 34 33 30 39 70 04 81 32 30 .0385324309p..20 38 8 <U1>29;09'282 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]SABME P <U1>29;09'301 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]UA F <U1>29;09'304 S L3_DL_CON 000 <U1>29;09'329 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]000 [N(R)]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 87 MT = ALERT(01) 18 01 89 ... <U1>29;09'351 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]001 <U1>29;09'353 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>29;14'352 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]001 [N(R)]000 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 87 MT = CONN(07) <U1>29;14'373 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]002 <U1>29;14'375 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>29;14'714 R DL_DAT 000 <U1>29;14'729 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]000 [N(R)]002 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 07 MT = CONN ACK(0F) 28 0A 30 33 38 35 33 32 34 33 30 39 (.0385324309 <U1>29;14'753 R L3_PAD_TX 000 <U1>29;14'755 R L3_TSW_CON 000 <U1>29;14'837 Rx:[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]001 <U1>29;21'358 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]002 [N(R)]001 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 87 MT = DISC(45) 08 02 80 90 .... <U1>29;21'377 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]003 <U1>29;21'381 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>29;21'685 R L3_TSW_DIS 000 <U1>29;21'687 R DL_DAT 000 <U1>29;21'693 Tx :[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]001 [N(R)]003 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 07 MT = REL(4D) 08 02 80 90 .... <U1>29;21'721 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]INFO [N(S)]003 [N(R)]002 PD = Q.931(08) CR = 01 87 MT = REL COMP(5A) 08 02 80 90 .... <U1>29;21'744 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]RR [N(R)]004 <U1>29;21'747 S DL_DAT_IND 000 <U1>29;21'867 Rx:[SAPI]00 C [TEI]064 [FRAME]DISC P <U1>29;21'883 Tx :[SAPI]00 R [TEI]064 [FRAME]UA F <U1>29;21'885 S L3_DL_DIS 000 <U1>29;21'996 R L3_BSY_OFF 000 <U2>29;22'133 Pend. Act. (G2) <U2>29;22'135 s err ind(err) 000 <U2>29;22'135 S TERM NOT EXT 000 H C Incoming Call Setup BRI Figure 10-23 Incoming Call Setup Output of BRI Call Monitor 10-30 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces SMDR Output for ISDN See in Chapter 6 – Peripheral Installation, Figure 6-20 on Page 6-36 for a sample SMDR printout and descriptions of each column. ISDN Disconnect Cause Code The ISDN Cause Code provides information on how an ISDN call is terminated when an ISDN line disconnects. The Cause Code displays only when this feature is enabled on the LCD of DKTs, EKTs and Attendant Consoles. ISDN Cause Code is turned On/Off for each telephone or console in Program 35, LED 08. LED 08 On enables Cause Code Display. Previously “CO LINE HANG UP!” was displayed when an ISDN line was disconnected. This display no longer exists for ISDN calls with CT software. These messages do display if a non-ISDN call is terminated. The new cause code display function replaces this existing message with more specific and useful information (call reference number, direction of disconnection, and the reason for call termination). Users can chose the option to display this information or not on each individual telephone or console. This option is turned On or Off in system programming C Explanation of the LCD Information Figure 10-24 shows ISDN Call Termination Fields; information changes. Table 10-9 provides a definition of these fields. Cause code values are further defined in tables later in this chapter. C A L L T E R M I N AT E D CR=0001...CO=10 4778 H Disconnect Cause Code: Provides the reason for call termination. Refer to the Disconnect Cause Code tables that follow in this section. Call Reference Disconnect Direction: "CO" means the Exchange Line disconnected the call. "CT" means the CT system disconnected the call. The last three digits are the call reference number. This number is incremented and generated by the CT as each call is made or received. The first digit of the call reference number indicates if it was an outgoing call made by the CT or an incoming call received by the CT. This digit is usually a "0" or "8" and is interpreted as follows: If the Exchange Line disconnected the call: 0 = the CT received the call (incoming) 8 = the CT made the call (outgoing) If the CT disconnected the call: 0 = the CT made the call (outgoing) 8 = the CT received the call (incoming) Figure 10-24 Call Termination LCD Display Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-31 ISDN Interfaces The above figure shows how the information on the display changes according to the status of the terminal when the line is disconnected. The content of each type of information is as shown in Table 10-9. ◆ Call Reference Number – The number of the disconnected call displays in a field that is up to four digits long (2 octets). If the number is not four digits long, the numbers will start from the far left. In case the call is disconnected before it is picked up, “NA (which stand for Not Available)” displays on the left. The highest bit of the call reference number indicates whether the call has been transmitted or received. For example, if the CT disconnects the call and the call reference number is “0001,” the call has been transmitted by the CT, and if the call reference number is “8001,” it means that the call was received by the CT. ◆ Reason for call termination – The reason is provided by a series of ISDN disconnection messages exchanged when the line is disconnected. The cause value within the information element of cause included in these messages will be used. In case a valid cause value cannot be found when the line is disconnected, “NA (which stand for Not Available)” displays. (See Table 10-9 for valid cause code descriptions.) Notes H C 10-32 ● On/Off of cause display function is set by programming each terminal (Program 35, LED 08). This setting is only valid for ISDN lines (PRI, BRI (S/T) in TE mode). Loop start trunk call termination data displays just like the ISDN line— the display format is the same as when cause display function is switched Off. (For Loop start trunks, use Program 15-0, 3.) ● In case of analogue Tie and DDI lines, the display information remains the same as before. ● Even if soft keys are switched on, information on call termination displays instead of the soft key's on status. However, the function of the soft key itself remains valid. For example, even when the soft key's on status is not displayed, ABR registration can be enabled by pressing [MODE] key on the terminal corresponding to the soft key's ABR position. ● The cause display remains until some kind of operation (such as going on-hook, making a call, receiving a call, etc.) changes the display. This is to prevent the display from being changed until the System Administrator reads the information on call termination when the line is disconnected in an unusual way. At this time, the busy tone that starts when the line is disconnected will also continue. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Call Termination Examples H CALL TERMINATED CR=8004 CT=NA This is an example of the call being terminated because layer 2 stopped operating during the call. The call has be started by CT’s reception through a PRI line. CALL TERMINATED CR=NA CT=NA This example shows when the CT side fails to actuate layer 2 through PRI or BRI line when layer 2 stops operating. This is the only case then “NA” is used for the call reference number. CALL TERMINATED CR=0005 CO=11 This example shows a call being terminated due to signal loss that occurred during the call. The call has been started by the CT’s transmission through a PRI line. CALL TERMINATED CR=8001 CT=11 This example shows a line disconnected due to 11H , “User busy,” from the network side when the call from the CT side is made through the PRI line. If ABR registration is enabled and the soft key is switched On, the functions are valid even through they do not display on the soft key. This example shows the line being disconnected by 51H, “Invalid CALL TERMINATED call reference value,” from the CT side after the system detects CR=0002 CT=51 something abnormal during the call. This call started from the CT through the PRI line. CALL TERMINATED CR=0003 CT=NA This example shows the call being terminated because there was no response from the network side to the SETUP signal transmission from the CT side through the PRI line. C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-33 ISDN Interfaces Q931 ETSI (BTNR 191) Clearing Cause Codes . Table 10-9 DEC Value BT Note 1 1 Clearing Cause Codes HEX Value 01 Cause Name BT Note 2 Unassigned (unallocated number) 2 02 No route to specified transmit network 3 03 No route to destination Typical location of generation Local network Remote user Transit network Local network Local network Remote user H C 4 04 6 06 7 07 16 10 Channel unacceptable BT Note 3 Channel unacceptable Call awarded & being delivered in an established channel Normal call clearing 17 11 User busy 18 12 19 13 21 15 No user responding User alerting, no answer Call rejected 22 16 Number changed Typical carrying message as identified by receiving side At remote interface At local interface Release complete, disconnect Release complete, disconnect Disconnect Release complete Disconnect, release complete Release complete, Disconnect disconnect Local network Release Local network Release Local network Release Remote user Disconnect Remote user Release complete Remote network remote network Remote network Remote user Release complete Disconnect Disconnect Local network Remote user 26 27 19 Non-selected user clearing 1B Destination out of order Remote network Release complete, disconnect Local network 29 1C 1D Invalid number format (incompatible number) BT note 5 Facility rejected Remote user Disconnect Disconnect Disconnect, release complete Disconnect Disconnect Release complete, disconnect Disconnect, release complete Disconnect Remote network Disconnect Local network Release complete, disconnect Local network Remote network Remote user 10-34 Disconnect Release Local network 28 Disconnect Disconnect Release complete, disconnect Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Table 10-9 DEC Value BT Note 1 Clearing Cause Codes (Continued) HEX Value Cause Name BT Note 2 30 1E Response to status enquiry 31 1F Normal unspecified Typical location of generation Local user, local network Remote network Local network H C 34 22 No circuit, channel available 38 26 Network out of order 41 29 Temporary failure 42 2A Switching equipment congestion 43 2B Access information discarded 44 2C Requested circuit, channel not available 47 2F 49 31 Remote user Transit network Local peer entity Remote user, local network Local network, local user Local network Remote user 57 39 Bearer capability not authorised Local network 58 3A Bearer capability not authorised Local network 63 3F 65 41 66 42 Service or option not available, unspecified Bearer capability not implemented Channel type not implemented Release complete Disconnect Release, release complete Congestion control BT note 7 Status Release complete Release complete Disconnect Release complete Disconnect, release complete release Disconnect, release complete release Disconnect, release complete Disconnect, release complete Local network Remote network Disconnect Disconnect Local network Local network Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Disconnect, release complete Remote network Local network Remote user Requested facility not implemented Release complete, disconnect Release complete, disconnect Disconnect Disconnect Release, release complete 32 45 Release complete, disconnect release complete Resource unavailable, unspecified Quality of service unavailable Remote user 69 Status Local user, local network Requested facility not subscribed 50 Typical carrying message as identified by receiving side At remote interface At local interface Disconnect, release complete Disconnect Release, Disconnect Release, release complete 10-35 ISDN Interfaces Table 10-9 DEC Value BT Note 1 Clearing Cause Codes (Continued) HEX Value 70 46 79 4F 81 51 82 52 83 BT note 6 53 H C 84 85 54 55 86 56 88 57 90 BT note 5 5A 91 5B 95 5F 96 60 97 61 98 62 99 63 100 64 101 65 102 66 10-36 Cause Name BT Note 2 Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available Service or option not implemented, unspecified Invalid call reference value Identified channel does not exist A suspended call exists, but this call identity does not Call identity in use No call suspended Call having the requested call identity has been cleared Incompatible destination Destination address missing or incomplete Invalid transit network selection Invalid message, unspecified Mandatory information element is missing Message type nonexistent or not implemented Message not compatible with call state or message type non-existent or not implemented Information element non-existent or not implemented Invalid information element contents Message not compatible with call state Recovery on time expiry Typical location of generation Typical carrying message as identified by receiving side At remote interface At local interface Local user, local network Release, release complete status Release complete Local network Resume reject Local network Local network Suspend reject Resume reject Local network Resume reject Remote user Release complete Disconnect Local network Disconnect Transit network Disconnect Disconnect release release complete Release complete, status Release, release complete status Local network Local network Local network, local user Local user, local network Status Local user, local network Status Local user, local network Status release, release complete Local user, local network Status, release, release complete Status disconnect, release, release complete Disconnect, release Release Local network, local user Local network Local user Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 ISDN Interfaces Table 10-9 DEC Value BT Note 1 Clearing Cause Codes (Continued) HEX Value 111 6F 127 7F Cause Name BT Note 2 Protocol error, unspecified Interworking, unspecified Typical location of generation Typical carrying message as identified by receiving side At remote interface At local interface Remote network Disconnect BT Notes BT Note 1. The comprehensive list of causes from the ETS is retained although not all cause values listed are generated by the BT ISN. BT Note 2. For an interim period the BT ISDN shall not support diagnostics. BT Note 3. For an interim period the BT ISDN shall use non-standard cause #4 to indicate “channel unacceptable” instead of cause #6. BT Note 4. Also procedures in ETS 300 007 (formerly T, S 46-50). BT requirements for packet mode access will be described in another BTNR. H BT Note 5. For an interim period the BT ISDN shall use non-standard cause #90 “destination address missing or incomplete” instaead of #28. BT Note 6. For an interim period cause #83 should be interpreted as “call identity does not exist”. This cause combines the functions of cause #83, #85 and #86. BT Note 7. For an interim period the BT ISDN shall not support this message type. C Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 10-37 ISDN Interfaces H C 10-38 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Notes to Users 1. Safety Approval Toshiba Information System (U.K.) Ltd declare that the Strata CT complies with the EEC’s LVD directive, (Directive No. 73/23/EEC). The product has been assessed and found to comply with EN60950:2000. The notes listed below form part of the products compliance with the aforementioned European Norm. 1-1. The system, PCOU2F unit, must be earthed. The earth connection must be hardwired to a main distribution point. The main cabinet must be earthed. 1-2. Table A1 below identifies and classifies the ports available on the system: H C Table A1 Type of Circuit (EN60950 Classification) Port Location Port Description SELV Power Supply BPSU672F For connection of external 24 volt batteries. SELV Processor Boards: B1CU1F, B2CAU1A, B3CAU1A, B5CAU1A For connection of external Music-on-Hold source SELV PDKU2A For connection of Toshiba proprietry terminals. SELV PEKU2F For connection of Toshiba Visually Handicapped Console terminals. TNV3 RSTU1F For connection of approved 2 wire devices. TNV3 RSTU3F For connection of approved 2 wire devices. TNV3 PCOU2F/PCOUS2F For connection to PTO provided Loop Call Unguarded Clear exchange lines. TNV1 RBSU2A 2 Cct ISDN2, (CTR3), Basic Rate I/F. For connection to euro-ISDN services. TNV1 RBSU1A 2 Cct ISDN2, (CTR3), Basic Rate I/F. For connection to euro-ISDN services. TNV1 RBSS1A & RBSS2A 2 Cct ISDN2, Basic Rate I/F. For connection to euro-ISDN services. TNV1 RPTU1F 1ccts ISDN30, (CTR4), primary rate I/F> For connection to euro-ISDN services. TNV2 PACU2F 4Cct AC15 Private Circuit I/F, (CTR17). For connection to PTO Private Circuit services. TNV2 PEMU2F 4Cct AC15 Private Circuit I/F, (CTR17). For connection to PTO Private Circuit services. SELV PEPU2A Contains various ports for connection of audio paging amplifiers, dry relay contacts to control external equipment. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 A-1 Notes to Users Type of Circuit (EN60950 Classification) Port Location Port Description SELV PIOU2A Contains various ports for connection of audio paging amplifiers, dry relay contacts to control external equipment,two RS232 ports for connection to PCs or printers. SELV PIOUS2A Contains various ports for connection of audio paging amplifiers, dry relay contacts to control external equipment,two RS232 ports for connection to PCs or printers. SELV RSIU1A Serial port board, (1 x V24), for programming/Call Logging. SELV RSIS1A Serial port board, (1 x V24), for programming/Call Logging. Fits on RSIU1A. SELV RRCU1A Optical interface board for connecting remote cabinets. SELV EKT and DKT Headset ports on any of the range of key telephones. Any peripheral apparatus connected to the above ports must have the same EN60950 classification. ie. H ◆ SELV ports must only be connected to SELV type ports. ◆ TNV ports must only be connected to TNV type ports. 1-3. The system must hardwired into a switched fused spur, this spur must be installed in accordance with 16th edition of the IEE wiring regulations, aka BS7671:1992. 1-4. Environmental Installation details. C The Strata CT is designed to work within the following environmental conditions: ◆ Operating temperature 0oC to 40oC ◆ Humidity 20% to 80% 1-5. Lithium Batteries Warning! A-2 All service personnel are informed that Lithium type battery cells are fitted to the following units - B1CU1F, B2CAU1A, B2CBU1F, B3CAU1A, B3CB1F, B5CAU1A, B5CBU1F. In accordance with safety requirements you are advised that in the event of these cells going faulty, the entire unit must be returned to Toshiba Information Systems for correct disposal. Under no circumstances must the cells be removed or replaced. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Notes to Users 2. EMC Compliance Toshiba Information Systems (U.K.) Ltd declare that the Strata CT complies with the EEC’s EMC directive, Directive No. 89/366/EEC as amended by directive 92/31/EEC. The product has been assessed and found to comply with the following generic standards, in the present absence of any product specific standards: ◆ EN55022:1998, (Emissions) ◆ EN52024:1998 (Immunity) The notes listed below form part of the products’ compliance with the aforementioned European Norm. To ensure EMC compliance the system must installed in accordance with the instructions in the “Installation and Maintenance” manual. In order to maintain compliance any shielded cables supplied and/or ferrite suppression cores must be used. Equipment details Base Cabinet Dimensions: H Height - 296mm Width - 672mm Depth - 270mm Height - 254mm Width - 672mm Depth - 270mm Weight - 14.1kg (fully equipped) Weight - 14.1kg (fully equipped) Warning! C Expansion Cabinet Dimensions: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this Product may cause radio interference in which case the User may be required to take adequate measures 3. Type Approval Toshiba Information Systems (UK), Ltd, (TIU), hereby declares that the Strata CT product complies with the requirements of the EC Directive 1999/5/EC, (aka Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment directive). A manufacture’s Declaration under this Directive allows connection to the relevant Public Network Services and the right to place the Product on the market. The Strata CT is classified as “Call Routing Apparatus” it is intended to be connected to the various Public Telecommunications Network Services for the purpose of generating and terminating “calls”. Table A2 below lists the intended purposes of all the system interfaces. Table A2 Interface Type PCOU2F Network Service Analogue Loop Calling Unguarded Lines RPTU1F Euro ISDN30 service. Approved to CTR 4. RBSU1A & RBSU2A Euro ISDN2 service. Approved to CTR 3. PACU2F Analogue 4 wire Private Circuits, uses AC15 signalling. Approved to TBR 17. PEMU2F Analogue 4 wire Private Circuits, uses DC5 signalling. Approved to TBR 17. The system must be installed in accordance with BS6701 parts 1 and 2, the latest issue shall apply. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 A-3 Notes to Users Toshiba Information Systems claim approval to OFTEL general variation NS/V/1235/P/ 100020. The information contained in this paragraph supports Toshiba’s claim: The following features require the interconnection of 2 or more exchange lines. ◆ Multi-party conferencing ◆ Call Forward External* ◆ Translation of Un-used Extension numbers* ◆ DISA* *Warning! These features can allow an Incoming callers access to an outgoing exchange line. There is an engineering programming parameter which can disable these features. In addition the DISA feature can be “password” protected. USERS SHOULD BE AWARE THAT THESE FEATURES CAN BE USED FOR FRAUDULENT PURPOSES. Please consult your supplier to ensure any necessary security measures are enabled. 4. Network Planning Information H 4-1. Strata CT Tone Plan. Table A3 below lists the characteristics of the tones and signals used in Strata CT. Table A3 Tones/Signal to: Frequency Cadence Meaning Exchange Line Music On Hold N/A Call on Hold DKT 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 500/640Hz modul.10Hz 1300/1780Hz modul.10Hz 860/1180Hz modul.10Hz 2000Hz mod by 10Hz 500Hz 1000/800Hz 1000/800Hz 660/500 2000Hz 1s On 3s Off 1s On 3s Off 1s On 3s Off 1s On 3s Off 1s On 3s Off 0.6s On 1000Hz/0.6s On 800Hz 0.6s On 1000Hz/0.6s 800Hz 0.7s On 660Hz/0.7s On 500Hz 1s On 3s Off I/C PSTN call Opt.1. I/C PSTN call Opt.2. I/C PSTN call Opt.3. I/C PSTN to Busy DKT I/C Int call Call from D/phone A Call from D/phone B Call from D/phone B Busy/DND Override 2 Wire extns 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 20Hz DTMF A DTMF D DTMF B MWI Signal 1s On 3s Off 80 or 160mS 80 or 160mS 80 or 160mS 0.9 ON/0.1s Off Ring Signal Voice Mail Answer Voice Mail Disconnect Voice Mail Recall Message Waiting Signal Tie Lines 1. 2. 3. 4. 400Hz 350/440Hz 400/450Hz 400HZ 0.375s On/0.375s Off Continuous 0.4 On/0.2s Off/0.4s On/2s Off 0.375s On/0.375s Off Extension Busy Dial Tone Ring Tone Delay Busy Tone DISA calls 1. 2. 3. 4. 400Hz 350/440Hz 4000/450Hz 400Hz 0.375s On/0.375s Off Continuous 0.4 On/0.2s Off/0.4s On/2s Off 0.375s On/0.375s Off Extension Busy Dial Tone Ring Tone Delay Busy Tone C A-4 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Notes to Users Table A3 (Continued) Tones/Signal to: Internal general Frequency 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cadence 350/400Hz 400/450Hz 400Hz 400Hz 400Hz Meaning Continuous 0.4 On/0.2s Off/0.4s On/2s Off 0.375s On/0.375s Off 0.375s On/0.375s Off 1s On Dial Tone Ringing Tone Extension Tone NU/Reorder Tone Executive override 4-2. System Port to Port losses. Table A4 below lists the various “typical” transmission gains/losses when inter-connecting the various port types. Table A4 Sys Port Type PCOU2F H PCOU2F RBSU1A RPTU1F PEMU2F PACU2F to fm to fm to fm to fm to fm 3.7 3.7 1.8 1.9 1.8 1.9 3.1 3.2 -0.7 -1.5 RPTU1F 1.9 1.8 0 0 0 0 RBSU2A 1.9 1.8 0 0 0 0 PEMU2F 3.1 3.2 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.6 2.6 -2.0 -2.0 PACU2F -0.7 -1.5 -3.4 -2.5 -3.4 -2.5 -2.0 -2.0 -6.0 -6.0 _0.5 -1.0 -2.4 -2.8 -2.4 -2.8 -1.1 -1.5 -5.9 -6.2 RSTU3F RSTU3F to fm -5.2 -5.2 -Values indicate a transmission loss. 4-3. Loudness Rating. C The table below lists the measured loudness rating of the Toshiba proprietary terminals. SLR and RLR @ 0km PSTN. (All values are +/-dB) Table A5 System Port Type PDKU2F ITS-A SLR RLR PCOU2F 1dB -5dB to -16dB RPTU1F/ RBSU1A/ TBSU1A 6dB 2dB to -10dB PEMU2F 4dB -2dB to -14dB PACU2F 8dB 0dB to -9dB Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 A-5 Notes to Users H C A-6 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Glossary Term H C Definition AA Auto Attendant (built-in or external). This feature acts as an automatic operator that directs incoming callers to stations by offering a menu of dialling prompts. ACD Automatic Call Distribution. Allows incoming calls to be distributed to a group of ACD agents. The ACD supervisor's LCD telephone displays ACD Agent and Group information which allows the supervisor to monitor calls and assist agents. ACD/MIS Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with Management Information System (MIS). ADM Add-on Module—See DADM. Amphenol Connector A 25-pair connector typically used on a multi-button telephone set for interfacing cables to many electronic key and PBX systems. BCU Represents all of the Strata CT processors. The Strata CT processors are: B1CU, B2CAU/B2CBU, B3CAU/B3CBU, B5CAU/B5CBU. B2CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B2CAU/B2CBU. B3CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B3CAU/B3CBU. B5CAU/BU Abbreviation for the B5CAU/B5CBU. B-channel Used in ISDN. Data or voice information is transmitted on the Bchannels of an ISDN line at 64kpbs. The B-channel refers to the frequency range of transmissions on a copper pair; it is a logical, rather than a physical channel. Also see BRI and PRI. BFIF Floor Mount Installation Kit—Kit that is used to floor mount systems. BGM Background Music—Allows customer-supplied music to be sent to telephone speakers and external speakers. bps Bits Per Second—Unit of measure that refers to the transmission speed (baud rate) of electronic signals. It is used when describing data interface unit and modem operation. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 GL-1 Glossary Term H C Definition BRCS Dual-tone Multi-frequency Receiver—An optional upgrade to the system common control unit (BCU) that provides Dual-tone MultiFrequency (DTMF) receivers for system Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Exchange lines, E&M Tie lines, Auto attendant announcement devices, remote change of call forward-external destination, and stations and other peripherals that connect to standard telephone circuits. The BRCS comes in three models: the BRCS-4 (provides four DTMF receivers), the BRCS-8 (eight DTMF receivers), and the BRCS12 (12 DTMF receivers). BRI Basic Rate Interface—ISDN line with 2B + 1D channel. BRI lines can have a U-interface with RJ11 jacks and single twisted pair wiring, or RJ45 four pair S/T interface wiring. CT Computer Telephony. CHSUB XXX Base Cabinet—Unit that houses the processor PCB (RCTU or BCU), as well as universal slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The Base Cabinet also contains a power supply that provides power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the base cabinet PCBs. CHSUE XXX Expansion Cabinet—Optional unit that has ten universal slots for station, line, and option PCBs. The expansion cabinet has a power supply that furnishes power for all of the stations and peripherals connected to the expansion cabinet PCBs. As many as four expansion cabinets can be added to the system. CLASS Custom Local Area Signalling Services—Defines a number of features offered by local telephone companies. CLI Calling Line Identification—Telephone number of the calling party sent to the Strata CT system over incoming loop start Exchange lines. CODECs Coder/Decoder—Semiconductors that allow the system to process analog-to-digital and digital-to-analogue conversions. DADM Digital Add-on-Module—Optional device that connects to 2000 & 2500-series digital telephones to provide the telephones with 20 flexible feature buttons that can be assigned individually for Direct Station Selection, System and Personal Speed Dial, and Exchange line access. D-channel Used in ISDN. This channel transmits call control information (out-ofband signalling) for B-channels. The D-channel is a logical, not a physical channel. DDCB Digital Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated digital telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and provides door lock control. DDSS Digital Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The DDSS connects only to designated digital telephone circuits, and is associated with a digital telephone. DDI Line Direct Dialling Inward line. GL-2 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Glossary Term H C Definition DISA Direct Inward System Access—A feature that allows an outside party to access the Strata CT system internal stations or outgoing Exchange lines without having to go through an operator or automated attendant. An optional security code may be set to prevent unauthorised access to outgoing Exchange lines for through system calling. DK Digital Key. DK Admin Toshiba's customer database programming and upload/download software package for Strata DK systems. 7925-P 7925-P—Device required for floor-mounted systems with three or more cabinets to connect AC power and reserve power battery cabling to the system. Cabling from the AC power source and from the reserve power battery source can only be installed by a licensed electrician. DKT Digital Telephone. DKT2000 & 2500 series Toshiba proprietary digital telephones consisting of four models: two 10-button models with handsfree answerback and/or LCD display and two 20 button telephones with speakerphone or a speakerphone with LCD display. [DN] Directory Number. DPFT Power Failure/Emergency Transfer Unit—An optional backup unit that provides emergency service during power failures by automatically connecting up to eight standard telephones to designated Exchange lines. DSS Direct Station Selection—Feature which allows a telephone user (as well as a DSS console and ADM user) to call another station with the touch of a flexible feature button. DTMF Dual-tone Multi-frequency—Push-button tone dialling. DVSU A subassembly that equips a digital telephone with the capability to receive Speaker Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. DVSU is not required to receive Handset OCA (HS-OCA). EKT Electronic Telephone. EOCU Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly—An optional upgrade to the Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or Electronic Telephone/ Standard Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) that enables properly configured telephones (see HVSU2) to receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. Exchange The facility which houses switching equipment that provides telephone service (Exchange lines, E & M Tie lines, DDI lines, Centrex lines, etc.) for the immediate geographical area. Exchange Line A term used to define the Strata CT system hardware circuits that connect to the Exchange line network line pair. Each Exchange line, DDI and Tie line circuit is assigned an Exchange line number in system software. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 GL-3 Glossary Term H C Definition HDCB Electronic Door Phone/Lock Control Unit—A peripheral hardware unit compatible with designated electronic telephone circuits that supports optional door phones (MDFBs) and provides door lock control. HDSS Electronic Direct Station Selection Console—A device that helps facilitate the processing of a heavy load of incoming calls. The HDSS console connects only to designated electronic telephone circuits, and is associated with electronic telephones. HESB External Speaker Box—A speaker/amplifier that can be configured with the system to provide a variety of functions, such as a paging speaker and/or Background Music (BGM) speaker. HESC-65A A cable used to connect an HHEU-equipped digital telephone or an HHEU-equipped electronic telephone to the external speaker box (HESB) for the Loud Ringing Bell feature. HHEU Headset/Loud Ringing Bell Interface—Subassembly that fits inside a digital telephone or a 6500-series electronic telephone to allow a headset or an external speaker box (HESB) to be connected to the telephone. HVSU2 Subassembly that fits into a 6500-series electronic telephone enabling it to receive Off-hook Call Announce (OCA) calls. The telephone must be connected to an Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PEKU) or a Standard Telephone/Electronic Telephone Interface Unit (PESU) equipped with an Off-hook Call Announce Subassembly (EOCU) to receive OCA, and must have three-pair wiring. IMDU Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on an Option Interface Unit (PIOU or PIOUS) that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration/maintenance terminal or DKi Admin/DKi Backup personal computer. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. LCD Liquid Crystal Display—The optional display on digital and electronic telephones that displays calling information. LCR Least Cost Routing. LED Light Emitting Diode—Status indicators located on printed circuit boards (PCBs), digital telephones, and electronic telephones. LSI Large Scale Integration—Related to circuit design technology. Strata CT system printed circuit boards (PCBs) use LSI circuit design. MDF Main Distribution Frame—The wiring frame usually located in a phone closet. MDFB Door Phone Box—A peripheral two-way speaker box option. MOH Music-on-Hold—Customer-supplied music or announcements can be sent to parties on-hold on Exchange lines or the intercom. OCA Off-hook Call Announce. There are two types: Handset OCA and Speaker OCA. OPS Off-premises Station. GL-4 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Glossary Term H C Definition PACU AC15 tie line unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with support for four AC15 circuits. PBTC A Toshiba-supplied cable used to connect customer-supplied batteries to a cabinet power supply in a one- or two-cabinet system for emergency reserve power for the entire system. PBX Private Branch Exchange—Industry-standard term which refers to a telephone switch, usually on-premises, which serves an individual company, and is connected to a public telephone exchange through the Exchange. PCB Printed Circuit Board. PCIU Computer Data Interface Unit—Replaces the normal telephone base and can be used with a Telephone Application Program Interface (TAPI) software application. PCM Pulse Code Modulation—A widely-used form of digital telephone switching. PCOU Exchange Line Interface Unit—A PCB that provides the system with four loop start Exchange lines. PDKU2 Digital Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight digital telephone circuits. In addition to digital telephones, the PDKU can support data interface units (stand-alone and integrated), a digital DSS console (DDSS), RPCI, ADM, and a digital door phone/lock control unit (DDCB). [PDN] Primary Directory Number. PEKU Electronic Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides the system with eight electronic telephone circuits, which can support electronic telephones, a Background Music source, a door phone/lock control unit (HDCB), an electronic DSS console (HDSS), and amplifiers for two Exchange-line conference calls. The PEKU is also used with older Strata systems. PEMU E & M Tie Line Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of REMU) that provides the system with support for four E & M Type I Tie lines. The PEMU is also used with older Strata systems. PEPU External Page Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface mainly for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades associated with external paging functions. [PhDN] Phantom Directory Number. PIOU Option Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides support and/or circuit interface for optional hardware peripherals and upgrades. PIOUS The same as the PIOU, with some exceptions; most notably, the PIOUS has one external paging interface zone, while the PIOU has four. PORT A term used to identify a station circuit or Exchange line circuit location. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 GL-5 Glossary Term H Definition PBTC1A-3M Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to cabinet power supplies. PPTC1A-3M A Toshiba-supplied adapter—An adapter that is used to connect: the modular SMDR, SMDI, MIS for ACD, Open Architecture (OA), maintenance ports of the PIOU, PIOUS, RSIU, or RSIS to the DB-9 connector of a call accounting machine, DK Admin, personal computer (PC), SMIS personal computer or Open Architecture personal computer. PRI Primary Rate Interface. PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network. PSTU Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background Music source, fax machines, etc.) The PSTU2 has a square wave ring generator that can be set for 190V peak-topeak or 130 V peak-to-peak. The PSTU2 is also used with older Strata systems. RAM Random Access Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds individual system configuration and feature programming. RAM is read/write memory, and can be easily revised in programming. RATU Attendant Console Interface Unit—Optional PCB that can support up to four attendant consoles and/or PC attendant consoles. RBSU ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Unit—Provides two circuits, each of which provide two simultaneous voice and/or data connections with a single interface. BRI uses the 2B+D transmission format which is defined as two 64-kbps bearer channels and one 16-kbps data (control channel). Available for Strata CT. RBSS ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Subassembly—Attaches to the RBSU to provide two additional BRI “U” circuits that can be used to connect to Network BRI lines and/or station-side connections only. Available for Strata CT. RBTC1A-2M Battery cable that connects reserve power batteries to RBDB battery distribution box (3 or more cabinet installations). RKYS Feature Key Upgrade—Subassembly that attaches to the common control unit to provide the system with optional features. There are three versions of the RKYS: the RKYS2, the RKYS3 and the RKYS4, each of which provides a distinct set of features. RMDS Remote Maintenance Modem Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RSIU Optional Interface Unit that allows the system to be connected with a remote administration/maintenance terminal or DK Admin personal computer. RPTU ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) Unit—Provides 2 data (control) channels and 30 bearer channels. All B-channels appear and program as Exchange lines in the Strata CT system and can be individually configured. C GL-6 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Glossary Term H C Definition ROM Read Only Memory—Refers to the type of system memory that holds static software that comprises the mechanics of the features’ functions. ROM is only revised by Toshiba software engineers. ROMS Remote Cabinet Interface Unit Subassembly—A subassembly installed on the RRCU that enables two Strata CT remote expansion cabinets to at one location. RSIS Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—A subassembly installed on the RSIU optional interface unit that allows the system to be connected to any of the following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local DK Admin personal computer, external maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer. RSIU Optional RS-232 Serial Interface Unit—An optional PCB that provides interface to any of the following features: voice mail SMDI, MIS for ACD, SMDR, local or remote DK Admin Personal computer, built-in (RMDS) or external system maintenance modem, Open Architecture personal computer. By itself, the RSIU PCB provides one interface port. With up to three RSIU/RMDS subassemblies, it can provide up to four interface ports. RSTU Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB (an older version of RSTU2) with a built-in ring generator that provides interface for eight-standard telephones or optional hardware peripherals (voice mail devices, Background music source, fax machines, etc.). The RSTU has a built-in 80V RMS sine wave ring generator. The RSTU also has connectors for the R48S, which extends station loop length and is described in this section. RSTU3 Standard Telephone Interface Unit—An optional PCB functionally identical to the RSTU. RSTU3 also contains a 90-volt DC message waiting/generator/switching circuit to operate standard telephone message waiting lamps. RWBF1 Wall bracket Fixture—Bracket that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor mount systems. RFMF Floor Mount Fixture—Fixture that is part of an installation kit (RFIF) that is used to floor mount systems. R48S Optional 48V Power Supply—Subassembly that can be connected to the RSTU to extend the loop length of standard telephone circuits (including the resistance of the phone) from 600 ohms to 1200 ohms. [SDN] Secondary Directory Number. SF Super Frame. SLT Single-line Telephone. SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface: RS-232 link from PIOU, PIOUS, RSIS, or RSIU modular jack connected to a voice mail machine to provide Strata CT voice mail integration. SMIS Software MIS for ACD. Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 GL-7 Glossary Term H C Definition SSTU Factory-installed sub-unit board that is “piggy-backed” onto the PSTU or PSTU2. S/T Interface Reference interface points (“S” or “T”) of an ISDN network. S/T interfaces are RJ45, 8-wire connection interfaces for ISDN equipment. An NT1 is needed to network U-type BRI lines to S/T type interfaces. TAPI Telephone Application Programming Interface. TA Terminal Adapter or ISDN modem that converts PC and other types of protocol into a signal that works with ISDN. Generally, TAs support RJ11 voice ports and RS-232C or V.35 or V.449 data interfaces. TE Terminal Equipment. This refers to devices using ISDN service (telephones, faxes, computers, etc.). TE1 supports ISDN formats with S/T or U-type intefaces. TSPI Telephony Service Provider Interface. TTY Flexible RS-232 port which can be used for maintenance SMDI and MIS (ACD). TTY-PC-CABLE Designed to connect directly to the DB9 connector of PC COM ports, while PPTC connects directly to an ASCII terminal female DB25, not a PC COM port male DB25. U Interface A single twisted pair of copper wire on an RJ11 jack. The wiring is identical to POTS, with different signaling. Only one U-interface device can be attached per line. Universal slot Slots in a telephone KSU/cabinet that are used for a variety of optional PCBs. GL-8 Strata CT I&M Manual October 2000 Index Symbols [DN]‚ [PDN]‚ [SDN], [PhDN], BCU xi A H C ACD installation guidelines 7-4 Strata CT built-in auto attendant 7-6 to voice mail or auto attendant 7-6 add-on modules capacities 1-7 ADM installation (DKT2000) 5-16 attendant console 5-32 auto attendant 6-46 built-in ACD 7-6 ACD applications 6-50 block diagram 6-51 installation 6-49 overview 6-46 programming 6-47 simultaneous announcements 1-6 Strata CT feature key 1-3 auto disconnect digital announcer 6-50 B B1CU PCB 2-42 B2CAU PCB 2-43 B2CBU PCB 2-44 B3CAU PCB 2-45 Strata CT I&M October 2000 B3CBU Controls, Indicators, and Interface Connectors 2-46 B3CBU PCB 2-46 B5CAU PCB 2-47 B5CBU PCB 2-48 background music (see BGM) BCU installation procedures 2-40 BCU PCBs 2-42, 2-45, 2-46 beep strap 5-14, 5-20 BGM 6-3 alternate source installation 6-9 external installation 6-10 options 6-3, 6-6 single page zone 6-28 to connect source 6-9 BRCS 2-39 BRI circuit jack (TE or NT mode) 10-15 BRI wire type recommendations 10-16 built-in auto attendant (see auto attendant, built-in) busy override 5-15 BVPU 3-3 configuration 3-3 C cabling DDCB/HDCB/MDFB 5-23 call monitoring 10-26 call park orbits 1-6 caller ID 1-6 IN-1 Index camp-on ring tone 5-15 carbon headset/handset strap 5-14 CNIS 1-6 computer telephony integration 9-1 conferencing 1-6 connecting to network side (TE-mode) 10-18 connecting to station devices (NT-mode) 10-19 cross connect record station PDKU 4-4 RSTU2/PSTU 4-12 D H C DADM 5-26 DDCB/HDCB 3-10, 5-23 assignments guide 6-14 cabling 5-23 programming 5-25 wall mounting 5-24 DDI 1-6 DH 1-6 digital add-on module (see DADM) digital announcer auto disconnect 6-50 digital telephone connecting to system 5-4 Strata CT 1-7 upgrade 5-8 beep strap 5-14 busy override/camp-on ring tone over handset/headset 5-15 carbon headset/handset strap 5-14 external power strap 5-16 loud ringing bell/headset 5-11 microphone/speaker sensitivity adjustment 5-15 simultaneous voice/data 5-8 IN-2 TAPI 5-8 telephone speaker off-hook call announce 5-4 digital telephone interface unit 3-7 direct station selection (see DSS) DISA 6-37 distributed hunt 1-6 DKT2000 ADM installation 5-16 DKT2510 strap/connector locations 5-11 door lock control 6-10 DDCB/HDCB 6-14 relay options 6-10 door locks 1-7 door phone (see MDFB) 5-23 door phone/lock control unit (see DDCB/ HDCB) door phones 1-7 DPFT installation 6-2 DSS console system connection 5-21 DTMF receiver subassembly 1-3 DTMF receiver unit 2-39 DVSU 5-4 installation 5-10 E E & M tie line interface unit 3-23 earthing terminal screws 10-16 electronic telephone connecting to system 5-5 interface unit 3-9 system capacities 1-7 upgrade 5-16 beep strap 5-20 carbon headset/handset strap 5-20 handset receiver volume-up strap Strata CT I&M October 2000 Index H C 5-21 loud ringing bell/headset 5-18 microphone/speaker threshold 5-21 off-hook call announce 5-16 EOCU illustration 3-9 exchange lines capacities 1-7 groups 1-6 Strata CT 1-4 expansion KSU PCBs PACU 3-26 PCOU 3-19, 3-21 PEMU 3-23 external page zones 1-6 external page 6-10 installation 6-28 with BGM 6-28 interface unit 3-17 external speaker unit (see HESB) HDSS console 3-10 connections 5-22 headset upgrade 5-11 HESB amplified speaker installation 6-22 installation test 6-22 external speaker unit 6-17 loud speaker amplification 6-17 installation for DKT 6-18 test 6-20 loud speaker amplification for EKT 620 talkback amplified speaker 6-23 installation 6-24 wall mounting 6-26 HHEU 5-11, 5-18 installation 5-12, 5-19 HVSI 5-16 installation 5-17 HVSU 5-16 installation 5-17 F I fault finding 8-1 fault isolation 8-3 fault isolation flowcharts 8-7 catastrophic faults 8-9 DSS console faults 8-12 exchange line dial tone faults 8-11 fault classification 8-8 remote maintenance faults 8-15 station dial tone faults 8-10 voice mail auto attendant faults 8-13 functional block diagram 1-13 IMDU 3-12 Insight DK (STRATA CT only) 7-15 installation 5-8 ADM 5-16 alternate BGM source 6-9 built-in auto attendant 6-49 DADM 5-26 door phone 5-23 DPFT 6-2 external BGM 6-10 external page 6-28 MOH 6-4 MOH/BGM as BGM 6-9 H handset OCA stations 1-7 Strata CT I&M October 2000 IN-3 Index H C PCIU 5-8 peripherals 6-1 SMDR printer/call accounting device 6-39 voice mail 6-45 ISDN BRI RBSU/RBSS cabinet installation 10-14 installation 10-12 interface unit 10-8 led indications 10-15 leds and connectors 10-17 monitor jack 10-16 option switches, jumpers, and connectors 10-13 overview 10-9 premise wiring guidelines 1016, 10-17 modular jack pin configurations 10-15 performance monitoring 10-29 PRI RPTU overview 10-3 testing and troubleshooting 10-8 RBSU/RBSS 10-18, 10-19 RBSU/RBSS premise wiring guidelines 10-16 RPTU switches, jumpers, and connectors 10-5 SMDR output 6-35 timing and synchronisation 10-22, 1026 ISDN BRI RBSS PCB installation 10-14 RBSU/RBSS capacity and cabinet slot IN-4 information 10-10 PS-1 line power option 10-10 R40S PCB installation 10-14 L line capacities 1-4 lock control unit 5-23 loud ringing bell upgrade 5-11 headset upgrade 5-18 M MDFB 5-23 cabling 5-23 volume control 5-25 wall mounting 5-25 microphone/speaker sensitivity adjustment 5-15 threshold 5-21 MOH 6-3 installation 6-4 options 6-3 relay control 6-17 MOH/BGM installation 6-9 multiple PIOU/PIOUS/RSIU installation 6-53 music-on-hold (see MOH) N night ringing selected page zones 6-34 non-built-in auto attendant (see auto attendant, non-built in) O OCA speaker 1-7 off-hook call announce 1-7 Strata CT I&M October 2000 Index upgrade 5-16 off-premises stations 1-7 option interface unit 3-12 P H C PACU 3-26 controls, indicators & connectors 3-28 illustration 3-28 installation 3-26 programming 3-27 page single zone with BGM 6-28 paging external zones 1-6 groups 1-6 max. simultaneous stations 1-6 PC attendant console system capacities 1-7 wiring 4-9 PCB circuits, interface options and connectors 1-8 PCBs PACU 3-26 PCOU 3-19 PEMU 3-23 PCIU installation 5-8 PCIU used for TAPI 1-7 PCOU 3-19 controls, indicators, connectors 3-21 illustration 3-21 installation 3-19 programming 3-20 PDKU 3-7 hardware options 3-7 illustration 3-8 programming 3-7 Strata CT I&M October 2000 PEKU 3-9 hardware options 3-9 illustration 3-11 installation 3-10 programming 3-10 PEMU connectors, controls, indicators 3-25 illustration 3-25 installation procedures 3-23 programming 3-24 PEPU 3-17 installation procedure 3-17 programming 3-18 peripherals installation 6-1 pickup groups 1-6 PIOU/PIOUS 3-12 hardware options remote maintenance modem unit (IMDU) 3-12 installation 3-13 programming 3-13 power failure options 6-1 processor PCB subassemblies 1-3 processor PCBs 1-2 program checklist voice mail 6-44 programming considerations Stratagy 6-42 voice mail 6-42, 6-43 PSTU hardware option 3-36 illustration 3-37 installation 3-36 PSTU & RSTU 3-35 IN-5 Index R H C R40S1A 10-14 R48S illustration 3-35 RATU controls, indicators, and connectors 322 illustration 3-22 installation 3-22 RBSS 10-14 RBSU 1-8 overview 10-9 RBSU/RBSS 10-8, 10-14, 10-16, 10-17 relay control options 6-10 remote expansion cabinet unit 1-11 remote expansion cabinets (Strata CT) 249 RMDS 3-29 RPCI 5-8 RPTU 1-8, 10-5 RRCS 1-3 RRCU 1-11, 2-49, 2-52 RS-232/modem interface unit 3-29 RSIS 3-29 RSIU 3-29 RSTU2/RSTU3 illustration 3-37 installation 3-36 S simultaneous voice/data upgrade 5-8 SMDR direct inward system access exchange lines (see DISA) 6-37 printer/call accounting device installation 6-39 options 6-34 printout example 6-37 IN-6 DISA internal station call 6-37 DISA outgoing exchange line call 6-38 ring, no answer DISA call 6-37 programming considerations 6-39 speaker OCA stations 1-7 speakerphone 5-15, 5-21 speed dial system capacities 1-6 standard telephone 1-7 connecting to system 5-5 interface unit 3-35 station apparatus 5-1 telephones 5-1 station message detail recording (see SMDR) strap beep 5-14, 5-20 carbon headset/handset 5-14, 5-20 external power 5-16 handset receiver volume-up 5-21 Strata CT architecture 1-2 base cabinet 1-3 base cabinet installation 2-5 BCU programming 2-40 expansion cabinet 1-4 expansion cabinet installation 2-5 expansion cabinets 2-26 functional block diagram 1-13 interface PCB options 1-11 maximum line capacities 1-4 PCBs (see Universal PCBs) power requirements 1-19, 2-4 remote expansion cabinet unit 2-49 telephone stations & peripherals 1-7 universal slot PCBs & subassemblies Strata CT I&M October 2000 Index 1-8 Stratagy 6-41 programming considerations 6-42 T H C talkback amplified speaker (see HESB) TAPI upgrade 5-8 telephone (see station apparatus) installation 5-3 wall mounting 5-5 telephones DKT 1-7 EKT 1-7 tenants 1-6 toll restriction 1-6 U universal slot PCB BVPU 3-3 PDKU 3-7 PEKU 3-9 PEPU 3-17 PIOU/PIOUS 3-12 RSIU/RSIS/RMDS 3-29 universal slot PCBs PACU 3-26 PCOU 3-19 PEMU 3-23 universal slots 1-7 (general) 6-43 SMDI 1-6 system installation 6-45 voice messaging customer-supplied 6-43 Stratagy 6-41 W Windows 5-28 windows operator’s console (WOC) 5-28 wiring diagram 2-wire tie line PEMU 4-16 4-wire tie line PEMU 4-17 exchange line to MDF PCOU 4-15 exchange/tie line 4-15 PDKU DKT/DDSS 4-2 PIOU or PEPU peripherals 4-19 PIOUS page/relay/alarm connection 4-21 station to MDF PSTU/RSTU2/RSTU3 standard telephone/voice mail/ DPFT 4-11 V verified account codes 1-6 voice mail 6-41 options 6-41 program checklist 6-44 programming considerations 6-42 programming considerations Strata CT I&M October 2000 IN-7 ">

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Digital business telephone system
- Easy to install and maintain
- Wide range of features
- Scalable to meet your growing needs
- Cost-effective solution
- Reliable and secure communication
- Flexible and customizable to meet your business needs
- Integration with other systems and applications
- Support for ISDN and VoIP
- Advanced call handling features
Frequently asked questions
The maximum station/line capacities for the Strata CT are dependent on the type of processor you are using and if it is a base or expansion cabinet. Refer to the Strata CT Configuration chapter for details.
Start by installing the power supply and testing its functionality. Ensure the system is properly earthed before installing the base and expansion cabinets.
Some of the peripheral options available include power failure transfer units, music-on-hold systems, external page options, and SMDR printers/call accounting devices.